World Water Safety

INTERNATIONAL LIFE SAVINGFEDERATIONILS COMPETITION RULE BOOK

Rules, Standards and Procedures forLifesaving World Championships,
ILS-Sanctioned Competitions, andILS Federation Competitions

2023 Edition
Effective 1 June 2023
(Update Effective 1 May 2024)

Gemeenteplein 26, 3010 Leuven, Belgium
Telephone: +32 16 89 60 60
Email: ils.hq@telenet.be
Web: www.ilsf.org

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Introduction

Page 1ILS COMPETITION RULE BOOK
2023 Edition
First Published June 2023
(Clarifications Issued September, December 2023 and May 2024)
Rules, Standards and Procedures forLifesaving World Championships,
ILS Sanctioned Competitions, and ILS Federation Competitions
Published by the International Life Saving Federation
Gemeenteplein 26, 3010 Leuven, Belgium
Telephone: +32 16 89 60 60
Email: ils.hq@telenet.be
Web: www.ilsf.org© Copyright: The International Life Saving Federation.
This Rule Book has been issued by the International Lifesaving Federation (ILS) as part of a comprehensive
set of ILS publications.
It replaces ILS Competition Rule Book, 2019 Edition (as revised and amended in 2022) and comes into effectas at the latter of the first day of the month and year of the edition or the date of publication on the ILS website(www.ilsf.org).
Note 1: The original (source) document for this Manual is the Official English version located in theCompetitive Lifesaving section of the ILS website. The source document is the authorised reference
document and is maintained in terms of all authorised amendments. The ILS may issue bulletinsand other documents from time to time to supplement this written publication.
Note 2: In any discrepancy between the Official ILS English version of this Rule Book and editions in otherlanguages, the most recent ILS English edition is deemed to be the definitive text. In any
discrepancy between the Official ILS English electronic version of this handbook and any print
editions, the most recent Official ILS electronic version is deemed to be the definitive text.
Note 3

Additional ILS Policies, Manuals and Documents may also be referenced in this Rule Book andpublished separately that may also apply to this Rule Book and to ILS competition. Suchdocumentation will also be available on the ILS website.

Acknowledgments
The ILS acknowledges the many lifesaving organisations and individuals who helped shape lifesaving
competition around the world. In particular, ILS acknowledges the 2016 – 2024 ILS Sport Commission andothers for their contributions to this Rule Book: Greg Allum AM - Surf Life Saving Australia Limited, Rebecca
Boyd - Lifesaving Society Canada, Anabel Navio Robles - Royal Spanish Lifesaving Federation, Sameh ElShazly - Egyptian Diving and Lifesaving Federation, Ian Fullagar - Surf Life Saving Australia Limited, Anni
Gardiner AM - Royal Life Saving Society Australia, John Martin MBE - ILS Event Director, Jelle Meintsma Lifesaving South Africa, Shusaku Miyabe - Japan Lifesaving Association, Dr Detlev Mohr PhD - German
Lifesaving Association, Teresa Myatt - Royal Life Saving Society United Kingdom, Eilkhan Nourimazandarani- Lifesaving and Diving Federation of the Islamic Republic of Iran, Wim Nuyens - Belgian Life Saving
Federation, Andrea Pennell - Surf Lifesaving Great Britain, Dott Giorgio Quintavalle - Italian Swimming
Federation (Lifesaving Section), Carsten Schlepphorst - German Lifesaving Association, Perry Smith Lifesaving Society Canada, Simone Spencer - Surf Life Saving New Zealand, David (Dave) Thompson AM Surf Life Saving Australia Limited, Nathalie Vallières Martin - Lifesaving Society Canada, Dr Harald
Vervaecke PhD - ILS Secretary General, Mark Weatherall - Surf Life Saving New Zealand, Edward Zebrowski- United States Lifesaving Association.
The ILS also acknowledges the 2016 - 2024 ILS Sport Regulations Committee for their contributions to thisrevised Rule Book: Greg Allum AM - Surf Life Saving Australia Limited, Stephanie Andrews - Royal Life
Saving Society United Kingdom, Jürgen Bonnemann - German Lifesaving Association, Rebecca Boyd Lifesaving Society Canada, John Coyne - Lifesaving South Africa, Arno Eberle - German Lifesaving
Association, Kiyohiro (Chris) Kurisu - Japan Lifesaving Association, Clare McGrath - Water Safety Ireland,
Bruce Matheson - Surf Life Saving New Zealand, Jerry Polesel - Italian Swimming Federation (Lifesaving
Section), Stephen Strange OAM - Surf Life Saving Australia Limited, Carolyn Wilson - Surf Life Saving

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Introduction

Page 2Australia Limited and Royal Life Saving Society Australia, Brian Velvin MNZM - Surf Life Saving New
Zealand.
Trademarks
Trademarks (TM)) of the International Life Saving Federation are World Water Safety TM, Oceanman TM, andOceanwoman TM, Ocean M TM, ILS Logo TM, ILS Flag TM, ILS Song TM, Rescue Series TM, Lifesaving WorldChampionships TM, World Conference on Drowning Prevention TM, Red over Yellow TM.
Copyright
The contents of this handbook are protected by copyright and may be used only for personal, non-commercial
purposes. All other rights are reserved. Commercial uses including publication, broadcast or redistribution inany medium are prohibited, unless authorised in writing by the publisher. Direct enquiries to the headquarters(secretariat) of the International Life Saving Federation.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Introduction

Page 3

TABLE OF CONTENTSSECTION 1 THE INTERNATIONAL LIFE SAVING FEDERATION ......................................................... S1-2
1. History............................................................................................................................................. S1-2
2.

Organisation ................................................................................................................................... S1-3

3.

Strategic Goals ............................................................................................................................... S1-3

4.

Sport Commission .......................................................................................................................... S1-3

5.

Athletes Committee ........................................................................................................................ S1-3

6.

Event Management Committee ...................................................................................................... S1-3

SECTION 2 GENERAL RULES AND PROCEDURES............................................................................. S2-2
1. ILS Sanctioned Competition ........................................................................................................... S2-2
2.

Competition Organisation and Administration ................................................................................ S2-2

3.

Competition Safety ......................................................................................................................... S2-4

4.

Technical, Safety and Other Officials ............................................................................................. S2-5

5.

World Records .............................................................................................................................. S2-20

6.

Official Start and Completion of Competition ................................................................................ S2-21

7.

Revailing Conditions ..................................................................................................................... S2-21

8.

Video Recording Devices ............................................................................................................. S2-22

9.

Communication Devices in Competition ....................................................................................... S2-22

10. Competition Attire ......................................................................................................................... S2-22
11. Age Categories ............................................................................................................................. S2-24
12 Competitors with a Disability......................................................................................................... S2-26
13. Interclub, National and International Member Competition Transfers .......................................... S2-26
14. Doping Control .............................................................................................................................. S2-26
15. Code of Conduct ........................................................................................................................... S2-27
16. Misconduct.................................................................................................................................... S2-28
17. Disqualifications and “Did Not Finish” Classifications ................................................................... S2-30
18. Protests and Appeals.................................................................................................................... S2-31
SECTION 3 POOL EVENTS ..................................................................................................................... S3-2
1. General Conditions for Pool Competition ....................................................................................... S3-2
2.

The Start ......................................................................................................................................... S3-3

3.

Manikins.......................................................................................................................................... S3-4

4.

Seeding........................................................................................................................................... S3-5

5.

Timekeeping and Determination of Placing .................................................................................... S3-7

6.

Technical Officials........................................................................................................................... S3-7

7.

Obstacle Swim (200m and 100m) .................................................................................................. S3-8

8.

Manikin Carry (50m) ....................................................................................................................... S3-9

9.

Rescue Medley (100m)................................................................................................................. S3-10

10. Manikin Carry with Fins (100m) .................................................................................................... S3-11
11. Manikin Tow with Fins (100m) ...................................................................................................... S3-12
12. Super Lifesaver (200m) ................................................................................................................ S3-14
13. Manikin Lifesaver Medley (100m) ................................................................................................. S3-17
14. Line Throw (12.5m)....................................................................................................................... S3-20

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Introduction

Page 4

15. Manikin Relay (4 x 25m) ............................................................................................................... S3-22
16. Obstacle Relay (4 x 50m) ............................................................................................................. S3-24
17. Medley Relay (4 x 50m) ................................................................................................................ S3-25
18. Pool Lifesaver Relay (4 x 50m)..................................................................................................... S3-27
19. Rescue Tow Relay (4 x 50m) ....................................................................................................... S3-29
20. Disqualification Codes for Pool Events ......................................................................................... S3-31
SECTION 4 BEACH AND OCEAN EVENTS............................................................................................ S4-2
1 General Conditions for Ocean Competition .................................................................................... S4-2
2

The Start ......................................................................................................................................... S4-3

3.

The Finish ....................................................................................................................................... S4-5

4.

Seeding........................................................................................................................................... S4-6

5.

Surf Race ........................................................................................................................................ S4-8

6.

Surf Teams Race .......................................................................................................................... S4-10

7.

Rescue Tube Rescue ................................................................................................................... S4-12

8.

Rescue Tube Race ....................................................................................................................... S4-15

9.

Run - Swim - Run ......................................................................................................................... S4-17

10. Beach Flags .................................................................................................................................. S4-19
11. Beach Sprint (90m and 70m) ........................................................................................................ S4-23
12. Beach Relay ................................................................................................................................. S4-25
13. Beach Run (2km and 1km) ........................................................................................................... S4-27
14. Beach Run Relay (3 x 1km) .......................................................................................................... S4-29
15. Surf Ski Race ................................................................................................................................ S4-32
16. Surf Ski Relay ............................................................................................................................... S4-35
17. Board Race ................................................................................................................................... S4-39
18. Board Relay .................................................................................................................................. S4-41
19. Board Rescue ............................................................................................................................... S4-45
20. Oceanman/Oceanwoman ............................................................................................................. S4-47
21. Ocean M (Individual)..................................................................................................................... S4-52
22. Oceanman/Oceanwoman Eliminator Variation ............................................................................. S4-56
23. Oceanman/Oceanwoman Relay ................................................................................................... S4-57
24. Ocean M Lifesaver Relay ............................................................................................................. S4-59
25. Disqualification Codes for Ocean Events ..................................................................................... S4-62
SECTION 5 SIMULATED EMERGENCY RESPONSE COMPETITION .................................................. S5-2
1. General Conditions for Simulated Emergency Response Competition .......................................... S5-2
2.

Principles of Rescue ....................................................................................................................... S5-5

3.

Judging and Marking ...................................................................................................................... S5-5

4.

Disqualification Codes for SERC .................................................................................................... S5-7

SECTION 6 SURFBOAT COMPETITION................................................................................................. S6-2
1. General Conditions for Surf Boat Competition................................................................................ S6-2
2.

The Course ..................................................................................................................................... S6-3

3.

The Competition ............................................................................................................................. S6-6

4.

Racing Format ................................................................................................................................ S6-9

5.

Round Robin Racing..................................................................................................................... S6-10

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Introduction

Page 5

6.

Penalties and Disqualification ....................................................................................................... S6-12

7.

Disqualification Codes for Surf Boat Events ................................................................................. S6-12

SECTION 7 INFLATABLE RESCUE BOAT (IRB) COMPETITION ......................................................... S7-2
1. Indemnity ........................................................................................................................................ S7-2
2.

General Conditions ......................................................................................................................... S7-2

3.

Procedure ....................................................................................................................................... S7-6

4.

IRB Rescue................................................................................................................................... S7-10

5.

IRB Mass Rescue ......................................................................................................................... S7-11

6.

IRB Teams Rescue....................................................................................................................... S7-11

7.

IRB Rescue Tube ......................................................................................................................... S7-12

8.

Disqualification.............................................................................................................................. S7-12

9.

Disqualification Codes for IRB Events .......................................................................................... S7-13

SECTION 8 FACILITY AND EQUIPMENT STANDARDS AND SCRUTINEERING PROCEDURES...... S8-2
1. Pool Facility Standards ................................................................................................................... S8-2
2.

General ILS Equipment Standards ................................................................................................. S8-5

3.

Pool Equipment Standards ............................................................................................................. S8-5

4.

Beach/Ocean Equipment Standards .............................................................................................. S8-9

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Introduction

Page 6TABLE OF FIGURES
Figure 1: Obstacle Swim (200m and 100m) .............................................................................................. S3-8
Figure 2: Manikin Carry (50m) ................................................................................................................... S3-9
Figure 3: Rescue Medley (100m). ........................................................................................................... S3-10
Figure 4: Manikin Carry with Fins (100m)................................................................................................ S3-11
Figure 5: Manikin Tow with Fins (100m).................................................................................................. S3-12
Figure 6: Super Lifesaver (200m). ........................................................................................................... S3-14
Figure 7: Manikin Lifesaver Medley (100m) ............................................................................................ S3-17
Figure 8: Line Throw (12.5m). ................................................................................................................. S3-20
Figure 9: Manikin Relay (4 x 25m)........................................................................................................... S3-22
Figure 10: Obstacle Relay (4 x 50m). ...................................................................................................... S3-24
Figure 11: Medley Relay (4 x 50m). ........................................................................................................ S3-25
Figure 12: Pool Lifesaver Relay (4 x 50m). ............................................................................................. S3-27
Figure 13: Rescue Tow Relay (4 x 50m) ................................................................................................. S3-29
Figure 14: Surf Race ................................................................................................................................. S4-9
Figure 15: Surf Teams Race ................................................................................................................... S4-11
Figure 16: Rescue Tube Rescue ............................................................................................................. S4-14
Figure 17: Rescue Tube Race................................................................................................................. S4-16
Figure 18: Run - Swim - Run ................................................................................................................... S4-18
Figure 19: Beach Flags (one elimination per run-through) ...................................................................... S4-22
Figure 20: Beach Flags (two eliminations per run-through)..................................................................... S4-22
Figure 21: Beach Sprint ........................................................................................................................... S4-24
Figure 22: Beach Relay ........................................................................................................................... S4-26
Figure 23: Beach Run (1km and 2km)..................................................................................................... S4-28
Figure 24: Beach Run Relay ................................................................................................................... S4-31
Figure 25: Surf Ski Race ......................................................................................................................... S4-34
Figure 26: Open and Youth Surf Ski Relay ............................................................................................. S4-37
Figure 27: Masters Surf Ski Relay ........................................................................................................... S4-38
Figure 28: Board Race ............................................................................................................................ S4-40
Figure 29: Open and Youth Board Relay Race ....................................................................................... S4-43
Figure 30: Masters Board Relay Race .................................................................................................... S4-44
Figure 31: Board Rescue......................................................................................................................... S4-46
Figure 32: Open and Youth Oceanman/Oceanwoman. .......................................................................... S4-50
Figure 33: Masters Oceanman/Oceanwoman and Oceanman/Oceanwoman Relay .............................. S4-51
Figure 34: Individual Ocean M................................................................................................................. S4-55
Figure 35: Ocean M Lifesaver Relay ....................................................................................................... S4-61
Figure 36: Surf Boat Race ......................................................................................................................... S6-5
Figure 37: Surf Boat Turns at Buoys ......................................................................................................... S6-8
Figure 38: Surf Boat Race Optional Start and/or finish ........................................................................... S6-10
Figure 39: Typical Inflatable Rescue Boat Competition Area. ................................................................... S7-6

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Introduction

Page 7

PREFACEThe 2023 edition of the ILS Lifesaving Competition Rule Book governs ILS championships and ILSsanctioned competitions. The rule book may, at their discretion, be used by member organisations for theirdomestic competitions. Any changes to or clarifications regarding rules, standards or procedures for ILS
competition will be published as bulletins on the ILS website at www.ilsf.org.
For ILS World Championships, consult the relevant Lifesaving World Championships Handbook (atwww.ilsf.org) in conjunction with ILS Lifesaving Competition Rule Book.
In this 2023 edition, the changes reflect Sport Commission initiatives, Sport Regulations Committee
recommendations, consultation with key stake holders, and feedback received from ILS members andconsultation with key stake holders. The key changes for the 2023 edition are highlighted in yellow for easeof reference. The Sport Commission draws your attention to the following significant changes to the previous
Edition ILS Competition Rule Book:
General:Various formatting, editorial, and other changes that do affect the conduct or rules ofcompetition.
Added wording to note that the changes to ILS Lifesaving Competition Rule Book reflect
Sport Commission initiatives, Sport Regulations Committee recommendations, consultation
with key stake holders, and feedback received from ILS members.

Section 1 – The International Lifesaving Federation
General:Various formatting, editorial, and other changes that do affect the conduct or rules ofcompetition.

Section 2 – General Rules and Procedures
General:Various editorial and other changes that do affect the conduct of competition.

Point 4.1E:

Added that key Senior Officials should be allocated a specific uniform for identification
purposes.

Point 4.3:

Reviewed officials functions and re-sorted the roles into Technical, Judge, Independent,
Other and Safety official categories. Also added the turn judge (pool) position into thetechnical judges section.

Point 11:

Reviewed age limitations for participation in IRB competition as a patient and in surfboat
events. Also added the previously conducted Master’s age groups for four person relay
events.

Point 14:

Moved the definitions for individual and team categories and point scores from the point
detailing doping control to a new S2-14. All subsequent points were then renumbered.

Point 15:

As above moved the definitions for individual and team categories and point scores to the
new S2-14 and made reference in S2-15 to the definitions for doping control purposes.

Point 18B:

Clarified that competitors who fail to marshall, or do not start in an event, while disqualified
as per the rules, may be noted in records as “did not start” (DNS) or similar.

Point 18C:

Added a new “did not start” (DNS) category of disqualification.

Point 19.2B:

Clarified that officials may, at their absolute discretion, review an order of finish decision but
the order of finish decisions cannot be protested or appealed.

Point 19.2G:

Confirmed that there shall be no appeal fee payable if a Referee refers a protest directly to
an Appeals Committee without first making a decision on the protest.

Section 3 – Pool Events
GeneralVarious formatting, editorial, and other changes that do affect the conduct or rules ofcompetition.

Point 3.2:

The Manikin carry rules have been amended to eliminate further “difficult to judge” rules
particularly for judging the middle lanes of an event. The amendments will further reduce
technical disqualifications and also improve event presentation. It will no longer be adisqualification if the manikin is gripped or grasped by the throat (neck), mouth, nose, orInternational Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Introduction

Page 8eyes, or carried with an arm over or around the throat (neck) of the manikin. However, it has
been determined that:
Competitors must carry the manikin with head facing the direction of the carry.
The manikin must not be gripped by the sealing plugs.
Point 3.3A:

It is clarified that competitors may stand (in a minimum depth pool) when securing a rescue
tube around a manikin in manikin tow events.

Point 3.4C:

Clarified that a Manikin Handlers, using at least one hand, position and hold the manikin
upright, facing the turning wall, and floating at its natural buoyancy position anywhere within
the allotted lane.

Point 4.4D.:

Wording relating to seeding in finals has been reviewed to allow for reseeding of finals wherecompetitors or teams withdraw if there is sufficient time.

Point 5.1E.:

An additional paragraph has been added to clarify how to determine times and allocate
placings if automatic timing equipment fails or a competitor’s touch is not registered in pool
events.

Point 11.2B:

It is clarified that in the Manikin Tow with Fins the manikin handler is to hold the manikin
using at least one hand, positions and holds the manikin upright, facing the turning wall, andfloating at its natural buoyancy position anywhere within the allotted lane. The manikin
handler may let go of the manikin after the competitor has touched the turning wall but must
release contact with it immediately the competitor has deliberately made contact with the
manikin to secure it for the tow.

Point 12.2G:

It is clarified that in the Super Lifesaver Event the manikin handler is to hold the manikin
using at least one hand, positions and holds the manikin upright, facing the turning wall, andfloating at its natural buoyancy position anywhere within the allotted lane. The manikin
handler may let go of the manikin after the competitor has touched the turning wall but must
release contact with it immediately the competitor has deliberately made contact with the
manikin to secure it for the tow.

Point 13:

A new event has been added named the Manikin Lifesaver Medley. The first 50m is similar
to the Manikin Carry and the second 50m is similar to the final lap of the Super Lifesaver
event.
Note: All subsequent pool rescue events have been renumbered.

Point 14.1A:

The Line Throw event throw zone has been redefined and the marked lines have been
removed. The throw zone is now defined as the area from the vertical edge of the pool at
the front and an unmarked extended line from the middle of the lane ropes in a lane onto thepool deck or raised platform. The back line of the throw zone does not need to be marked
but a minimum of 2.0m is required beyond the vertical edge of the pool wall to allow for an
unimpeded throw and the haul in. In addition, two notes have been added:
Note 1: For the purposes of judging competitors are still required to remain within their lane.
However, the focus is not on the placement of feet on a line but, rather, not interfering withany other team in an event.
Note 2: While not a compulsory requirement, to ensure a clear area for the throw and thevictim haul in, a line on the ground, or temporary rope or tape barrier may be placed
approximately 2.0m behind the vertical edge of the pool wall. Backward movement by thecompetitor within this area would not be regarded as a disqualification.

Point 3.1C:

Additional wording has been added to the further detail the use of electronic judging andrecording of results of events.

Point 14.1E:

It has been clarified that in the Line Throw event the victim may release their contact withthe crossbar after the starting signal, but they must be grasping the crossbar with their handwhen using any part of their body to gather the line or to grasp the line with their other hand.

Point 14.1G:

Because the back line of the throw zone has been removed It has been clarified that in thethrower must haul in their victim using their arms and are not permitted to walk or run withthe throw line grasped in their hands or held around of their body or to deliberately walkbackwards while hauling in the victim to the finish wall.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Introduction

Page 9For the purposes of judging competitors are still required to remain within their lane.
However, the focus is not on the placement of feet on a line but, rather, not interfering withany other team in an event.
Point 15.1A:

Clarified the start procedure for the Manikin Relay event.

Point 15.1G:

For the changeover between the second and third competitor in the Manikin Relay, the rules
have been amended to allow the third competitor to touch and/or grasp the manikin before
the second competitor has touched the turn wall/edge. However, the third competitor must
not release contact with the turning wall or starting block until the second competitor has
touched the turning wall/edge.

Point 17.1D:

For the changeover between the third and fourth competitor in the Medley Relay event therules have been amended to allow the fourth competitor to touch or grasp the rescue tube,
its harness and line with one hand before the third competitor has touched the turn wall/edge.
However, the fourth competitor must not release contact with the turning wall or starting block
until the third competitor has touched the turning wall/edge.

Point 18.1C:

For the changeover between the second and third competitor in the Pool Lifesaver Relay
event, the rules have been amended to allow the third competitor to touch or grasp the
manikin with one hand before the head of the manikin breaks the surface of the water,
However, the third competitor cannot release their contact with the turning wall/edge orstarting until the head of the manikin breaks the water surface. In addition, it is clarified thatthe manikin must not be released by the second competitor until the third competitor has
grasped it i.e., one hand of at least one competitor must be in contact with the manikin at all
times.

Point 18.1D:

For the changeover between the third and fourth competitor in the Pool Lifesaver Relay
event, the rules have been amended to allow the fourth competitor to touch or grasp the
manikin with one hand before the third competitor has touched the turning wall/edge, butthey cannot release their contact with the turning wall/edge or starting block until the thirdcompetitor has touched the turning wall/edge. In addition, it is clarified that the manikin mustnot be released by the third competitor until the fourth competitor has grasped it i.e., one
hand of at least one competitor must be in contact with the manikin at all times.

Point 19:

A new event has been added named the 4x50m Rescue Tow Relay. The first two legs ofthis event are similar to the 4x50m Medley Relay and Pool Lifesaver Relay events. In thelast leg a live victim is towed in a rescue tube to the finish by the third swimmer who is
wearing fins.

Section 3 DQ Codes: The disqualification codes have been updated to reflect the updated rules for events
as well as to remove redundant disqualifications and subsequent renumbering. In addition.
there have been codes added for the new Manikin Lifesaver Medley and Rescue Tow Relay
events.
Diagrams:

Two new diagrams have been added; the Manikin Lifesaver Medley and the Rescue Tow
Relay.

Section 4 – Beach and Ocean Events
Various formatting, editorial, and other changes that do affect the conduct or rules of competition.
Point 2.3:

It has been further clarified with the use of examples that the process of starting eventsshould be a three-step process commencing with a signal or command that indicates “TakeYour Marks” followed by a signal or command that indicates “Set” and then followed by astart signal or command that indicates “Go”. Specific examples are provided for a number of
event types.
Note: The procedure for the starting of Surf Boat, IRB and Beach Flags are found in thespecific rules for those events.

Point 4.5:

It has been clarified that the maximum number of competitors in an Oceanman/
Oceanwoman event is 24 as detailed in S4-4.5 and S4-22.

Point 5.2:

It has been clarified that the start line for the Surf Race may be either a line in the sand or abrightly coloured cord stretched between two poles.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Introduction

Page 10

Point 6.1:

For the Surf Teams race it has been clarified that when marshalled each team will have theircompetitors lined up one behind each other. Then, at the direction of an official, the line ofcompetitors nearest the water’s edge shall file onto the competition area in order with theNo.1 position to the left facing the water. The first line of competitors is then followed by thesecond, and third lines. (This procedure spreads competitors from each team over start line).

Point 7.1D:

It has been clarified that in the Rescue Tube Rescue event it is not required for the Rescue
Tube swimmer to assist rescuers drag or carry the victim to the finish line or for the rescue
tube swimmer to cross the finish line in the Rescue Tube Rescue race.

Point 7.2H:

It has been clarified that in the Rescue Tube Rescue event it is not permitted for the victim
to swim backstroke or any other swim style with an out-of-water recovery. However, thevictim may assist by sculling under the water and also to reposition their arms to a positionin front of their head to streamline or as protection if catching a wave.

Point 7.3:

It has been clarified that the start line for the Rescue Tube Rescue race may either be a linein the sand, or a brightly coloured cord stretched between two poles. Further, any cord placedat the start line may be removed once competitors are in line and prior to the start if there isany concern that the rescue tube could catch on it.

Point 12.3:

It has been clarified that if a baton is dropped in a Beach Relay event the receiver may
recover the baton and continue the race but only in their allotted lane

Point 16.6A:

It has been clarified that the course for the Masters Ski Relay shall be as per the
Oceanman/Oceanwoman Relay Ski leg and competitors must round all buoys in the water
including the swimming buoys, the four black and white board buoys and the three orange
ski buoys unless otherwise advised.

Point 16 (End): A note has been added to the Masters Ski Relay diagram that the turning flags are to be set
by the Referee or their delegate considering water conditions at the time of a race e.g., theturning flags should be set back up to about 5m from the water’s edge in the event of a steep
drop off into the water and/or a heavy shore dump for safety, fairness, and practicality.
However, on a flat beach and/or little wave surge, the turning flags may be placed at thewater’s edge or in the water to minimise the run distance. The changeover line may be placedon the beach or in the water depending on conditions and the placement of the turning flags.
Point 17.2:

It has been clarified that the start line for the board race may be either a line in the sand ora brightly coloured cord stretched between two poles.

Point 18.6A:

It has been clarified that the course for the Master’s Board Relay shall be as per the
Oceanman/Oceanwoman Relay Board leg and competitors must round all swimming buoys,
and the four black and white board buoys unless otherwise advised.

Point 17 (End): A note has been added to the Masters Board Relay diagram that the turning flags are to be
set by the Referee or their delegate considering water conditions at the time of a race e.g.,
the turning flags should be set back up to about 5m from the water’s edge in the event of asteep drop off into the water and/or a heavy shore dump for safety, fairness, and practicality.
However, on a flat beach and/or little wave surge, the turning flags may be placed at thewater’s edge or in the water to minimise the run distance. The changeover line may be placedon the beach or in the water depending on conditions and the placement of the turning flags.
Point 19.1F:

The note at the finish of the Board Rescue Race has been amended to read: While bothcompetitors need to be in contact with the board at the time the first competitor crosses thefinish line to record a finish result, it is not necessary for the second competitor to cross thefinish line on their feet and/or in contact with the board. However, all teams are requested to
immediately move to the shoreward side of the finish line to assist with judging of the eventand to enable any trailing teams to finish.

Point 20 (End): A note has been added to the Masters Oceanman/Oceanwoman Relay diagram that theturning flags are to be set by the Referee or their delegate considering water conditions at
the time of a race e.g., the turning flags should be set back up to about 5m from the water’sedge in the event of a steep drop off into the water and/or a heavy shore dump for safety,
fairness, and practicality. However, on a flat beach and/or little wave surge, the turning flags
may be placed at the water’s edge or in the water to minimise the run distance. The

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Introduction

Page 11changeover line may be placed on the beach or in the water depending on conditions andthe placement of the turning flags.
Point 21.1:

It has been clarified that, unless otherwise advised the Organiser or Competition Committee,
the fixed sequence of legs in the Ocean M shall be swim, board, and ski.

Point 21.2:

It has been clarified for the Ocean M course that for the start competitors shall start in a linewith an approximate 25 m straight run (beach conditions permitting) to the water’s edge.
Boards and skis are to be placed where directed prior to the commencement of the race.

Point 22.1:

It has been clarified that, unless otherwise advised by the Organiser or Competition
Committee, any qualification rounds required to reach the final of the Oceanman/woman
eliminator events shall be conducted in the traditional heat and further round format (i.e.,
preliminary rounds) and not the eliminator format.
Finals shall usually be conducted with up to 24 competitors. The numbers for elimination ineach round of an event of 24 competitors shall be 8 per round. If there a larger or smaller
numbers, the organiser or referee shall advise the numbers to be eliminated in eacheliminator race.
The order of legs for the rounds of the elimination finals shall rotate as follows:
Race 1: swim, board, ski.
Race 2: ski, board, swim.
Race 3: board, swim, ski.
It has also been clarified that the final placing result (and any team point score points to beallocated) in eliminator events shall be dependent on the round and placing where acompetitor is eliminated.

Point 23.1:

It has further emphasised by way of an additional Note (2) that for the final leg of the
Oceanman/woman Relay, runners are permitted to enter the water to tag the incoming
competitor and may wade, porpoise off the bottom (as defined), catch waves and or run to
the turning flag but are not permitted to swim at any time (this includes taking any over arm
action to either catch or stay on a wave).

Diagrams:

The Diagrams for the Surf Race, Surf Teams Race, Rescue Tube Rescue, Rescue Tube
Race, Run Swim Run, Masters Ski Relay, Board Rescue, Oceanman/woman,
Oceanman/woman Relay, and Surf Boat have all been amended to change the swim buoy
colour on the left from orange to red/yellow.
The Beach Sprint, Beach Relay, Beach Run and Beach Run Relay events have all been
updated to correct errors in earlier diagrams.
Further, the on-beach flag placements and the run distances have been corrected for the
Masters individual and Relay Oceanman/woman races have been corrected to be the sameas the Masters Board and Ski Relays.
In addition, an additional note has been added to the Masters individual and Relay
Oceanman/woman races and the Masters Board and Ski Relays to clarify that the turning
flags are to be set by the Referee or their delegate considering water conditions at the timeof a race e.g., the turning flags should be set back up to about 5m from the water’s edge inthe event of a steep drop off into the water and/or a heavy shore dump for safety, fairness,and practicality. However, on a flat beach and/or little wave surge, the turning flags may beplaced at the water’s edge or in the water to minimise the run distance. The changeover line
may be placed on the beach or in the water depending on conditions and the placement of
the turning flags.

Section 5 – Simulated Emergency Response Competition
General:Various formatting, editorial, and other changes that do affect the conduct or rules ofcompetition.

Section 6 – Surf Boat Event
General:Various formatting, editorial and other changes that do affect the conduct or rules ofcompetition.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Introduction

Diagrams:

Page 12

The Diagram for the Surf Boat race has been amended to change the buoys and lane marker
colour on the left from orange to red/yellow.

Section 7 – Inflatable Rescue Boat (IRB) Events
General:Various formatting, editorial, and other changes that do affect the conduct or rules ofcompetition.

Point 2.4:

The competitor age prerequisites have been reviewed and slightly amended to encourage
participation of IRB patients and for development purposes.

Point 3.3C

It is clarified that for the start of IRB events handlers are permitted to move the IRB at any
time including after the starting signal to assist with water depth positioning of the IRB andto maintain the bow seaward and perpendicular to the wave line. It is also permitted for the
IRB to be placed at an angle to assist the driver and/or crewperson entry to the IRB if it issafe to do so. At the time the driver or crewperson first makes visible contact with the boat,
the IRB must be in the “correct starting position” and the handlers shall not further move theboat.”

Point 7A.:

It is clarified that for the changeover for the IRB Mass Rescue and IRB Teams Rescue events
the crewperson and patients, as detailed under the relative event descriptions, handle the
IRB as detailed in S7-3.3B, C and D. It is also permitted for the boat to be placed at an angle
to assist driver entry if it is safe to do so.

Point 5(e):It is clarified that for the changeover for the IRB Mass Rescue that the patient is permitted toassist the crewperson to turn and hold the position of the IRB as detailed in S7-3.3B, C, and
D. It is also permitted for the boat to be placed at an angle to assist driver entry if it is safe
to do so.

Point 6(g):It is clarified that for the changeover for the IRB Teams Rescue that the patient is permitted
to assist the crewperson to turn and hold the position of the IRB as detailed in S7-3.3B, C,
and D. It is also permitted for the boat to be placed at an angle to assist driver entry if it issafe to do so.

Point 7 DQ Codes: DQ Code D2 relating to the IRB Rescue Tube event has been removed as this point is
no longer judged. All subsequent DQ points in Section D have been renumbered.
Section 8 – Facility and Equipment Standards and Scrutineering Procedures
General:Various formatting, editorial, and other changes that do affect the conduct or rules ofcompetition.

Point 3.3A:

Added photograph of the full rescue tube and detailed the minimum and maximum lengthfrom the clip at the one end of the tube to the lanyard at the other end.

Point 3.10:

The construction of manikins has been clarified to delete the obsolete term “PETIT” typeplastic in dot point one.

Point 4.10:

This point has re-named “Buoys and Flags”. It now includes detail of the buoy colours for thestraight line of buoys used in some events, and the correct orientation for particular events.
In addition, the use of different coloured matching turning buoys and finish flags has been
added as an option to identify multiple water areas.

Further Updates
September 2023:
S3 - 3.2C:
S3 - 3.2F:

S4 - 10.1:

For the Manikin Carry pushing the manikin has been further defined as the “top of the
manikin’s” head being forward of the competitor’s head.
The competitor and manikin are considered to be one unit and, when in the carry position,either must remain above the surface of the water. Note 2 has been further clarified that it is
not a disqualification if the manikin is underwater and a competitor dips below the surface of
the water as part of their normal stroke or kick cycle provided that the competitor breaks thesurface throughout the race with some part of their body such as their head or arm.
To better describe the positioning of a competitor laying on the sand on their stomach waiting
for a start in the Beach Flags event, the word abdomen has been added in parenthesis.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Introduction

Page 13

December 2023:
S3 - 3.2B:
Clarified that competitors must carry the manikin with at least one hand (or arm) and must
always be in contact with the manikin.
S3 - 14.1G:
Changed the wording in the Line Throw event to clarify that the team will be disqualified if
the Line Thrower leaves their throw zone and, in doing so, interferes with another team in
the event.
S3 - 14.1I:
Changed the wording in the Line Throw event to clarify that the Line Thrower is not tointerfere with any other teams in the event until the event completion signal is given by thedelegated official for the completion of the race.
S3 - 14.3G:
Changed the wording in the Line Throw event to clarify that the “Line Thrower who, after thestart signal and before the 45-second acoustic completion signal, exits their allocated throwzone while recusing their victim and interferes with other teams in the event”.
Note: The wording was also changed in DQ Code 51.
S3 - 14.3H:
Changed the wording to clarify that a Team will be disqualified if the Line Thrower walks orruns with the line grasped in their hands or held around any part of their body to return thevictim to the pool finish wall i.e. not using their arms to haul in.
Note: The wording was also changed in DQ Code 52.
S3 - 19.3:
Changed the wording for disqualification point A. of the Rescue Tow Relay to read: “Leaving
the starting block/releasing contact with the turning wall/edge/ starting block before theprevious competitor has touched the wall/edge” to clarify that DQ 40 applies to allchangeovers in the event.
Section 3 DQ Codes: The disqualification codes 51 and 52 have been updated to reflect the clarified rules
for the Line Throw and Rescue Tow Relay events.
S4 – 24.1:
The special conditions relating to the conduct of the Mixed Ocean M Lifesaver Relay
conducted at National Teams Interclub Lifesaving World Championships (LWC) have been
removed and have been placed in the LWC Handbook.
S4 – 24.1:
Amended the Ocean M Lifesaver Relay event Note for the Lifesaving World Championships
to so that read that teams may select the legs of the event in which their two men and two
women competitors participate.
S7 – 6A:
The special conditions relating to the conduct of the Mixed IRB Teams Relay conducted at
National Teams Lifesaving World Championships (LWC) have been removed and have beenplaced in the LWC Handbook.
April 2024:
S4 - 24:

Based on feedback received from Olympic Connections the run for the Ocean M Lifesaver
Relay has been amended to have the runner commence the event and then to complete theruns between the swim, surf board, and surf ski legs, and also the finish. The fixed sequenceof legs is now run - swim – run - board – run - surf ski – run unless otherwise advised. A
replacement diagram has also been inserted.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Introduction

Page 14INTRODUCTION – LIFESAVING AND SPORTThe International Lifesaving Federation (ILS) is the world authority for drowning prevention, lifesaving, andlifesaving sport. The ILS is a non-profit, non-political, non-religious, worldwide lifesaving sport andhumanitarian organisation. The ILS leads, collaborates, and partners with national and internationalorganisations to prevent drowning, to promote the provision of lifesaving services and oversee lifesaving spot
throughout the world.
The ILS (and ILS Member Organisations) promotes and organises lifesaving sport and regularly organises
international lifesaving competitions in order to stimulate the interest of competitors to improve their ability
and willingness to save people who are in danger in the aquatic environment. Lifesaving sport helps develop
the lifesavers' skills, knowledge, and techniques, and plays an important role in providing opportunities toenhance global relationships among ILS Member Organisations. The ILS Motto is: be fit to save a life.
The ILS is a member of or has relations with the following International Sport Organisations:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

The International Olympic Committee (IOC): The ILS is an IOC recognised International Federation.
Sportaccord (International Federation regrouping all International Sports Federations): The ILS isa full and voting member of Sportaccord.
The Association of IOC Recognised International Sport Federations (ARISF): The ILS is a full andvoting member of the ARISF.
The International World Games Association (IWGA): The ILS is a full and voting Member of the
IWGA.
The International Masters Games Federation (IMGF): The ILS is a co-opted member of the IMGF.
The Commonwealth Games Federation (CGF): Lifesaving sport is a recognised sport by the CGF.
The International Military Sports Council (CISM): Lifesaving is a recognised sport by the CISM.

The ILS also has official relations with the World Health Organisation (WHO) for drowning prevention
activities.
Lifesaving sport engages youth and adults from all nations in the mutual pursuit of excellence in lifesaving.
The global focus on cooperation and teamwork to reduce the burden of drowning is a compelling opportunity.
Increasing the participation of youth in lifesaving sport is part of the engagement strategy.
Lifesaving sport is an important component of this mission. The ILS Lifesaving World Championships andLifesaving Regional Championships play an important part in bringing together the world’s lifesavers on aregular basis – helping our members learn from the experience of other countries and to challengethemselves to improve and perform.
The public profile and media exposure to lifesaving sport helps profile our vision, mission, values, andstrategic goals as the world authority in the global effort to prevent drowning.
We thank the Members and Member Organisations of the ILS Sport Commission and Committees for their
dedication in composing the ILS Competition Rule Book, and for their constant endeavours to promoteinternational lifesaving competitions around the world. We congratulate ILS Member Organisations on thecontinuing growth in participation in lifesaving sport and the Lifesaving Regional and World Championships.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Introduction

Page 15

GLOSSARY OF TERMS
LIFESAVING SPORT: An activity involving physical effort and skill in which an individual, or team competes
against others. The activity can be recreational or competitive, is capable ofachieving a result, and is governed by a set of rules issued by the International Life
Saving Federation.
DISCIPLINE:A discipline is a subset of a sport, comprising one or more events of a similar nature.
Lifesaving Sport is composed of different disciplines such as: Pool, Ocean & Beach,
Simulated Emergency Response Competition (SERC), Surf Boats, Inflatable Rescue
Boats, and others.

COMPETITION:

A competition is composed of one or more disciplines.

CHAMPIONSHIP:

A championship is a type of competition. For example, the National Teams
Lifesaving World Championships.

EVENT:

An event is a series of races with the same prescribed set of rules and conditions.
For example: sprinting and running events, beach flag events, etc.

RACE:

A race is a single contest of speed or distance within an event in which the winner isdetermined by time or distance. For example, a single heat is a race, the A-final is a
race.

HEATS:Heats are a preliminary set of races which eliminate competitors and in which thewinners advance to a next round, quarter final, semi-final, or final race.

ROUND:

A round is a set of heats of the same event. For example, “This round includes 8heats.”

RUN THROUGH:

Run throughs occur within a round of the Beach Flag event to determine which
competitors are eliminated from event during that round of the race.

FINAL:

The final is the final race of the fastest qualifying competitors.

A-FINAL:An A-final is a race of the 1st to 8th fastest (or placed) qualifying competitors todetermine the 1st through 8th places.

B-FINAL:A B-final is a race of the 9th to 16th fastest (or placed) qualifying competitors todetermine the 9th through 16th places.

TIME-FINALS:

Time-finals are a set of races of the same event where there are no qualifying heats.
Event winners are determined by time.

ILS:

International Life Saving Federation

FIS:

Fédération Internationale de Sauvetage Aquatique

WLS :World Lifesaving

IOC :International Olympic Committee

SERC:

Simulated Emergency Response Competition

IRB:

Inflatable Rescue Boats

LWC:

Lifesaving World Championships

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 2 – The International Lifesaving Federation

World Water Safety

INTERNATIONAL LIFE SAVING FEDERATIONILS COMPETITION RULE BOOKSECTION 1
THE INTERNATIONAL LIFE SAVING FEDERATION

2023 Edition(Effective 1 June 2023)

Page S1-1

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 2 – The International Lifesaving Federation

Page S1-2

SECTION 1 THE INTERNATIONAL LIFE SAVING FEDERATION1.

HISTORY

1.1

History of the Fédération Internationale de Sauvetage

At the end of the nineteenth century, several national lifesaving organisations were working with and learningfrom each other by exchanging lifesaving techniques and experiences. Organised international lifesaving
activities date back to 1878 when an International Congress was hosted in Marseille in the South of France.
In the decades since, there have been many independent national and international lifesaving achievements.
A need for an international forum to exchange ideas was soon recognised. The dynamic Frenchman,
Raymond Pitet organised a lifesaving congress in 1900 during the Paris World Fair with the purpose of setting
up a world federation. He did not succeed in achieving this objective at that time but did not give up the idea.
From 25th to 30th January 1910, Paris had to contend with heavy floods and the lifesavers were ever readyto act. These acts of human solidarity from the neighbouring countries incited Raymond Pitet to organise a
new congress, this time in Saint-Ouen, a small town located 7km from the centre of Paris.
At this congress the Fédération Internationale de Sauvetage (FIS) was founded on 27th March 1910 byfederations from Belgium, Denmark, France, Great Britain, Luxembourg, and Switzerland. Spain and Italy
could not attend the meeting but signed the deed of incorporation. FIS was incorporated in France and set
up its head office after its foundation in Paris, in the home of Raymond Pitet.
In the following years congresses and international championships took place in European countries but theFirst World War stopped the expansion of the International Federation. Between the two World Wars,
attention was not only given to water rescue but also to road and mountain rescue services. After the Second
World War, FIS became a leading authority in drowning prevention and lifesaving sport.
In 1953, the first Pool Lifesaving World Championships took place in Nantes - France. This was the start of
the regularly organised world championships.
The FIS grew from 8 Founding Members to over 34 Member Organisations in 1993. On 24 February 1993,
the FIS merged with the WLS to form the ILS. The WLS was disbanded on 3 September 1994.
1.2

History of World Life Saving

In November 1956, the National Surf Lifesaving Associations of Australia, New Zealand, South Africa, Ceylon(nowadays Sri Lanka), Hawaii, Great Britain, and the USA (California Branch) created the International
Council of Surf Life Saving (ICSLS). On 24 March 1971, at a congress held in Cronulla, Sydney (Australia) a
new organisation called World Life Saving (WLS) was founded by members of the ICSLS. The constitution
was adopted on 14 June 1977 with a formal agreement between the foundation nations: Australia, GreatBritain, New Zealand, South Africa, and the United States.
WLS was founded for the purpose of establishing educational marine safety and aquatic programmes on apeople-to-people basis. In 1974, the first World Surf Lifesaving Championships for National Teams took placein Port Elizabeth and Durban (South Africa). In 1981, the first World Surf Lifesaving Championships for Clubs
took place in Kuta Beach, Bali (Indonesia).
The WLS grew from 5 Founding Members in 1971 to over 25 Member Organisations in 1993. On 24 February
1993, the WLS merged with the FIS to form the ILS. The WLS was disbanded on 3 September 1994.
1.3

History of the International Life Saving Federation

The International Life Saving Federation (ILS) was created at the jointly organised General Assembly of FIS
and WLS on 26th February 1993 in Leuven (Belgium) by the official signing of the merging agreement
between the Fédération Internationale de Sauvetage Aquatique (FIS) and World Life Saving (WLS).
On the same date the FIS and WLS agreed on a draft ILS Constitution and draft Byelaws. The ILS was
ultimately constituted on Saturday, 3rd September 1994 in Cardiff (United Kingdom). The creation date marks
the official founding of the ILS. The first Lifesaving World Championships under the auspices of the ILS also
took place in 1994 in Cardiff and Newquay (United Kingdom) and encompassed both pool and ocean
competitions. This Championship and subsequent biennial ILS Championships conducted up until 2012 werecalled the “Rescue” Championships.
In 2014 the word “Rescue” was replaced with the term “Lifesaving World Championships” (LWC) to better
describe the ILS LWC and to delineate from the biennial ILS World Conference on Drowning Prevention.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 2 – The International Lifesaving Federation

2.

Page S1-3

ORGANISATIONThe supreme authority of the ILS is the General Assembly in which Member Organisations are represented.
The General Assembly establishes ILS priorities. The Elective General Assembly is organised every four
years and elects a Board of Directors. The Board of Directors conducts the business of the ILS between
meetings of the General Assembly and is chaired by the President. The General Secretariat (Headquarters)
is currently located in Leuven (Belgium) and houses the administration.
The ILS decentralises its affairs under the management of four Regional Branches. The Branches are
established in and for Africa, the Americas, Asia-Pacific, and Europe and are responsible for initiating,supervising, and coordinating regional activities.
The ILS has created Commissions which in turn are composed of Committees responsible for the
management, development, and technical aspects of each major ILS field of activity. The four Commissions
are: Drowning Prevention, Rescue, Lifesaving Sport, and Business.
The ILS also cooperates with partner organisations, governments, non-government organisations (NGOs)
and sponsors to promote lifesaving worldwide. The ILS is a unique international federation in that it sponsors
and sanctions athletic competition as an important method of furthering its humanitarian lifesaving work.
Lifesaving through competition is one of the established goals.
3.

STRATEGIC GOALSThe Strategic Goals of ILS are to:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

4.

Build the capacity to reduce drowning within targeted communities.
Position ILS as the world authority of drowning prevention, lifesaving, and lifesaving sport.
Reduce the drowning of children globally through partnership and collaboration.
Expand the scope, reach and recognition of lifesaving sport.
Create a sustainable business model.
Establish and promote global best practice.
Engage with every nation.

SPORT COMMISSIONThe Sport Commission oversees all aspects of lifesaving sport in the international sport arena. The
Commission’s responsibilities include, but are not limited to:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Sport rules
Championships
Sport management
Anti-doping
Athletes
Technical officials
Sport development andSport research

The Commission supports the Board of Directors in the facilitation of relationships with collaborating
sports organisations
5.

ATHLETES COMMITTEE

Since 2018, the ILS includes an Athletes Committee. The ILS Athletes Committee is composed of at least
six elected persons from which 50% are men and 50% are women. The Committee is tasked to empower
the athlete’s representation in the ILS decision-making processes, to support the athlete development in theirsporting and non-sporting careers and to represent the athlete’s views in the decisions across the ILS. The
Chair of the Athletes Committee is a voting member of the ILS Board of Directors.
6.

EVENT MANAGEMENT COMMITTEEThe ILS Event Management Committee is composed of a Board-appointed Chair, the ILS Event Director as
the Secretary and representatives from the Sport Commission for the Sport related events andrepresentatives of the Drowning Prevention Commission for Conferences and Drowning Prevention related
Events. The ILS Event Management Committee is tasked to supervise the management of the respective
ILS Events.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 2 – General Rules and ProceduresWorld Water Safety

INTERNATIONAL LIFE SAVING FEDERATIONILS COMPETITION RULE BOOKSECTION 2
GENERAL RULES AND PROCEDURES

2023 Edition(Effective 1 June 2023)

Page S2-1

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 2 – General Rules and Procedures

Page S2-2

SECTION 2
GENERAL RULES AND PROCEDURES
The sport of lifesaving contributes to the worldwide drowning prevention mission of the ILS. As theinternational federation for lifesaving sport, the ILS establishes rules for the purpose of ensuring a safe andfair system, within which lifesaving competitions may be regulated and conducted.
The ILS alone shall authorise Lifesaving World Championships (LWC). No ILS member Federation may
conduct a Lifesaving competition that purports to be a “world” event without the formal application to, andapproval from, the ILS. Further, the words/terms "ILS", “International Life Saving”, “Lifesaving WorldChampionships”, “LWC”, “Oceanman”, “Ocean M”, “Ocean M Lifesaver Relay”, “Oceanwoman”, "World",“Lifesaving”, “Life Saving”, “Rescue Series”, “World Lifesaving Championships” and “World Water Safety”,
may not be used in connection with any lifesaving competition without formal application and the writtenconsent of the ILS.
1.

ILS SANCTIONED COMPETITION
The ILS alone may sanction other lifesaving competitions. All ILS-sanctioned lifesaving competitions
must use ILS rules as documented in the current edition of ILS Competition Rule Book.
The ILS sanctions world championships, international championships, ILS regional championships,
and national championships. The ILS may sanction other international or national competitions.
The purpose of sanctioning is to ensure that all events run under the auspices of the ILS, adhere toa consistent standard, and that they do not damage the image of the ILS. Such events will be run by
ILS Full Member Organisations, who have obtained the correct local permissions, and have risk
management and insurance processes in place. No record can be broken in events that are notsanctioned by the ILS. All ILS Member Organisations are encouraged to ensure that all of theirnational events are sanctioned by the ILS.
A.

B.

2.

The host organisation is responsible for completing the application for sanction and for ensuring
the sanctioning requirements are met. Applications for sanction must be received by the ILS
Regional Secretary and the ILS headquarters. Host organisations should contact the ILS
headquarters for applications and application procedures. The ILS Sanctioning Form isavailable at www.ilsf.org.
For all ILS-sanctioned competition, the ILS shall appoint the chair of the ILS Sport Commission(or an appointee of the chair) as official liaison to the host organising committee withresponsibility for ensuring all terms of the sanction are met.

COMPETITION ORGANISATION AND ADMINISTRATION
A.

B.
C.
D.

All competitions conducted by the ILS (including world championships) or sanctioned by the
ILS and conducted under the authority of ILS Member Organisations are subject to the ILS
Competition Rule Book, the constitution of the ILS and of the relevant Member Organisation,and regulations made under those constitutions. Special conditions may apply to somecompetitions, in which case, the organising authority issues clarifying handbooks, bulletins or
circulars that are binding on all participants.
By entering the competition, participants acknowledge their responsibility and duty to know therelevant rules, regulations and procedures that govern that competition.
Competition organisers must make available all necessary information to enable competitors
or clubs to determine their eligibility for entry in the competition and the responsibilities imposedby that entry.
Competition communications should provide other information necessary for the proper
conduct of the competition, including for example:•
The name and nature of the competition.
•
The name and address of the ILS member organising authority.
•
The names and addresses of the Organising Committee with specific notation of theCompetition Organiser.
•
A statement to the effect that the competition is "held under the authority and regulationsof the ILS and/or ILS Member Organisation” together with an appropriate waiver anddisclosure and advice of any ILS event sanction.
•
The venue and date of the competition and the dates, times, and other details regarding
briefings, reporting for competition marshalling, competition start, closure of competition,

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 2 – General Rules and Procedures

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

•
•
•
•
2.1

Page S2-3

etc. The dates for opening and closing of entries, how (and where) they will be made, andrespective entry fees.
A full description of the proposed competitions. In the case of special events or multidiscipline events, it may also be necessary to include the "legs" and total length of course
and other appropriate details.
Any conditions under which entries may be refused and details of age limits.
Such information regarding insurance as may be required by the organiser and/or isappropriate to the competition in terms of responsibility for private property, public liability,and personal accident insurance.
Details of special specification requirements for equipment (if any), etc., and the time andplace of any scrutineering.
A detailed list of prizes and/or awards allocated and the manner in which results will be
determined and prizes awarded.
Details of any special procedures or fees for appeals.
Provisions regarding postponement, abandonment and/or cancellation of the competition
and/or the capacity to alter any, or all the events.
Where appropriate, a reminder of the obligations on competitors to secure the written
endorsement from their ILS Member Organisation, club, or other relevant authority.
The maximum number of competitors/teams in a competition or event and how numbers
are to be controlled.
If appropriate, how equipment may be changed or substituted during an event.
Details of competition sponsors’ expectations with regard to decals to be placed on craft,sponsor identified clothing to be worn by technical officials, work parties, and competitors,
etc. and restrictions (if any) on the display of other sponsor logos or messages oncompetitors’ equipment or clothing.
Whether (and which) facts are to be judged by appointed officials.
The scale of penalties applicable to the competition.
Water temperatures: average for the date of competition. Air temperature and humidity:
average for the date of competition.
Unusual course hazards or requirements of special equipment: e.g., wetsuit, assistanceetc. Clear directions to the race venue and check-in site.

Committees, Safety Officer, and Security Officer
For each competition, the relevant authority appoints an Organising Committee, a Competition
Committee, and appropriate safety and emergency personnel. For smaller competitions, it may beappropriate to combine the functions of the committees into a single oversight body.
The relationship between the Organising Committee, Competition Committee and Safety Officers
Committees etc. are detailed in the schematic diagram at the end of this Section.

2.2

Organising Committee
The Organising Committee shall be responsible for the planning and development of the safety,
logistical, and operational organisation of the competition and non-competition aspects of thecompetition. The composition of the Organising Committee depends on the nature of the competition
being organised.
The Organising Committee liaises with and is responsible to the lifesaving sport authority.
The Organising Committee determines the composition of the Competition Committee and supports
the Committee as required.
Formal records of any meetings of the Organising Committee must be taken and kept.

2.3

Competition Committee
The Competition Committee directs all matters relating to the actual delivery and conduct of thecompetition. This Committee may, subject to the rules, alter, postpone, or cancel events, or alter thecompetition venue.
The Competition Committee shall seek advice from the Organising Committee, Chief Referee(s), theSafety Officer, Security Officer and relevant emergency personnel, subject matter experts and others
as appropriate on any matter relating to the organisation and conduct of the competition.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 2 – General Rules and Procedures

Page S2-4

Formal records of any meetings of the Competition Committee must be taken and kept.
2.4

Safety Officer
A

B.
2.5

Safety Officer shall be appointed by the relevant authority who must consider and advise theOrganising and Competition Committees on all matters relating to competition and noncompetition safety, security, and emergency services. For larger competitions it may beappropriate to appoint an emergency and safety committee representing the various role
responsibilities. The Chair of such a committee shall be appointed to the Organising andCompetition Committees.
Formal records of advice provided must be taken and kept.

Security Officer
Dependent on the competition a discrete Security Officer may also be appointed by the relevant
authority. The Security Officer is not a technical official’s role but is to consider and advise
Organising, Competition and Safety Committees on all matters relating to competition and noncompetition security. The Security Officer is also responsible for ensuring that an appropriate security
plan, procedures and security personnel are in place to secure all participants, spectators,
equipment, and “gear” etc. at competition facilities and environments.
Formal records of advice provided must be taken and kept by the Security Officer.

3.

COMPETITION SAFETY
The provision of safe competitions is essential and a priority in competition planning. The hostorganising committee is responsible for the provision of adequate resources to ensure the safety of
those involved with the competition.
A.

B.
C.
D.
E.
F.

3.1

The host organising committee shall appoint a Safety Officer who is responsible for ensuringthat all competition facilities and environments are safe for use, and that the appropriate safety
plan, equipment, craft, procedures, and emergency personnel are in place to ensure the safetyof competitors, officials, and spectators, etc.
The Safety Officer is a member of the Organising Committee and the Competition Committee.
No competition shall be sanctioned by ILS until the ILS Sport Commission is satisfied that thecompetition facilities are safe, and that the appropriate safety and emergency plan, equipment,
procedures, and personnel are in place.
No ocean event shall be conducted until the Chief Referee or Safety Officer has assessed thesurf conditions and reported to the Competition Committee. Only the Competition Committee
has the authority to cancel, reschedule, or relocate the competition or event.
The Chief Referee or the appointed coordinator of emergency services (as named in the safety
and emergency plan) shall assume control of emergencies arising during competition.
Note: It is necessary for a common language to be spoken between the Chief Referee and thecoordinator of emergency services. If necessary, an interpreter may be appointed by theOrganising Committee to assist with communication.

Safety and emergency planA.

The host organising committee shall prepare a safety and emergency plan to ensure:•
The venue(s) are fit and proper for the purposes of competition.
•
The general safety of competitors, competition personnel and spectators.
•
The personnel and procedures are in place in case of minor or major emergencies
involving injury to or illness of competitors, technical officials, competition personnel orspectators.

B.

The plan shall:•
Outline the facilities to be used during the competition by competitors, technical officials,
competition personnel, and spectators.
•
Identify the individuals with authority to initiate the plan and the chain of command andcoordination of emergency services.
•
Identify safety personnel and protocols including land and water patrols and theirrespective job descriptions.
•
Identify logistical information necessary for the deployment of emergency services:personnel and their deployment, access to competition venues, equipment, communications protocol and methods, vehicle access, and alternate venue(s).

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 2 – General Rules and Procedures

•

•
•
•
•
•
C.

3.2

Page S2-5

Identify the emergency care facilities including the number, location, and type of first aid
sites, the equipment at each site, and the personnel in place or on call to staff these sites.
The plan will identify on-site, and off-site medical facilities including the location andcontact details of the nearest medical centre and hospital.
Identify the protocols for the operation of the emergency vehicle(s) on hand in case of theneed to transport patients from or rescue teams to an incident site.
Identify the start and finish times of competition in open water to allow for sufficient lightfor search and rescue (SAR) operations in the event of a missing competitor.
Note: Generally, the finish time of competition will be a minimum of 90minutes before
there is insufficient light to enable an effective SAR operation to be undertaken.
Identify available emergency services and their tasking protocols and specify how internaland external agencies and services are to be activated.
Specify the decision-making responsibility in the event of death or serious injury to acompetitor, technical official, competition personnel or spectator during the competition.

The plan shall be shared with the local agencies and services expected to participate in caseof emergency and shall be explained at team manager and officials briefings. An outline of theplan including availability and details of emergency medical facilities should also be provided
to each team manager and be available and promoted to all competition personnel.

Relocation contingency plan
A.

B.
C.

In open water competition, adverse weather can create extremes in heat or cold, storms,
dangerous surf or swell and associated dangers for competitors. Man-made disasters such aspollution of the water and beach cannot be discounted. In pool competition, problems such as
water quality, power failure or equipment malfunction may occur.
The host organising committee shall prepare a contingency plan to ensure the protocols andprocedures are in place in the event adverse weather or other conditions threaten to preventthe conduct of part or all the competition.
The contingency plan shall:•
Identify the decision-making authority and protocol for suspension, cancellation,
postponement, or relocation of part or all the competition.
•
Identify alternative locations where part or all the competition may be safely conductedwithin the timeframe set down.
•
Specify the responsibilities and procedures for communicating decisions and directions
concerning suspension, cancellation, postponement, or relocation.
•
Outline the logistical plan for relocating competitors, competition personnel andequipment to an alternate location.
•
Outline the responsibilities for event set-up and re-scheduling at the alternate location(s).
Note: Refer to www.ilsf.org for further information regarding competition safety andcontingency plans, sample safety guidelines, etc.

4.

TECHNICAL, SAFETY AND OTHER OFFICIALSThe Organising Committee shall arrange for the appointment of Technical Officials. A Technical
Official is a person who controls the competition by applying the rules and regulations of theLifesaving sport and by making judgments on rule infringement, performance, time or ranking.

4.1

Technical officials code of conduct
A.

B.
C.
D.

All officials must be accredited by their national governing body for lifesaving sport and officials’
applications must be endorsed prior to notification of appointment as an official. Note: Other
personnel with suitable experience and/or specialist qualifications may be appointed toundertake specialist roles at a competition e.g., timekeeper, recorder, safety, medical, judge inboat, etc. Such personnel will be provided with instructions as to their roles and responsibilities.
Officials may not ‘coach’ or similarly assist a competing team. An official found to be in violationof this rule shall be declared ineligible to act further as an official. Officials who hold seminars
or clinics for groups which include competitors are not deemed to be violating this rule.
For additional information, see 2.15 Code of Conduct.
Meetings: Officials are required to attend the appropriate briefings to review judging sheets andevent procedures, etc.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 2 – General Rules and Procedures

Page S2-6

E.

Dress: Officials shall wear a white or blue top with white or blue shorts, pants, or skirts. Hats
should be white. Protective clothing such as raincoats or anoraks may be worn as appropriate.
Note: If the organiser provides an event specific uniform it should be worn.
4.2

Local Event Manager
The Local Event Manager (or different name with this responsibility) reports to the Organising
Committee and, during competition, to the Competition Committee. The Event Manager is
responsible for the organisation of the competition within the parameters established by the ILS
Competition Rule Book and the Organising Committee. The Local Event Manager deals with any
issues and represents the Organising Committee at the venue.

4.3

ILS Event Director
At ILS managed events an ILS Event Director will be appointed to support ILS and the ILS Sports
Commission in the planning and delivery of Lifesaving World Championships and reports to theCompetition Committee for the event.
The Organising Committee for an event shall arrange for the appointment of officials including but
not limited to:Technical:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Chief Referee
Deputy Chief Referee
Area Referee (Ocean)
Event Director (Pool)
Sectional Referee
Referee Steward/Head Scorer
Competition Liaison Officers
Course Supervisor
Scrutineer Coordinator and Scrutineers
Gear and Equipment Coordinator
Announcing Coordinator and Commentary Panel

Judges
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Chief Judge
Finish Judge
Lane Judge
Course Judge
Specialist Judge
Electronic Device Specialist Judge
Timekeeping Judge
Recording Judge
StarterCheck Starter

Non-Technical Officials
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

MarshallCheck Marshall
Presentation Steward
Appeals Committee Convenor
Appeals Committee Members
Disciplinary Committee Convenor
Disciplinary Committee Members
Security Officer

Safety Officials•••

Safety Officer
Area Risk and Response Officer
Power Craft CoordinatorInternational Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 2 – General Rules and Procedures

Page S2-7•
Water Safety Coordinators•
Water Safety Personnel•
Communications Coordinator•
Medical/First Aid Coordinator•
Course Statistician•
Infection Control MarshallNote 1: At smaller competitions it may be appropriate for some of the functions of competition officials
to be combined providing that the provision of safety is not compromised.
Note 2: At all times those involved at a competition need to be aware of the safety and welfare ofcompetitors, officials and other personnel and immediately report any observations orconcerns.
Note 3: Officials should record any infringement of competition rules or conduct violations that may
be required to support any actions that have been taken or need to be considered at a latertime.
Technical Officials
4.4

Chief Referee
The Chief Referee shall:
A.

B.

C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
4.5

In conjunction with the Competition Committee, be responsible for all matters relating to theactual conduct of the competition and matters, of which, the final settlement is not covered by
ILS rules. The Chief Referee will also implement the rules and regulations governing thecompetition or event being conducted.
Be aware at all times of the safety and welfare of competitors, officials and other personnel
involved in the competition and have the authority to immediately suspend wholly or in part thecompetition and refer that decision to the Safety Officer and the Competition Committee.
Note: The Chief Referee has the authority to initiate and coordinate any search and rescue
actions. The Chief Referee must immediately notify the Safety Officer and the Competition
Committee of their action.
Respond immediately to any reports of safety concerns directly received from competitors,
power craft, water safety personnel, officials and lifesaving/lifeguard personnel and liaise as
appropriate with the Safety Officer and/or the Competition Committee.
Conduct pre and post briefings for senior officials and/or team managers and/or coaches and/or
competitors on the conduct and programme for the competition including entry conditions,timetables, area layouts, special events, safety, and emergency arrangements.
Make any alteration to the programme that they consider necessary and communicate thesechanges without delay to all interested parties. Any alterations should take into consideration
the safety and welfare of both competitors and officials.
Consider and adjudicate upon reports, protests, breaches of rules and on all matters relating to
the conduct of officials, competitors, coaches, managers, and events. Any decision made may
be the subject of appeal as provided for in Sections 2.18 – Protests and Appeals.
Consider and adjudicate on any unbecoming conduct during the competition or event. If
considered necessary, refer any offence or offenders to the ILS for consideration of further
penalty.
If required exercise the power to disqualify or penalise a competitor. The Chief Referee is not
required to give notification of any disqualification or penalty until the conclusion of the relevant
event.
Conduct any other briefings when considered necessary with officials, team managers,
coaches, and competitors.
Report to the relevant ILS authority on the conduct of the competition together with any
appropriate recommendations.

Deputy Chief Referee
The Deputy Chief Referee, if appointed, shall:
A.
B.

Assist in the conduct and organisation of the competition, and in the absence of the Chief
Referee assume their authority and responsibilities.
Take control of a particular area of the competition with Chief Referee authority or be assigned
to a specific role or be designated a specific authority.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 2 – General Rules and Procedures

C.
D.
4.6

Page S2-8

Be aware at all times of the safety and welfare of competitors, officials and other personnel
involved in the competition and have the authority to immediately suspend wholly or in part thecompetition and refer that decision to the Chief Referee.
The Deputy Chief Referee also has the authority to initiate any search and rescue actions if
necessary and notify the Safety Officer and Chief Referee or their delegate.

Area Referee (Ocean)
The Area Referee(s), if appointed, shall:
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.

4.7

Be responsible to the Chief Referee or the Deputy Chief Referee for the control andorganisation of a specific area or a group of sections or events of the competition including theproper layout of course(s) pertaining to the conditions.
Implement the rules and regulations governing the competition and events being conducted in
the particular area of control.
Be aware at all times of the safety and welfare of competitors, officials and other personnel
involved in the competition and have the authority to immediately suspend wholly or in part thecompetition in that area and refer that decision to the Chief Referee and Safety Officer.
In conjunction with the Area Risk and Response Officer, the Area Referee has the authority toinitiate any search and rescue actions and immediately notify the Safety Officer and Chief
Referee or their delegate.
At the Chief Referee’s discretion, consider and adjudicate upon protests.
Brief the Sectional Referee/s under their control of any specific requirements to manage theirsections.
Provide reports and recommendations to the Chief Referee or Authority on the conduct of thearea.

Event Director (Pool)
The Event Director(s), if appointed, shall:A.

Be responsible to the Chief Referee for the control and organisation of a specific area or eventsof the competition and implement the rules and regulations governing the competition andevents being conducted in the particular area of control. In particular the Event Director will:•
Whistle the competitors to prepare themselves for the start of the event (by for example,
positioning themselves on the starting blocks).
•
Ensure the equipment is set and the Chief Timekeeper has signalled they are ready before
whistling competitors to their starting position.
•
Signal to the Starter the competitors are set and hand them over to the Starter; and•Record the finish order of competitors in events.

B.

The Event Director is responsible for overseeing and collating all result paperwork relating toeach event including any disqualifications and ensuring they are received by recording
personnel.
The Event Director (and the Starter) will be responsible for recalling competitors by whistle
signal or other means if, in their opinion. the start conditions were breached, or the start was
unfair.

C.

4.8

Sectional Referee
The Sectional Referee, if appointed, shall:
A.
B.
C.

D.

Be responsible to the Chief Referee or Area Referee for the control and organisation of a
specific section of the competition including the proper layout of courses(s) pertaining to theconditions.
Implement the rules and regulations governing the competition and events being conducted in
the particular section of responsibility.
Be aware at all times of the safety and welfare of competitors, officials and other personnel
involved in the competition and have the authority to immediately suspend wholly or in part thecompetition in that section and refer that decision to the Area Referee and the Area Risk andResponse Officer.
In conjunction with the Area Referee, Area Risk and Response Officer, the Sectional Referee
has the authority to initiate any search and rescue actions and immediately notify the Safety
Officer and Chief Referee or their delegate.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 2 – General Rules and Procedures

E.
F.
G.
4.9

Page S2-9

At the Chief Referee or Area Referee’s direction, consider and adjudicate upon protests.
Ensure all appointed officials are aware of their positions and responsibilities.
Provide reports and recommendations to the Chief Referee or relevant ILS authority on the
conduct of the Section.

Referee Steward/Head Scorer
The Referee Steward/Head Scorer, if appointed, shall:
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.

4.10

Act under the supervision of the Chief Referee.
Be responsible for the overall manual and electronic record keeping of all competition eventsand point scores.
Arrange for the supply and distribution of result cards and the necessary stationery to conduct
events.
Supervise the recording procedures as required for the conduct of the competition and may
allocate Recorders to Sectional Referees.
Supervise the collection of results from each section.
Supervise draws for rounds, quarter-finals, semi-finals, and finals as required by the Sectional
Referee.
In the case of events where judges utilise marking sheets to determine the result of an event(e.g., SERC,) the Referee Steward shall liaise with the relevant Referee to determine a resultin instances of any compilation errors.
Complete world (and other) record applications for signature by the Chief Referee.
Liaise with media regarding results.
At all times be aware of the safety and welfare of competitors, officials and other personnel
involved in the competition and immediately report any concerns to the relevant Referee or theirdelegate and the Safety Officer. If the matter is a catastrophic event the official may order an
immediate suspension of competition in their area and immediately escalate the matter to theChief Referee and/or their Area Referee and/or the Safety Officer.

Competition Liaison Officer
The Competition Liaison Officer, if appointed, shall:
A.

B.
C.
D.
E.

F.

4.11

Act under the supervision of a Liaison Coordinator (if appointed) and the Area or Sectional
Referee.
Note: The Liaison Coordinator will usually be one of the appointed Liaison Officers and will
liaise with the Chief Referee to streamline the liaison process to ensure, as far as practicable,
the efficient conduct of competition.
Liaise with competitors, coaches, team managers and officials so as to provide assistance andcommunicate any rules and queries related to the conduct of the events.
Be positioned so as to be accessible to competitors, coaches, and team managers.
Advise the Chief Referee, Area Referee or Sectional Referee or Event Director of any concerns
raised by competitors, coaches and team managers relating to event conduct, courses, orsafety issues.
Provide guidance for competitors, coaches and team managers on protest and appeal
procedures and the best method of approach to the Chief Referee involved.
Note: Liaison Officers are, at all times, to execute their duties without bias and to demonstrate
the maintenance of an open, neutral position in all dealings with officials, competitors, coaches,
and team managers.
Be aware at all times of the safety and welfare of competitors, officials and other personnel
involved in the competition and immediately report any concerns to the Safety Officer and Chief
Referee or their delegate. If the matter is a catastrophic event the official may order an
immediate suspension of competition in their area and immediately escalate the matter to theChief Referee and/or their Area Referee and/or the Safety Officer.

Course Supervisor
The Course Supervisor, if appointed, shall:A.

Be responsible to the Chief Referee, or Area or Sectional Referee or Event Directors for thesafe, proper, and fair layout of courses.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 2 – General Rules and Procedures

B.
C.

D.
E.
F.

4.12

Page S2-10

In conjunction with the Area Risk and Response Officer (ARRO), assess the prevailing andexpected on-beach and in-water beach conditions for the duration of competition including
available beach and sand, tides, current, swell, wind conditions and any other pertinent issues.
Work with the Power Craft Coordinator and other appointed personnel to supervise the layingof and adjustment of in-water courses prior to and during competition to ensure, as far aspracticable, compliance with event conditions and to provide for safe, proper, fair, and equal
racing conditions for all competitors.
Supervise the setting and adjustment of beach and lifesaving event courses and on-beachcourses relating to in-water events to provide, as far as practicable, safe, fair, and equal racing
conditions for all competitors.
Liaise with competitors and/or competitor panels, Competition Liaison Officers, and otherpersonnel regarding course conditions.
Be aware at all times of the safety and welfare of competitors, officials and other personnel
involved in the competition and immediately report any concerns to the Chief Referee theirdelegate and/or the ARRO. If the matter is a catastrophic event the official may order an
immediate suspension of competition in their area and immediately escalate the matter to theChief Referee and/or their Area Referee and/or the Safety Officer.

Scrutineer Coordinator and Scrutineer
The Scrutineer Coordinator, if appointed, shall:
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.

4.13

Act under the supervision of the Chief Referee.
Be responsible for control and organisation of measuring gear and scrutineering equipment toensure that all craft, boats and/or equipment is operating, and otherwise, in accordance withthe current specifications approved by the ILS.
Arrange for the correct setting up of the scrutineering area and measuring devices.
Ensure the scrutineering standards used are in line with the current gear and equipment
specifications as advised by the relevant ILS authority.
Arrange for a programme and timetable for the processing of competition gear and equipment
including maintaining of records.
Supervise and roster Scrutineers to allocated positions, times, and particular responsibilities.
Together with appointed Scrutineers, make inspections and examine craft and equipment
before the entry of competitors’ equipment into the competition arena.
Observe competition events and if they consider that the performance of a particular craft,
motor or item of equipment appears to exceed the manufacturers’ performance specification,
they shall make these observations known to the Chief Referee.
If considered necessary, or if requested, arrange for inspections during and/or after an eventor competition.
Liaise with the Chief Referee on infringements and any concerns raised by competitors, teammanagers or coaches.
Provide reports and recommendations to the Chief Referee or Authority on the conduct of thescrutineering programme.
Be aware at all times of the safety and welfare of competitors, officials and other personnel
involved in the competition and immediately report any concerns to the Chief Referee or theirdelegate and/or the Safety Officer. If the matter is a catastrophic event the official may orderan immediate suspension of competition in their area and immediately escalate the matter tothe Chief Referee and/or their Area Referee and/or the Safety Officer.

Gear and Equipment Coordinator
The Gear and Equipment Coordinator, if appointed, shall:
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.

Act under the supervision of the Chief Referee.
Be responsible for the correct assembly of gear and equipment for the competition.
Supervise the Organising Committee workforce involved in assisting with gear and equipment.
Adjust, replace, and arrange for the repair and security/return of gear and equipment.
Maintain a record of gear and equipment issued to Organising Committee and officials.
Supervise the relocation of gear and equipment to alternative venues.
Report to the Chief Referee any loss or damage of gear and equipment during the competition.
At the conclusion of the competition ensure all gear and equipment is accounted for, hosed
down and properly stored.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 2 – General Rules and Procedures

I.
J.

4.14

Page S2-11

Provide a report and recommendations to the Chief Referee or the relevant ILS authority on
the conduct of the gear and equipment section.
Be aware at all times of the safety and welfare of competitors, officials and other personnel
involved in the competition and immediately report any concerns to the Chief Referee or theirdelegate and/or the Safety Officer. If the matter is a catastrophic event the official may orderan immediate suspension of competition in their area and immediately escalate the matter tothe Chief Referee and/or their Area Referee and/or the Safety Officer.

Announcing Coordinator and Commentary Panel
The Announcing Coordinator, if appointed, shall:
A.
B.

C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.

Act under the supervision of the Chief Referee.
Be aware of the public announcing and other systems, including dedicated sponsor and ILS
promotion themes being put in place by the Organising Committee. The Announcing Coordinator shall also liaise with the Safety Officer for health and safety announcements during
emergencies.
Supervise roster, location, duties, and responsibilities for announcing panel team members.
Advise and assist in the setting up of the announcing systems and sundry equipment.
Ensure spectators, competitors, coaches, managers, officials, and workforce personnel are
kept reliably informed of the competitions’ progress via the announcing team.
Acquaint the announcing team with competition timetable and special events to be announced
and ensure the Announcing Team is informative and accurate on competitor details.
Describe and announce the running of events and other announcements requested by the Chief
Referee, Safety Officer, or the Organising Committee.
Liaise with presentation section on the announcement of awards, medals, VIP, and sponsor
presentations.
Provide a report and recommendations to the Chief Referee or the ILS authority on the conductof the announcing section.
Be aware at all times of the safety and welfare of competitors, officials and other personnel
involved in the competition and immediately report any concerns to the Chief Referee or theirdelegate and/or the Safety Officer. If the matter is a catastrophic event the official may orderan immediate suspension of competition in their area and immediately escalate the matter tothe Chief Referee and/or their Area Referee and/or the Safety Officer.

Judges
A.
B.

C.
4.15

The judges’ roles at competitions are many and varied but the principal activity is to supervise
and assist with the conduct of events according to ILS rules and the authority of the Chief
Referee.
All judges are to be aware at all times of the safety and welfare of competitors, officials andother personnel involved in the competition and immediately report any concerns to the Chief
Referee or their delegate and/or the Area Risk and Response Officer. If the matter is a
catastrophic event the official may order an immediate suspension of competition in their area
and immediately escalate the matter to the Chief Referee and/or their Area or Sectional Referee
or Event Director and/or the Safety Officer.
Dependent on the competition, activities may be combined and fall into the following categories:

Chief Judge
The Chief Judge shall:
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.

Be responsible to the Chief Referee, Area/Sectional Referee or Event Director.
Supervise or assist in the setting up of courses for events.
Roster, rotate, define position, and allocate duties and responsibilities for area/sectional judges.
Locate and position judges so as to best determine the finish and recording of event results.
Adjudicate judges or Results Recorders’ decisions if necessary.
Report any breach or infringements of rules to the Area/Sectional Referee.
Co-ordinate results check and sign the result card and hand to Sectional Referee.
Note the number of starters and ensure that all competitors complete the course (or arerecorded as “DNF”) and in emergencies notify the Chief Referee and/or the Area Risk andResponse Officer.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 2 – General Rules and Procedures

4.16

Page S2-12

Finish Judge
The Finish Judges shall:
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.

4.17

Determine the order of finishing of competitors.
Report any breach or infringement of rules to the Chief Judge or Area/Sectional Referee orEvent Director.
Be positioned on either side of the finish line away from the finishing poles to ensure the bestuninterrupted view of the finish of the event.
Refer to ILS judging aids (e.g., video) if necessary, to determine a finish.
If there is a variance, a majority decision is taken under the supervision of the Referee or the
Chief Judge.
Note the results and advise the Chief Judge or Chief Referee.
Where possible and when results have been determined, authorise the issue of placing
indicators to competitors.
Assist in the setting up of the courses for events.

Lane Judge (IRB)
The Lane Judge (IRB) shall:
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.

F.
G.
H.
4.18

Be a Judge of fact in relation to the observation of the conduct of an event.
Preferably be appointed in pairs and positioned at each lane for each event.
From their designated beach position observe the complete operation of the crew and ensurethat the crew, throughout the event, comply with the general conditions and procedures,
particularly with regard to start and finish of events.
At the finish of each event, check the IRB and Motors etc. as required.
Ensure that a member of the crew is present whilst checking the IRB at the conclusion of anevent and, where an anomaly is observed, draw it to the attention of another judge and amember of the crew before it is rectified. This will avoid any misunderstanding between theLane Judges and the competitors.
Observe any aggressive driving when the crew “hits the beach’ with such force the Drivercannot control their exit from the IRB and causes the Driver to stumble and fall.
Observe competitors to determine whether immediately prior to exiting the IRB the Driver isseated on the pontoon with both feet on the floor of the IRB prior to swinging their legs outside
the IRB to exit.
Be responsible to the Area/Sectional Referee and Chief Judge.
Note: Teams should not be penalised until the infringement is reported to the Chief Referee.

Lane Judge (Pool)
The Lane Judge (Pool) shall:
A.
B.

4.19

Be a Judge of fact in relation to the observation of the conduct of an event in the particularlane(s) they are allocated.
They shall report any breach or infringement of the rules to the Chief Judge, or Area/Sectional
Referee or Event Director.
Note: Competitors or teams should not be penalised until the infringement is reported to theChief Referee.

Course Judge
The Course Judge shall:
A.
B.
C.
D.

E.

Be a judge of fact in relation to the observation of the conduct of an event.
As far as possible, be located in an elevated position, or in a boat in ocean events, as the casemay be, to obtain a constant view of the event.
Immediately report any safety concerns or rescue situations to the Chief Referee or theirdelegate and/or the Area Risk and Response Office.
Course Judges in Boat may also act as a rescue boat and shall assist in any rescue situation.
The crew should also ensure board riders, other craft and surfers are kept at a reasonabledistance (having regard to the type of event being conducted) on each side of the competitionarea.
Observe, note, and report any breaches of competition or other rules to the Chief Judge, orArea/Sectional Referee or Event Director.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 2 – General Rules and Procedures

F.
G.
H.
I.

J.

K.

4.20

Page S2-13

Check the alignment of all buoys before the commencement of, and during the progress of, thecompetition particularly if a change of conditions occurs.
In IRB events, also observe that the driving and crew techniques comply with Driving and Crew
Safety Procedures.
Where Driver and/or crew techniques are considered to be a cautionary matter, the Course
Judge(s) shall have the authority to caution the driver and/or crew members of the correct safety
techniques. These breaches will be reported to the Chief Referee.
Where driving or crew techniques are considered to be unsafe or dangerous the matter shallbe reported to the Chief Referee with a recommendation that the individual driver and/or crew
members be either disqualified from the event or disqualified from the event and the remainderof the competition.
Note 1: A “cautionary matter” is considered to be a matter where the driver and/or crew
members breaches the standard expected of them when put into a situation where common
sense and skill are ignored or where they endanger their own safety.
Note 2: “Unsafe or dangerous or a Safety Breach” is considered to be where the driver and/orcrew members causes or places either their own safety, their IRB, other competitors, or their
IRBs at risk of injury or collision.
The Course Judge in Boat shall:•Report to the Sectional Referee/Chief Judge before the start of the competition to receive
instructions.
•
In events where competitors have to round all buoys, be stationed, sea conditions
permitting, on the inside of the line of buoys.
•
In Board Rescue and Rescue Tube Rescue and Rescue Tube events act as a Course
Judge and Finish Judge and be stationed to readily observe that teams comply with theconditions of the competition and the event rules.
•
Observe, note, and report any breaches of competition or other rules to the Chief Judge,
or Area/Sectional Referee or who shall adjudicate on the infringement in conjunction withthe judge(s) concerned.
In IRB events a Course Judge in Boat and Duty Boat crews shall:•
Transport the Patients out to the buoys when requested by the Chief Referee. Whenadvised, and prior to the event starting, drop the Patients into the water at their allottedbuoy.
•
Position their IRB in line with the buoys in such a way that the judge(s) can readily observethat the crews comply with the conditions of the competition and the event rules.
•
Remain in the vicinity of the buoys until all patients are recovered.

Specialist Judge
The Specialist Judge shall adjudicate on events including, but not restricted to SERC.

4.21

Electronic Device Specialist Judge
A.

B.
C.
D.
4.22

Electronic Device Specialist Judge may be used to judge race phases including the start, finish,and placings and confirm competitors’ conduct during the event.
Note 1: The ILS Authority shall, at its discretion, nominate which source(s) will be used todetermine as its final decision(s).
Note 2: Different devices may be used at the same competition, as required, to determine as
the final decision.
The Electronic Device Specialist Judge (which include video, finish gates, camera, and drone
operators etc.) shall, by the use of devices operated by officials and/or by an appointed externalsource (e.g., television/live stream etc.), record races for viewing by appointed judges.
Be responsible to the Chief Judge, or Area/Sectional Referee or Event Director and bepositioned/and or set up devices as directed for particular events. Be responsible for the use ofelectronic recording devices within a section/area.
Record particular phases of events of events as directed.

Timekeeping Judge
The Timekeeping Judge shall:A.

Be responsible to the Chief Referee or Chief Judge or Event Director.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 2 – General Rules and Procedures

B.
C.
D.
4.23

Page S2-14

Be used to specifically act as timekeepers for events. As such, these judges shall be considered
as a “judge of fact”.
Time and record all events where a time or a time limit is required or has been imposed by therules of the event or Sectional Referee.
Be available to carry out an allocated judging role in addition to timekeeping.

Recording Judge
The Recording Judge shall:
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.

4.24

Act under the direction of the Chief Referee or Chief Judge or Event Director.
Liaise with the Marshall and assist with draws and pass on results and draws to theAnnouncers.
Record the order in which each placed competitor or team finishes in the event and ensuringthat in team events all members of the team are recorded.
Ensure the Chief Referee/Chief Judge checks and signs the result card.
Maintain a record of results/disqualifications and ensure results are passed onto the Referee
Steward and the Marshall.
Keep a progressive total of any point scores or round robin events if required.
Be available to carry out an allocated judging role in addition to recording when required.

Starter
The starter shall:
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.

4.25

Have, with the Check Starter, at the time the Event Director or Chief Referee hands overcompetitors, sole jurisdiction over the competitors for the start including any briefing on course
conditions.
Be elevated or in such a position to best observe that starting conditions are fair and that the
Check Starter’s signal can be observed.
Ensure that an appropriate signal is given to competitors that a start is imminent.
Recall the competitors by whistle signal, second shot of gun or by some other means, if in theiror the Check Starter’s opinion the start was unfair.
Have the power to disqualify, or eliminate, a competitor for breaking the start, or for wilfully
disobeying their orders, or for any other obstruction during the start.
Notify the Sectional Referee of all disqualifications.
Ensure competitors, Water Safety, Duty Boats, Judges, equipment, and patients (in IRB events)
are correctly positioned before starting the event
Refer questions pertaining to event conditions to the Chief Referee.
Be aware at all times of the safety and welfare of competitors, officials and other personnel
involved in the competition and immediately report any concerns to the Chief Referee or theirdelegate and/or the Area Risk and Response Officer. If the matter is a catastrophic event theofficial may order an immediate suspension of competition in their area and immediately
escalate the matter to the Chief Referee and/or their Area Referee and/or the Safety Officer.
Note: Whilst starting, it is strongly recommended that ear protection is worn.

Check Starter
The Check Starter (Break Judge) shall:
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.

Work in conjunction with the Starter.
Be appropriately positioned for the event and signal when competitors are in line and positioned
and ready to start.
Be responsible to recall competitors by whistle signal or other means if in their opinion the start
conditions were breached, or the start was unfair.
If required be called upon to act as Course Judges during an event e.g., relay baton/changeovers, equipment replacement and gear positioning in team events.
In conjunction with the Starter ensure competitors, Water Safety, Duty Boats, judge(s),equipment, and Patients (in IRB events) are correctly positioned before starting the event.
Be aware at all times of the safety and welfare of competitors, officials and other personnel
involved in the competition and immediately report any concerns to the Chief Referee or theirdelegate and/or the Area Risk and Response Officer. If the matter is a catastrophic event theofficial may order an immediate suspension of competition in their area and immediately
escalate the matter to the Chief Referee and/or their Area Referee and/or the Safety Officer.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 2 – General Rules and Procedures

Page S2-15

Non-Technical Officials
4.26

Marshall
The Marshall shall:
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.

4.27

Act under the supervision of the Chief Referee, Area/Sectional Referee or Event Director.
Be responsible for ensuring competitors’ entries are in order and competitors are marshalled
correctly before proceeding to the start line.
Liaise with the Chief Referee, Area/Sectional Referee or Event Director regarding entry
conditions, draws, order of events, timetables, sponsor uniforms, courses and otherarrangements put in place by the Referee or Organising Committee.
Ensure all competitors comply with the appropriate ILS general rules of competition.
Liaise with Scrutineers on competitor compliance with gear and equipment specifications or ILS
standards or safety requirements.
Advise the Chief Referee on any infringements or irregularities.
Organise draws to be displayed or available to competitors and maintain discipline ofcompetitors in the marshalling area.
Liaise with the Announcers, Recorders, Timekeepers and Stewards regarding entries anddraws.
Assemble the competitors in the order as drawn.
Ensure competitor numbers in events comply with competitor limitations for the event.
Liaise with the Chief Referee, Marshall, and Course Statistician to confirm starting numbers ineach race in the water.
Be aware at all times of the safety and welfare of competitors, officials and other personnel
involved in the competition and immediately report any concerns to the Chief Referee or theirdelegate and/or the Area Risk and Response Officer. If the matter is a catastrophic event theofficial may order an immediate suspension of competition in their area and immediately
escalate the matter to the Chief Referee and/or their Area Referee and/or the Safety Officer.

Check Marshall
The Check Marshall shall:
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.

4.28

Assist the Marshall.
Report any competitor team changes to the Marshall, Area/Sectional Referee or Event Director
and Chief Referee.
Report any competitor, equipment infringements or other irregularity to the Marshall and Chief
Referee.
Assist the Marshall in placing competitors in their order ready for starting and ensuring allcompetitors names and race numbers have been recorded prior to a race commencing.
Accompany all competitors to the start line and ensure all competitors are positioned as drawn.
Ensure that all competitors are dressed according to this Manual or other conditions laid downby the ILS.
In IRB events, be known as the Patient Marshall and shall ensure that patients (victim) areaware of their buoy position and are safely transported to sea and dropped off at their positionin sufficient time to ensure continuity of the event.
Be aware at all times of the safety and welfare of competitors, officials and other personnel
involved in the competition and immediately report any concerns to the Chief Referee or theirdelegate and/or the Area Risk and Response Officer. If the matter is a catastrophic event theofficial may order an immediate suspension of competition in their area and immediately
escalate the matter to the Chief Referee and/or their Area Referee and/or the Safety Officer.

Presentation Steward
The Presentation Steward, if appointed, shall:
A.
B.
C.

Be responsible to the Chief Referee for the orderly marshalling of competitors and recipients
receiving presentations and ensure all trophies and awards are available at the presentationdais.
Be aware of the ILS and sponsor requirements for presentation, including ILS protocols relating
to VIP’s.
Liaise with Announcing Coordinator on suitable introduction for awards, medals, and otherpresentations.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 2 – General Rules and Procedures

D.

4.29

Page S2-16

Be aware at all times of the safety and welfare of competitors, officials and other personnel
involved in the competition and immediately report any concerns to the Safety Officer and Chief
Referee or their delegate. If the matter is a catastrophic event the official may order an
immediate suspension of competition in their area and immediately escalate the matter to theChief Referee and/or their Area Referee and/or the Safety Officer.

Appeals Committee Convenor
The Appeals Committee Convenor shall be responsible for appointing an appeals committee to
adjudicate all matters referred to it by the Chief Referee.

4.30

Appeals Committee Member
Appeals Committee member shall be responsible for adjudicating on all matters referred to thecommittee by the Chief Referee. The Appeals Committee Convenor selects appropriate members of
the appeals committee to adjudicate individual cases.

4.31

Disciplinary Committee Convenor
The Disciplinary Committee Convenor shall be responsible for appointing a Disciplinary Committee
to adjudicate all matters referred to it by the Competition Committee, Chief Referee, or appeals
committee (see 2.16 Misconduct in the ILS Lifesaving Competition Rule Book).

4.32

Disciplinary Committee Member
The Disciplinary Committee member shall be responsible for adjudicating on all matters referred tothe committee by the Competition Committee, Chief Referee or Appeals Committee. The Disciplinary
Committee Convenor selects appropriate members of the Disciplinary Committee to adjudicate
individual cases.

4.33

Security Officer
The relevant authority may appoint a Security Officer. The Security Officer is not a technical official’srole but is to consider and advise Organising, Competition and Safety Committees on all mattersrelating to competition and non-competition security. The Security Officer is also responsible for
ensuring that an appropriate security plan, procedures and security personnel are in place to secure
all participants, spectators, equipment, and gear etc. at competition facilities and environments.
Formal records of advice provided must be taken and kept by the Security Officer.
Safety Officials

4.34

Safety Officer
The Safety Officer shall chair the Safety Committee, provide advice as a member of the Organising
Committee and the Competition Committee and shall:
A.
B.
C.
D.

E.
F.
G.

Work in conjunction with the Chief Referee.
Formulate and implement a safety, search and rescue and contingency plan which will provide
prompt and effective safety, rescue, and recovery in an emergency situation. This programmeshall be approved by the Competition Committee conducting the event.
Respond immediately to and record any reports of safety concerns directly received fromcompetitors, power craft, water safety personnel, officials and lifesaving/lifeguard personnel
and liaise as appropriate with the Chief Referee and/or the Competition Committee.
Be aware at all times of the safety and welfare of competitors, officials and other personnel
involved in the competition and non-competition support functions and have the authority to
immediately suspend wholly or in part the competition whenever there is a credible basis forconcluding there is an unacceptable risk of serious injury occurring and refer that decision to
the Competition Committee. This safety responsibility and authority includes being alert for, andresponding to, infection transmission risks and other welfare risks at a competition.
The Safety Officer has the authority to immediately initiate and coordinate (command andcontrol) any search and rescue actions if necessary and notify the Chief Referee and theCompetition Committee.
Co-ordinate other services to provide essential communication, transport, and trained
personnel in an emergency.
Brief all associated services prior to the competition to ensure that:

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 2 – General Rules and Procedures

•
•
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
4.35

All other involved services are aware of their responsibilities; and .
All Referees are aware of the safety and emergency plans.

Liaise and coordinate with Medical/First Aid/Emergency/Safety personnel including local
emergency groups such as Police, Ambulance, Fire services and relevant government
agencies.
Be located in a convenient position during the competition and be available for communication
with the Chief Referee at all times.
Brief any lifesaving service and any other designated personnel on the emergency plans andassistance required in case of an emergency.
Provide reports and recommendations to the Chief Referee or the relevant ILS authority on the
conduct of the safety systems.
Dependant on the size of the event, the Safety Officer may also assume the responsibilities ofother roles of the safety team as qualifications and skill allow.

Area Risk and Response Officer (ARRO)
A.
B.

C.
D.

E.
F.

4.36

Page S2-17

An Area Risk and Response Officer must be appointed for each competition arena and reports
to the Safety Officer.
An Area Risk and Response Officer work with the Area and Sectional Referees or Event
Directors and course supervisor to:•
Undertake an initial risk assessment of the area and then continually monitor competition
conditions by conducting further risk assessments on a regular basis.
•
Monitor the time events take to complete and note any issues with the competition
conditions.
•Monitor trends in the ratios of competitors starting and finishing events.
•
In the absence of a Statistician assume the duties of this role including recording thenumber of starters and finishers and account for any non-finishers in each race. If there
is any competitor not accounted for in a race, immediately advise the Safety andEmergency Management Coordinator and then the Sectional Referee/Referee.
•Obtain, record, and immediately convey feedback from competitors, powercraft watersafety personnel, officials, and lifesaving/lifeguard personnel as to the conditions andimmediately escalate any reports of safety concerns directly with the Safety Officer andthe Area Referee.
The outcomes of such tasks are to be conveyed to the Safety Officer.
An Area Risk and Response Officer must be aware at all times of the safety and welfare ofcompetitors, officials and other personnel involved in the competition and have the authority to
immediately suspend wholly or in part the competition whenever there is a credible basis forconcluding there is an unacceptable risk of serious injury and refer that decision to the Safety
Officer and Chief Referee or their delegate.
In conjunction with the Area/Sectional referee, the Area Risk and Response Officer has theauthority to initiate any search and rescue actions and immediately notify the Safety Officer andChief Referee or their delegate.
The Area Risk and Response Officer may be required to take and keep control as forward
coordinator under direction of the Safety Officer or representatives of government agencies.
This is to avoid confusion and conflicting directions being given to personnel and contradictory
instructions being given in respect to the use of rescue assets and crowd control.

Power Craft Coordinator
The Power Craft Coordinator, if appointed, shall:
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.

Act under the supervision of the Chief Referee and in emergencies the Safety Officer and/or
Area Risk and Response Officer.
Provide advice and co-ordinate the recruitment of IRBs and the crew required to conduct thecompetition at events to be conducted.
Supervise the activities of both the Water Safety Craft and Judge in Boat systems.
Supervise the laying of courses prior and during the competition.
Assume the responsibilities of the Water Safety Coordinator (if not appointed). Supervise thewater safety aspects of the competition.
Roster, rotate and brief crews on locations and duties.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 2 – General Rules and Procedures

G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.

4.37

Page S2-18

Ensure IRBs are serviced and properly equipped during the competition.
Report to the Chief Referee and/or Safety Officer any problems relating to the availability ofcraft and the ability to provide water safety and judging systems.
Ensure an effective communication system is in place to provide communication to all Referees
and Coordinators.
Liaise at all times with the Safety Officer.
Provide reports and recommendations to the Chief Referee or relevant ILS authority on the
conduct of the section.
Be aware at all times of the safety and welfare of competitors, officials and other personnel
involved in the competition and immediately report any concerns to the Referee or theirdelegate and/or the Safety Officer. If the matter is a catastrophic event the official may orderan immediate suspension of competition in their area and immediately escalate the matter tothe Chief Referee and/or their Area Referee and/or the Safety Officer.

Water Safety Coordinator
The Water Safety Coordinator, if appointed, shall:
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.

4.38

Act under the supervision of the Chief Referee and in emergencies the Safety Officer and/or
Area Risk and Response Officer.
Be responsible for the safety of competition while water events are in progress.
Supervise and roster water safety personnel.
Co-ordinate the positioning of rescue craft and water safety personnel.
Bring to the attention of the Safety Officer any concerns regarding the level of water safety.
In IRB competition (if appointed) maintain safety for crews and patients in conjunction with the
Safety Officer.
In all competitions ensure that water safety meets the prescribed and assessed requirements.
Be aware at all times of the safety and welfare of competitors, officials and other personnel
involved in the competition and immediately report any concerns to the Chief Referee or theirdelegate and/or the Safety Officer. If the matter is a catastrophic event the official may orderan immediate suspension of competition in their area and immediately escalate the matter tothe Chief Referee and/or their Area Referee and/or the Safety Officer.

Water Safety Personnel
Water Safety Personnel shall:
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.

4.39

Act under the supervision of the Water Safety Coordinator and in emergencies the Safety
Officer and/or Area Risk and Response Officer.
Be positioned on the beach and in the water as directed by the Water Safety Coordinator.
Bring to the attention of the Water Safety Coordinator any concerns regarding the level of watersafety at a particular time.
Be responsible for the safety of competition in their appointed water area.
Under the direction of the Water Safety Coordinator assist other areas if required.
In all competition ensure that water safety meets the prescribed and assessed requirements.
Be aware at all times of the safety and welfare of competitors, officials and other personnel
involved in the competition and immediately report any concerns to the Water Safety
Coordinator and/or the Area Risk and Response Officer. If the matter is a catastrophic eventthe official may order an immediate suspension of competition in their area and immediately
escalate the matter to the Chief Referee and/or their Area Referee and/or the Safety Officer.

Communications Coordinator
The Communications Coordinator, if appointed, shall:
A.
B.
C.
D.

Act under the supervision of the Chief Referee and in emergencies the Safety Officer and/or
Area Risk and Response Officer.
Ensure effective radio communication is maintained to all senior officials and IRB’s including
Organising and Competition Committee members, Safety, Medical and workforce personnel forthe duration of the competition.
In conjunction with the Chief Referee or the relevant ILS authority, agree on the required
quantity and type of radio equipment required for the competition.
Supervise the central control centre including the issue and maintenance and return of radio
equipment.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 2 – General Rules and Procedures

E.
F.
G.

4.40

Page S2-19

Publish a list of calls signs/frequencies and radio procedures for the competition.
Provide reports and recommendations to the Chief Referee or relevant ILS authority on the
conduct of the section.
Be aware at all times of the safety and welfare of competitors, officials and other personnel
involved in the competition and immediately report any concerns to the Chief Referee or theirdelegate and/or the Safety Officer. If the matter is a catastrophic event the official may orderan immediate suspension of competition in their area and immediately escalate the matter tothe Chief Referee and/or their Area Referee and/or the Safety Officer.

Medical/First Aid Coordinator
The Medical/First Aid Coordinator, if appointed, act under the supervision of the Chief Referee andin emergencies the Safety Officer and/or Area Risk and Response Officer.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.

4.41

Be appropriately qualified to undertake the role required given the nature of the competition
being conducted and the resources available.
Be responsible for the organisation and operation of the competition medical/first aid service.
Where required, assess the physical and psychological fitness of any competitor or official andensure through the Chief Referee that an unfit competitor or official does not participate for thewell-being safety of themselves and/or others involved in a competition.
Acquaint the Chief Referee with any medical decisions that may affect the conduct of thecompetition.
Be aware of the plan developed by the Organising Committee for the evacuation of casualties
and other persons in the event of a serious accident or other incident or implications relating to
the safety of competitors, officials, assisting personnel and/or the public.
Direct the deployment of first aid posts and other medical services and supplies including
medical/first aid personnel at the competition venue(s).
Be available through communication and be located in such a position to assist or direct medicalor first aid specialists to any medical or first aid incident.
Provide a report and recommendations to the Chief Referee or the relevant ILS authority on
the conduct of the medical/first aid section.
Be aware at all times of the safety and welfare of competitors, officials and other personnel
involved in the competition and immediately report any concerns to the Chief Referee or theirdelegate and/or the Safety Officer. If the matter is a catastrophic event the official may orderan immediate suspension of competition in their area and immediately escalate the matter tothe Chief Referee and/or their Area Referee and/or the Safety Officer.

Course Statistician
The Course Statistician shall:
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.

4.42

Act under the direction of the Area Risk and Response Officer (ARRO) and/or Sectional
Referee/Area Referee.
Maintain the statistical records for the area and ensure that data is handed on to the Referee
Steward.
Liaise with the area Marshall to obtain event starters for each race in the water.
Record the number of starters and finishers and account for any non-finishers in each race.
Monitor the time events take to complete and note any issues with the competition conditions.
Immediately advise the ARRO, and Safety Officer (if the ARRO is not on hand), and then the
Sectional Referee/Area Referee (as applicable) if there is any competitor that is not accounted
for in a race.
Be aware at all times of the safety and welfare of competitors, officials and other personnel
involved in the competition and immediately report any concerns to the Chief Referee, theirdelegate and/or the Area Risk and Response Officer. If the matter is a catastrophic event theofficial may order an immediate suspension of competition in their area and immediately
escalate the matter to the Chief Referee and/or their Area Referee and/or the Safety Officer.

Infection Control Marshall
The Infection Control Marshall (where required for infectious disease incidents such as COVID, etc.)
shall:A.
B.

Act under the direction of the Safety Officer and/or Sectional Referee/Area Referee.
Be visually identifiable and present at all times when designated areas are in operation.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 2 – General Rules and Procedures

C.
D.
E.
F.

5.

Page S2-20

Ensure that all infectious disease control and management plans (where relevant) and/or
specific policies/protocols/practices are effectively implemented and are being followed.
Ensure and manage any required mask, handwashing, and cleaning regimes.
Promote and take practical steps to ensure competitors, officials, coaches, managers, andspectators within their area of responsibility are physical distancing to ensure infection control
practices are being followed.
Be aware at all times of the safety and welfare of competitors, officials and other personnel
involved in the competition and immediately report any concerns to the Safety Officer and/or
the Sectional/Area Referee and/or the Area Risk and Response Officer. If the matter is a
catastrophic event the official may order an immediate suspension of competition in their area
and immediately escalate the matter to the Chief Referee and/or their Area Referee and/or the
Safety Officer.

WORLD RECORDS
A.
B.

C.

D.

E.
F.

G.
H.

I.

The ILS World Records may only be established in a 50m swimming pool and using equipment
which comply with ILS standards detailed in Section 8 of the ILS Competition Rule Book.
World records may be established at Lifesaving World Championships, multi-sport games (e.g.,
World Games), ILS regional championships, national championships, or pan-national
championships (e.g., Commonwealth Championships) and at any other championship orcompetition conducted according to the ILS Lifesaving Competition Rule Book and sanctioned
by ILS.
The ILS shall recognise Youth, Open and Masters men’s and women’s individual world records
in all pool events identified in the ILS Competition Rule Book. This includes the 200m Obstacles
for Masters competitors over 55 years of age. It does not include the 100M obstacle event for
Youth, Open and Masters competitors under 54 years of age, and mixed or single gender
events in team categories except where conducted in those gender categories at an ILS LWC.
Team(relay) event world records including the Line Throw, Manikin Relay, Obstacle Relay,
Medley Relay and Lifesaver Relay events shall be recognised for Open and Youth age
categories (national teams and club teams are not separated for record purposes). National
teams and Interclub teams must meet the team eligibility requirements as defined in the ILS
Lifesaving World Championship Handbook to be eligible to claim a world record.
Note 1: The ILS does not recognise separate National and Interclub team world records i.e.,
only the fastest time is recognised as a world record in each Open and Youth category relay
event.
Note 2: The ILS does not recognise Masters team (relay) world records.
To be eligible to set an ILS World Record in relay events teams must meet the relevant Open
and/or Youth national or interclub eligibility requirements (as appropriate) as defined in the ILS
LWC Handbook.
World records may be established and held by members of an ILS Full, Associate orCorresponding Member Organisation and be eligible to compete at the sanctioned or ILS
competition.
Note: An ILS Full Member Federation must provide permission for members of an Associateor Corresponding Federation to compete at an ILS LWC, regional championships etc., and ata sanctioned ILS competition. Without this permission a world record will not be recognised by
the ILS.
Youth competitors may establish Youth or Open world records regardless of the category inwhich they are competing at the time (i.e., youth or open competition).
Masters competitors may establish both a master and/or Open world records regardless of theage category in which they are competing (i.e., participating in a Masters or Open age event).
However, a Masters competitor may only claim the masters record for their designated masters
age group.
All records achieved during Masters, Interclub or National Teams Lifesaving WorldChampionships, World Games or ILS regional championships shall be automatically approved(and without a doping test).
Note 1: It is recommended that a World Record application form is completed to ensure that all
records created at a LWC are recorded. The Chief Steward/Head Scorer should assist with thisprocess.
Note 2: Masters world records set at any ILS LWC, World Games, or ILS regional
championships or ILS sanctioned competition shall be recognised without a negative doping
test certificate.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 2 – General Rules and Procedures

J.

Records at the other competitions shall be approved subject to the following conditions:•
The competition must be sanctioned by the ILS.
•
All records must be achieved in competitions held in public and announced to the public(and to ILS headquarters) by advertisement at least three days before competition.
•
The facility (including event-specific) standards and equipment specifications must be
certified by a surveyor or other qualified official appointed or approved by the ILS
Management Committee (for world championships) or the ILS Member Organisation for
ILS-sanctioned competitions in their jurisdiction.
•
The ILS will accept world records only when times are recorded by automatic officiating
equipment.

K.

Times which are equal to 1/100 of a second will be recognised as equal records, andcompetitors achieving these equal times will be called “Joint Holders.”
Only the time of the winner of a race may be submitted for a world record. However, if the race
contains competitors of different age groups, times may be submitted for a world record by theleading competitor in an age division within the one race.
In the event of a tie in a record-setting race, each competitor who tied shall be considered awinner and will jointly hold the world record.
In the event of a record being set in one race and subsequently broken in a later race(s), theearlier and later times will be recognised as world records in chronological order.
Applications for world records must be made by the responsible authority of the organisingcommittee of the competition using the official ILS Record Application Form (see end of thissection and also available online at www.ilsf.org) and signed by the ILS-recognised Chief
Referee certifying that all regulations have been observed including a negative doping test
certification. The application shall be forwarded to the ILS Custodian of Records within 28 daysof the conclusion of the competition.
Upon receipt of the ILS Record Application, and upon satisfaction that the information containedin the application is accurate, the ILS Custodian of Records will recommend that the ILS
Secretary General declare and publish the world record and provide a world record certificate
to the competitor signed by the ILS President and ILS Secretary General.
Doping Control and World Records•
For all world records set at Interclub or National Teams Lifesaving World Championships,
World Games, or ILS regional championships where there is in place a system of targeted
and random tests in accordance with the ILS anti-doping rules, no negative doping test
certificate is required.
•
At an ILS sanctioned event a youth or open competitor establishing or equalling an ILS
world record shall submit to “doping control” following a race and a negative doping test
certificate must be provided along with the ILS record application to recognise a world
record established at an ILS sanctioned competition. If the competition is not sanctionedby the ILS, the record will not be recognised.
•
If no doping control is conducted at the competition, the competitor(s) shall submit to
doping control no later than 24 hours after the race.
•
Masters world records set at any ILS LWC, World Games, or ILS regional championships
or ILS sanctioned competition shall be recognised without a negative doping test
certificate.

L.
M.
N.
O.

P.

Q.

R.
6.

If the world record application is not accepted, and the decision appealed, it shall be referredto the ILS Sport Commission for consideration.

OFFICIAL START AND COMPLETION OF COMPETITION
A.
B.

7.

Page S2-21

A competition is deemed to begin when a call for entry registration is officially issued by thecompetition organisers.
The official conclusion of a competition is 20minutes following the completion of the lastcompetition event. However, issues under protest, appeal or disciplinary review shall continue
to final resolution which shall be deemed to fall within the official competition time.

PREVAILING CONDITIONSA.

Competitors acknowledge and accept that open water competitions can be affected byenvironmental conditions beyond the control of organisers (e.g., water or beach conditions, orinclement weather) and that competitors are subject to luck of the prevailing conditions.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 2 – General Rules and Procedures

B.

8.

No protest or appeal will be entertained when an incident is caused by the prevailing conditions.
The Chief Referee and/or relevant official(s) have absolute discretion in determining whether
an incident has been caused by the luck of the prevailing conditions.

VIDEO RECORDING DEVICES
A.

B.

9.

Page S2-22

Mounted on craftVideo cameras may be mounted on boards, surf skis, surf boats and inflatable rescue craft(IRB) as long as such devices conform to the requirements specified in Section 8, Facility andEquipment Standards and Scrutineering Procedures.
Attached to competitors
With the exception of surf boat sweeps and IRB drivers, video cameras may not be worn orotherwise attached to a competitor from start to finish of a race.

COMMUNICATION DEVICES IN COMPETITION
Competitors in a race are not permitted to use electronic communication devices from the beginningto the completion of the race.

10.

COMPETITION ATTIRE
Competitors shall wear costumes, clothing or dress approved by the ILS. A competitor shall not be
permitted to take part in any competition if, in the opinion of the Chief Referee, the competitor is notproperly attired.
For standards related to competition attire, see Section 8.
The Chief Referee has the authority to exclude any competitor whose swimwear does not comply
with the following:A.

Swimwear
The swimsuits worn by competitors shall comply with the ILS swimsuit standard defined in
Section 8, and:•Be in good moral taste and not carry any symbol which may be considered offensive.
•
Comply with the commercial identification policy.
•
Both men and women competitors may wear "modesty" swimwear made of a textile
woven fabric under their swimsuit, provided that no competitive advantage is gained. Any
modesty swimwear shall be restricted to the short style for men and the two-piece style
top and/or bottom for women.
•
Upon application for religious and/or cultural reasons, the ILS shall consider the wearingof (non-body shaping) textile swimwear that covers a greater part of the body provided
that such swimwear does not provide a competitive advantage.

B.

Protective clothing
Except for swimmers in pool and ocean events, other protective clothing (e.g., shorts, vests, tshirts, etc.) may be worn by competitors in both individual and team events unless otherwiseprescribed by these rules or the event organising authority. Vests, t-shirts and shorts, long leg
tights, leg stockings and/or compression garments are only permitted to be worn in the poolline throw event and in non-swimming ocean/beach individual events or non-swimming legs ofocean/beach team events.
Note: Board Paddlers may also wear protective clothing except that sleeves are not permitted
on the arms of competitors unless climatic conditions dictate and are approved by the Chief
Referee or their delegate.
Flotation vests
Must be worn in IRB events and may be worn in board, surf ski, surf boat events and in nonswimming legs of the Oceanman/Oceanwoman individual and relay events.
In surfboat events
The sweep oarsman may wear apparel (including wetsuit and booties) as conditions warrant.
The specifications for wetsuits (S8-4.8) shall not apply.
In IRB events
Competitors may wear apparel including wetsuits, booties, gloves, and hoods, except in the
IRB tube race where crewpersons and patients (victims) are not permitted to wear gloves. The
specifications for wetsuits (S8-4.8) shall not apply.
Competition caps and helmets

C.
D.
E.

F.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 2 – General Rules and Procedures

•
•
•
•
•
•

•

•

Page S2-23

Competition caps and/or helmets must be worn at the start of a race by competitors in all
events to assist with safety, identification and judging of competitors.
All competitors from the same team shall wear identical swim caps and/or helmets in each
event. Competitor names on caps/helmets are permitted. Handlers must wear a cap toassist in event judging and lane allocations.
In ocean events, caps – securely fastened under the chin – must be worn on thecompetitors’ heads at the start of each event and at the start of each leg in team events.
In pool events and in the Simulated Emergency Response Competition, the ocean event
caps, or rubber or silicone caps must be worn on competitors’ heads at the start of each
event and at the start of each leg in team events.
Competitors may also wear rubber or silicone caps under ocean competition caps.
The wearing of aquatic safety helmets is compulsory in surf boat events (unless otherwise
optional – refer Section 6 for details) and IRB events and is optional in surfboard and surf
ski events. The conditions for the wearing of helmets is the same as swim caps. For
helmet colours, see Section 8.
A competitor/team shall not be disqualified if the cap or helmet is inadvertently displacedor lost after the start of an event, provided that officials can identify that the competitor
correctly completed the course/race.
Note: Competitors should continue to wear their identifying caps or helmets (to assist inaccurate recording of placings) until the official in charge of the finish advises caps orhelmets may be removed.
In IRB events, approved aquatic helmets must be worn by IRB drivers, crewpersons, andpatients.
Note: For helmet standards, see Section 8.

••

In Surf Boat events, all rowers and sweeps must wear an approved aquatic safety helmet
unless advised otherwise by competition officials.
Note: For helmet standards, see Section 8).

G.

Vests
•
Competitors in pool events are not required to wear distinctive high-visibility vests unlessotherwise determined by competition organisers.
•
For safety and identification, competitors and handlers entering open water forcompetition or training beyond knee depth shall be required to wear distinctive highvisibility vests as determined by the ILS competition organiser. Handlers will be warned ifthey do not wear high visibility vests in such circumstances. High-visibility vests aremandatory in events staged in ocean or open water.
•
In ocean events, the vests worn by swimmers must be high-visibility, sleeveless singlets
extending from the neck to the midriff region. Competitors who are not swimming (e.g.,
paddlers, handlers) are permitted to wear different style high-visibility vests (e.g., sleevedrash vests).
•
These vests must be worn over the top of swimwear and, where relevant, personal
flotation devices, protective clothing, and/or wet suits. Refer to 2.10.8 b) for IRB events.
•
Competitors may also be required to wear distinctive coloured vests or bibs to assist with
judging of finishes. Such vests or bibs will be supplied by the ILS.
•
Even when ILS competition organisers supply high-visibility vests, competitors may bepermitted to wear their own vests only if:•
The vest colour is the same as that prescribed by the organisers.
•
The vests meet the requirements of ILS competition sponsorship requirements.
•
The vests are approved by the ILS competition management committee.
•
Should organisers prescribe a different coloured vest to be worn in different events or
areas, or by different genders to assist with safety, identification, and or/judging, they will
be supplied by the ILS. In such circumstances, club, or team high visibility vests (or caps)
do not need to be worn under the prescribed coloured vest (or cap).

H.

Lifejackets and Personal Flotation Devices (PFDs)•
Personal Flotation Devices may be worn in board, surf ski, and surf boat events, and innon-swimming legs of the Oceanman/Oceanwoman individual and relay events.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 2 – General Rules and Procedures••

Page S2-24

In IRB events, the wearing of approved PFDs is compulsory for drivers, crew and patientsin both training and competition. It is not required for high visibility safety vests to be wornover the top of PFDs.
For PFD standards, see Section 8.

I.

Eyewear•Swim goggles may be worn except in Simulated Emergency Response Competition.
•
Sunglasses or optical glasses may be worn in all events provided that any eye protection
or optical glasses worn must be suitably designed for that event.

J.

Footwear•
Competitors shall not wear footwear in competition events unless otherwise specified in
the event description or at the discretion of the Chief Referee based on conditions.
•
Manikin handlers may wear footwear in pool events.
•
Competitors may wear footwear in the 1km and 2km Beach Runs, the 3 x 1km Beach Run
Relay and the run leg of the Ocean M Lifesaver Relay event.

K.

Wetsuits•
Wetsuits shall be permitted in ocean events only in water temperature of less than 16
degrees Celsius. The Chief Referee may authorise the wearing of wetsuits dependent
upon weather, water, or other marine conditions. In such circumstances it isrecommended that wetsuits be worn by competitors in water events or where there is arisk of immersion.
•
The Chief Referee in consultation with the Safety Officer and Competition Committee may
allow the wearing of wetsuits in water temperatures greater than 16 degrees particularly
where weather and/or wind chill factors are considered a risk for participant hypothermia.
In such circumstances it is recommended that wetsuits be worn by competitors in water
events or where there is a risk of immersion.
•Competitors may not wear more than one wet suit or marine stinger suit.
•
Wetsuits must be worn in water temperatures of less than 13 degrees Celsius.
•
Wetsuits may be worn by IRB competitors, surf boat sweeps in any conditions.
•No events with swimming shall take place in water temperature less than 13.0 degrees
Celsius.
•
Wetsuits must conform to ILS standards outlined in Section 8.

L.

Marine Stinger Suits•The Chief Referee may authorise the wearing of marine stinger suits dependent upon
marine conditions. In such circumstances it is recommended that marine stinger wetsuits
be worn by competitors in water events where there is a risk of injury.
•
Marine Stinger Suits are to be approved by the organising authority for a competition.

11.

AGE CATEGORIES

11.1

Determining Age Categories
The ILS follows the IOC guidelines for determining the age of competitors in its events such as theLifesaving World Championships. A competitor’s age and eligibility age group (s) is determined by
how old he or she is as at 31st December of the year in which they are participating in the competition.
Examples are:Open Competition
Eligible:

Competitors who turn 16 years of age on or before 31st December in the year ofcompetition. There is no maximum age.

Not eligible:

Competitors who are younger than 15 or turn 15 in the year of competition

Youth Competition
Eligible:

Competitors who turn 15,16,17 and 18 years of age on or before 31st Decemberin the year of competition.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 2 – General Rules and Procedures

Page S2-25

Youth Competition
Not eligible:

Competitors who are younger than 14 or who turn 19 in the year of competition

Masters Competition
Eligible:

Competitors who turn 30 years of age on or before 31st December in the year of
the competition. There is no maximum age.

Not eligible:

Competitors who turn 29 in the year of the competition.

ILS Masters individual events may be conducted in five-year age groups from 30 years of age to over
75 years of age e.g., 30 - 34, 65 - 69, 75 years plus.
ILS Masters two-person team events may be conducted in five-year age groups from 30 years ofage to over 75 years of age e.g., 30 - 34, 65 - 69, and 75 years plus based on the age of the youngest
team member.
ILS Masters Competition three-person team events are conducted in age groups 90 -109, 110 - 129,130 - 149, 150 - 169 and 170 years plus based on the total ages of the three team members.
ILS Masters Surf Boat age groups are conducted in seven age groups 120 - 139, 140 - 159, 160 179, 180 -199, 200 - 219, 220 - 259, and 260 years plus based on the total ages of the four rowers(but not the sweep) – refer Section 6.
Federations may decide which age groups to conduct Masters Competition dependent on theirneeds.
19 Years Surf Boats
Eligible:

Competitors who turn 16, 17, 18, or 19 years of age on or before 31st Decemberin the year of the competition.

Not eligible:

Competitors who turn 15 or 20 in the year of the competition.

23 Years Surf Boats
Eligible:

Competitors who turn 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22 or 23 years of age on or before
31st December in the year of the competition.

Not eligible:

Competitors who turn 15 or 24 in the year of the competition.

Inflatable Rescue BoatsIRB Drivers:
Eligible:

Competitors who turn 18 years of age on or before 31st December in the year ofcompetition. There is no maximum age. Competitors who turn 18 years of age on
or before 31st December in the year of competition. There is no maximum age.

Not eligible:

Competitors who are younger than 17 in the year of competition and those whoare not certified by their Federation to operate craft and those who are unlicensed
drivers.

Note:

In most countries drivers are required to be licensed under statutory arrangements to operate a maritime vessel. The Organising Committee should advise
local requirements as part of entry requirements.

IRB Crewpersons, Patients and Handlers:International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 2 – General Rules and Procedures

Page S2-26

Inflatable Rescue Boats

12

Eligible:

Competitors who turn 16 years of age on or before 31st December in the year ofcompetition. There is no maximum age.

Not eligible:

Competitors who are younger than 15 in the year of competition.

COMPETITORS WITH A DISABILITY
A.
B.
C.

With the desire to provide opportunities for all eligible competitors, accommodations may bemade for a competitor with a permanent limiting disability to participate in an event/competition.
Upon application to the Competition Committee for a competition, an allowance may beconsidered but only if there is no disadvantage to other competitors in the event. This allowance
may include but is not limited to starts, finishes, equipment modification, rules etc.
The decision of the Competition Committee on such matters shall be final and not subject toprotest.
Note 1: This section is not to assist competitors who have suffered an injury. The section isintended to assist members with a permanent limiting disability to participate in ILS
competitions.
Note 2: This section is also not intended in the normal course to assist competitors with say,replacement knees or hips and/or muscle and/or joint injuries and/or dilapidations etc. byallowing runners in events. Such competitors must accept that their capacity may be limited bylife events but does not qualify for allowances.
Note 3: It is clarified that an undertaking by a team or individual that a runner will not overtake
another competitor or simply maintain their relative place in a race is not regarded as eliminatinga disadvantage to other competitors in the event.
Note 4: The ILS may also issue discreet rules and conduct inclusive events for competitors witha permanent limiting disability.

13.

INTERCLUB, NATIONAL AND INTERNATIONAL MEMBER COMPETITION TRANSFERSA.
B.

It is a Federation’s responsibility to manage their members’ interclub competition transfer
arrangements.
Competitors must apply to transfer to a foreign club. For the application to succeed, competitors
require approval from their home club, region, and national organisations:•Applicants shall seek clearance from their current club and forward this clearance to theirregional (if any) and national organization for endorsement.
•
The national organization shall advise the applicant of its decision and forward its
approval, if granted, to the national organization of the applicant’s new club.
•
National organizations shall not unreasonably withhold transfer approval.
•
The ILS Sport Commission shall resolve disputes over international transfers in
consultation with the disputing parties. The Sport Commission’s decision shall be final.
Note: The club international transfer rules (above) do not apply to National Teams
Championships.

14.

DOPING CONTROL

14.1

Drug policy
The ILS has a policy of drug-free competition with possible drug testing for all ILS world
championships, ILS regional championships and multi-sport Games where Lifesaving is included.
View or download ILS Anti-Doping Rules at www.ilsf.org.
The ILS recognises that the host country may have laws or legal requirements in addition to the ILS
drug policy. Competitors must be informed of such requirements as part of registration procedures.
A violation of the ILS Anti-Doping Rules leads to disqualification of an athlete's individual results
including forfeiture of points, medals, and prizes in individual events. In a team event, if a member ofa team violates the ILS Anti-Doping Rules, the entire team shall be disqualified from that event withthe attendant loss of points, medals, and prizes.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 2 – General Rules and Procedures

Page S2-27

For purposes of doping control, the following definitions shall apply:
A.

B.

C.

Individual events
An individual event shall be contested by a single competitor. An individual may be assisted byhandlers (e.g., Oceanman/Oceanwoman, Super Lifesaver). There can be no substitution ofindividuals in an event or between rounds. If a competitor is disqualified for a breach of therules, doping offence, etc., the competitor loses all standing in the event being contested.
Team events
A team event is contested by more than one competitor from the same National Team, club orlifesaving unit who complete an event or race together as a discrete unit (e.g., SERC) or
separately (e.g., relay events). Team members may be substituted between rounds, but there
shall be no substitution of competitors while a race is being conducted. If one or morecompetitors are disqualified for a breach of the rules, doping offence, etc., the entire team loses
all standing in the event being contested.
Team medal count or point score
To recognise overall winning teams at a competition a medal count tally (based on individual
and team event first placings etc.) or a point score may be conducted. The organising authority
shall advise the basis details of any team medal count or point score. If one or more competitors
are disqualified for a breach of the rules in an individual or team event, then no medals or points
are awarded to those particular competitors or teams, but the team may retain standing in the
medal count or point score unless otherwise determined by the organising authority.
Note: The definitions above for “individual events” and “team events” are the same as thedefinitions of “individual sport” and “team sport” used in the ILS Anti-Doping Rules. The term“crew” has the same meaning an effect as “team” in relation to ILS competition.

15.

CODE OF CONDUCT

15.1

Code of conduct for competitors, technical officials, and members
The ILS competitions are high profile public events. The ILS expects all competitors, officials, andmembers to co-operate to ensure a positive public image. Behaviour likely to cause embarrassment
or damage to the image of the ILS or lifesaving competition will be referred to the Disciplinary
Committee. Penalties may include expulsion of individuals or teams from the competition.
The ILS expects the highest standard of conduct of its competitors, officials, and members. These
expectations are reflected in the rules for competition in the ILS constitution and this rule book.
For the purpose of applying the code of conduct, the definition of a ‘team’ includes actual competitors,
coaches, assistants, spectators, etc., travelling with the team. Violations of this code will result in
individual and/or team disqualification from the competition.

15.2

Fair-play code for lifesaving competitions
It is important that competition, especially world championships, be conducted in a spirit of goodwill
and sportsmanship.
Competitors are required to abide by and compete within the rules. Any breach of the rules will bereported to the Chief Referee who may initiate action as described in S2-16 Misconduct.
Team members represent their country, their organisation, their club, their sponsors, and the ILS. As
such, team members shall at all times conduct themselves in a proper and civil manner during thechampionships and related activities including social functions.
Unbecoming conduct by a team or its supporters is a serious offence and will be dealt with as such.
Any action by a team which attempts to disrupt or interfere with another team is a serious offence
and will be dealt with as such.
The general conduct of all participants will be measured by the following ILS code of fair play:A.

The ILS will•
Promote and encourage fair play through its members.
•
Impress upon competitors, coaches, technical officials, and administrators the need tomaintain the highest standards of sportsmanship and good behaviour in lifesaving sport.
•
Ensure that its rules are fair, clearly understood by competitors, coaches, technicalofficials, and administrators, and properly enforced.
•
Make every effort to ensure that its rules are applied consistently and impartially.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 2 – General Rules and Procedures

Page S2-28

•

B.

C.

D.

E.

Treat all members equally, regardless of their sex, gender identity, intersex status, sexual
orientation, age, ability, race, or physical characteristics, etc.
•
Make all reasonable provision to accommodate competitors with disabilities provided that
there is no competitive disadvantage to other competitors in the event being contested.
The ILS technical officials will:•
Abide by the rules and the spirit of the competition.
•
Be honest, fair, and ethical in dealing with others.
•
Be professional in appearance, action, and language.
•
Resolve conflicts fairly and promptly through established procedures.
•
Maintain strict impartiality.
•
Maintain a safe environment for others.
•
Be respectful and considerate of others.
•
Be a positive role model.
Competitors will:•
Abide by the rules and the spirit of the competition.
•
Treat officials with respect and accept the decisions of Referees and Judges without
question or complaint.
•
Never consider cheating and in particular, not attempt to improve their individual
performance by the use of drugs.
•
Exercise reasonable self-control at all times.
•
Accept success and failure, victory, and defeat, with grace and magnanimity.
•
Treat their fellow competitors and team members with respect, both in and outside thecompetition arena.
Team managers and coaches will:•
Insist that competitors understand and abide by the principles of fair play.
•
Never countenance the use of drugs by competitors.
•
Never employ methods or practices that could involve risks, however slight, to the longterm health or physical development of their competitors.
•
Not attempt to manipulate the rules in order to take advantage of their competitors or theiropponents.
•
Respect the regulations and authority of the ILS and its member organisations and not
attempt to avoid or circumvent these regulations.
•
Recognise the special role that they have to play in the ILS and set a good example ofsportsmanship and good behaviour at all times.
•
Respect the rights of other teams and never deliberately act in a manner intended to be
to the detriment of another team.
•Respect the rights of competitors, coaches, technical officials and not exploit ordeliberately act in a manner detrimental to them.
•Not endeavour to influence the result of a competition by any action not strictly within therules and regulations or within the fundamental precepts of fair play.
Delegates, media representatives, supporters and spectators will:•
Respect the authority and regulations of the ILS and not attempt to avoid or circumventthem.
•
Accept the authority of technical officials.
•
Abide by the spirit of the competitions.
•
Exercise reasonable self-control and display good behaviour at all times.
•
Be respectful and considerate in interactions with others.
•
Acknowledge the performance of all involved in the competition with grace andmagnanimity.

16.

MISCONDUCT

16.1

Conduct and discipline generally
The ILS, either by pre-determined publicised penalties or by adopting the decision of a disciplinarycommittee, may, at its discretion, issue penalties to individual competitors, clubs, or national teams.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 2 – General Rules and Procedures

16.2

Competing unfairly
A.

B.
C.

16.3

Competitors or teams who are deemed to have competed unfairly may be disqualified from an
event or expelled from the championships. The Chief Referee may refer the competitor or teamto the disciplinary committee for consideration of further penalty. Examples of competing
unfairly include:•
Committing a doping or doping-related infraction.
•
Impersonating another competitor.
•
Competing twice in the same individual event.
•Competing twice in the same event in different teams.
•
Purposely interfering with a course to gain an advantage.
•
Competing without entry.
•
Competing for another club or nation without federation clearance.
•
Attempt to defeat the ballot or draw for events or positions.
•Competing using equipment that does not meet ILS specifications.
•Competing contrary to the specific direction of the Chief Referee or designated official•
Jostling or obstructing other competitors or handlers so as to impede their progress.
•
Receiving physical or material outside assistance (other than verbal or other direction
except where specifically excluded by the rules of the event).
•
Participating contrary to the spirit of the competition (as described in the code of fair play).
The Chief Referee and/or the relevant technical official(s) shall have absolute discretion in
determining whether a competitor, team or handler has competed unfairly.
The ILS may, in its absolute discretion, investigate and take action on any matter of “competing
unfairly” prior to, during or following competition. This includes, but is not limited to, the returnof medals and referral to the disciplinary committee.

Serious discipline offence
A.
B.
C.

16.4

Page S2-29

If a competitor or team commits what could be a serious discipline offence, they should
immediately contact the Organising Committee and detail the circumstances. Failure to reporta possible violation is itself an offence against ILS rules.
Allegations of a serious discipline offence shall be referred to the Disciplinary Committee.
If the Chief Referee disqualifies a competitor or team for a serious offence in competition, theChief Referee may also choose to make a report to the Disciplinary Committee which may
decide to apply a further penalty against the competitor or team and its members.

Disciplinary Committee
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.

The Organising Committee shall appoint a Disciplinary Committee consisting of no less than
three members.
The host organising committee shall supply the Disciplinary Committee with the name, contact
address and phone number at the competition site of the manager of every participating team.
The Disciplinary Committee shall inquire into any written complaint of misconduct, or any matter
referred to it by the Appeals Committee or Chief Referee.
The committee may also initiate an inquiry to determine if an offence has been committed andmake a complaint if appropriate. The committee may then proceed as if another person had
made the complaint.
The committee may assign appropriate penalties including removal from or disqualification fromthe championships and forfeiture of titles or trophies.
The committee shall report in writing on its inquiries and decisions to the ILS Secretary General.
Complaints must be received in writing, or the complainant must be prepared to attend ameeting or inquiry of the committee as and when required.
The member or members against whom the complaint is made shall be entitled to be present
at every hearing accompanied by the team manager.
All persons involved in a disciplinary hearing or enquiry or an Appeals Committee hearing, mustabide by and strictly observe the ILS Code of Conduct set out in this Section. In particular, but
without limitation, all persons involved in such hearings or enquires must:•
Be honest, fair, and ethical.
•
Be respectful and considerate of others.
•
Exercise reasonable self-control at all times.
•
Be truthful and treat all persons involved in good faith and with courtesy and respect.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 2 – General Rules and Procedures

J.

16.5

Inquiry guidelines:•
Formal rules of evidence will not apply to the hearing or enquiry, but all persons involved
must be truthful and act in good faith.
•
The complaint or reference to the committee shall be read to the competitor(s) or to theteam(s’) representative(s).
•The evidence of the complainant shall be presented.
•
The evidence of the team member(s) against whom the complaint has been made shallbe presented.
•
Each witness shall be subject to examination by the party (if any) on whose behalf thewitness is called and then to cross-examination by the opposing party or parties. The party
calling the witness shall have the right to re-examination, but no other examination shallbe allowed except by leave of the committee.
•
Hearsay and irrelevant evidence shall not be admitted.
•
Witnesses other than the party charged shall remain out of hearing of the inquiry until
called upon to give evidence.

Notification of Findings
A.

B.
17.

Page S2-30

The committee shall make its decisions in camera. If the complaint is proved, the committee
may impose a penalty. Notice of the finding and the penalty shall be given forthwith in writingby the chair of the committee to the team member concerned, to their team or club, and to thecountry to which the team or club is affiliated.
The finding and penalty (if any) shall be effective forthwith.

DISQUALIFICATIONS AND “DID NOT FINISH” CLASSIFICATIONS
Competitors or teams may be disqualified from an event or from the entire competition. Where acompetitor is disqualified for any reason, in a heat or a final, the place he or she would have held
shall be awarded to the competitor who finished next and all lower placing competitors shall beadvanced one place. (See the Beach Flags and Oceanman/Oceanwoman and Ocean M Eliminator
event variations for specific placings and points allocations for events conducted in an elimination
format. See also Surf Boat Events for “Round Robin” points allocations, disqualifications, eliminationand did not finish classifications.)
Where a competitor is disqualified for any reason, the final event results shall not include a place ortime for the competitor.
Competitors may protest or appeal certain disqualifications as detailed in this Rulebook.
A.

B.

C.

D.

Did not finish (DNF)•
Where a competitor does not finish an event for any reason, in a heat or a final, the place
he or she would have held shall be awarded to the competitor who finished next and all
lower placing competitors shall be advanced one place.
•
Where a competitor does not finish an event, the event results shall not include a placeor time for the competitor.
Disqualification from competition
Examples of behaviour which may result in disqualification of individuals or teams from thecompetition, include:•
Refusing to fulfil the conditions of entry.
•
Breach of the ILS code of conduct or rules.
•
The impersonation or use of unauthorised competitors.
•
Activities resulting in wilful damage to the venue sites, accommodation sites or theproperty of others.
•
Abuse of technical officials.
Disqualification from events
Examples of behaviour, which may result in disqualification of individuals or teams from an
event, include:•
Being absent at the start of an event.
•Infraction of the “General conditions” for events or infraction of event rules.
Competitors shall be notified of their disqualification from an event by the Chief Referee orappropriate Judge, at the completion of the race. Competitors shall not leave the designatedcompetition area until dismissed by the Chief Referee or appropriate technical official.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 2 – General Rules and Procedures

E.

18.

Page S2-31

If an error by an official causes a fault by a competitor, the fault by the competitor may be
expunged at the Chief Referee’s discretion.
Note: Disqualification (DQ) codes are listed at the end of the relevant sections of the ILS
Competition Rule Book.

PROTESTS AND APPEALSThe Organising Committee reserves the right to delete, alter or otherwise vary any rule, competition
criteria, timetable, or other matter as it deems necessary. Every effort will be made to ensure thateach team manager receives notice. Protests resulting from such Organising Committee decisions
will not be entertained.
In addition, event courses and the competition area may change from the descriptions in this rulebook if the Chief Referee deems it necessary and providing teams have been advised of the change
before the start of that event.
A competitor or team manager may protest to a Chief Referee, and subsequently dispute a Chief
Referee’s decision in the manner prescribed below. See Protest/Appeal Form at the end of thissection.
Note: Refer also to specific rules in this section for Beach Flag rules for protest and appeal
processes.

18.1

Types of protests
Protests, which may lead to the imposition of penalties, fall broadly into the following categories:•
Protests arising from entry procedures or entry eligibility.
•
Protests arising from scrutineering or equipment eligibility.
•
Protests arising during participation in the competition and/or breaches of rules

18.2

Lodging a protest
The conditions relating to the lodgement of protests shall be as follows:
A.
B.
C.

D.

E.

F.
G.
H.

A start decision by the Starter or the Chief Referee (or their delegate) is not subject to protest.
A protest or appeal directly challenging a Finish Judge’s decision cannot be accepted.
However, upon request, and at their absolute discretion, technical officials may review theirorder of finish decisions.
No protest shall be accepted against the actions of another competitor or team in the same
event except where that competitor or team has suffered direct interference e.g., if a technicalofficial takes an action or no action against a competitor or team, another competitor or teamcannot protest unless they are in the same race and there is direct interference involved.
A protest against the conditions under which an event or race is to be conducted must be madeverbally to the Chief Referee prior to the event or race. Before the start of the event or race, theChief Referee or appointed technical official shall inform the competitors in that event or raceof such a protest.
A protest against a competitor or a team or against a decision of an official must be lodged
verbally with the Chief Referee within 15minutes of the posting of the result of the event orwithin 15minutes of being notified verbally by the Chief Referee of the decision, whicheveroccurs first. Within 15minutes of the submission of the verbal protest, a protest written in English
on the ILS Protest/Appeal Form or other acceptable form shall be lodged with the Chief
Referee.
Note: The Chief Referee at their discretion may extend these time limits provided that results
have not been declared as final.
Where a protest is lodged, the result of the event shall be withheld or not finalised until theprotest is decided. If a protest is upheld, placings and trophies (where relevant or required)shall be varied according to the amended result.
The result of the protest shall be noted on the back of the event result card or result records
and also on the protest form.
There shall be no protest fee. There is a fee payable whenever a matter is referred to theappeals committee, whether by the Chief Referee directly or by a team appealing a Referee’s
decision.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 2 – General Rules and Procedures

18.3

Protests in Beach Flags
A.

B.
C.
18.4

Page S2-32

In Beach Flags events a protest against an elimination must be lodged verbally within 5minutesof the completion of the round or before the next run through of an event begins (whicheveroccurs first). If a Beach Flag elimination protest occurs the Chief Referee will immediately
consider the protest without delay before proceeding with the event. There will be no Appeal
permitted on Beach Flag elimination protest decisions of the Referee.
A Referee is also authorised to refer a Beach Flag elimination protest directly to an on-beachJury of Appeal Committee representative for decision on the basis of the processes and timings
detailed above. No paperwork is required nor is a fee is payable if this occurs.
A competitor is permitted to protest and/or appeal against a disqualification decision in Beach
Flag events provided that correct processes are followed.

Adjudication of protests
The conditions relating to the adjudication of protests shall be:
A.

B.
C.

D.

E.

18.5

Immediately after the correct lodgement of a protest, the Chief Referee may adjudicate on thematter as provided for herein or refer the matter directly to the appeals committee convenor.
Note: There is no fee when protesting a decision or if the Chief Referee (or their delegate)
refers the protest directly to the Appeals Committee without first making a decision on theprotest.
Where the Chief Referee considers (in their absolute discretion) that a protest is frivolous, or
not of a serious nature, they may choose not to accept the protest.
Where the Referee or the Area Referee or the Sectional Referee accepts the protest, they will
adjudicate on the protest in such manner as they see fit having regard to the interests of thecompetitor making the protest, all other competitors, and all officials in the event and also the
conduct of the event itself.
Note: Should it be determined that there was a technical or an administrative error in recording
either the disqualification or protest reference, the error can be corrected, and the protest or
appeal proceed without prejudice.
Where the Chief Referee adjudicates and dismisses the protest, or refuses to accept a protest(it is regarded as frivolous), the decision may be appealed to the appeals committee. Suchappeal must be lodged with the appeals committee convenor within 30minutes of the decisionof the protest being advised to the competitor, accompanied by the appeal fee.
Note: The Chief Referee at their discretion may extend this time limits provided that results
have not been declared as final.
The assistance of video or other electronic equipment may be used to consider protests.
However, the onus is on the protester to provide proof of authenticity and any clearly viewableevidence and viewing mechanisms at the time that the protest is heard.
Note: A minimum 9 inch/228mm (measured on the diagonal) tablet type device with highdefinition is generally considered to be the minimum size to properly adjudicate on a protest.

Appeals Committee
A person of suitable experience and practical knowledge is to be appointed to act as the Appeals
Committee Convenor along with appoint appeals committee members of sufficient number to enable
at least two committees of three persons to sit simultaneously. The Appeals Committee Convenor
selects members of the Appeals Committee, based on their backgrounds and experience, toadjudicate individual cases.
While three people should ordinarily sit on an appeals committee, the quorum for an Appeals
Committee shall be two persons.
The membership of an Appeals Committee shall not include a person who has previously participatedin the making of the decision that is the subject of dispute.
A.
B.

The Appeals Committee shall deal with all protests referred to it by the Chief Referee or Appeals
Committee Convenor.
A fee may be incurred to hear an appeal. If applicable, this fee is payable whenever a matter isreferred to the Appeals Committee, whether by the Chief Referee directly or by a teamappealing a Chief Referee’s decision. If the appeal is upheld, any fee paid is returned, if ruled
against, any fee paid is forfeited.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 2 – General Rules and Procedures

C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.

I.
J.
K.

L,

Page S2-33

The Appeals Committee shall rule on the appeal and advise the competitor and relevant
technical officials of its decision and any penalty imposed (including a penalty other thandisqualification). Reasons for the decision may be briefly given verbally and on the protest form.
The decision of the Appeals Committee shall be final, without the right of further appeal.
The Appeals Committee may refer serious breaches of the ILS Code of Conduct to theDisciplinary Committee.
The Appeals Committee shall adjudicate after both sides have had an opportunity to state theircase.
Guidelines for an Appeals Committee inquiry are similar to the Disciplinary Committee
procedure (see S2-16.4).
The assistance of video or other electronic equipment may be used to consider appeals.
However, the onus is on the appellant to provide proof of authenticity and any clearly viewableevidence and viewing mechanisms at the time that the appeal is heard.
Note: A minimum 9 inch/228mm (measured on the diagonal) tablet type device with highdefinition is generally considered to be the minimum size to properly adjudicate on an appeal.
After hearing all available and relevant evidence, the Appeals Committee shall make its
decision in camera.
The decision to uphold (i.e., agree with) the appeal or to dismiss (i.e., rule against) the appeal
shall be delivered verbally or in writing to the team manager, competitor and/or team member
concerned, to the Chief Referee and Appeals Committee Convenor.
It is the Chief Referees duty to decide on the course of action to be followed on the outcome ofdecisions made to uphold appeals in the best interest of the competitor or team involved withthe appeal together with all other competitors and teams and the competition. Such decision
shall be final, without the right of further protest or appeal.
The Competition Appeals Committee may refer serious breaches of any ILS rule or regulation(including any supplementary regulations) to the Competition Disciplinary Committee for further
inquiry.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 2 – General Rules and Procedures

Page S2-34

PROTEST FORM
Part 1: Protests must be lodged in accordance with the ILS Competition Rule Book and/or ILS Bulletins.
Protests may arise from entry procedures or entry eligibility; from scrutineering or equipment eligibility; orduring participation in the competition and/or breach of rules.

Competitor(s)/team lodging protest(please print):
Event:
Arena:
Lane/Heat/Lock-up:
Date/Time:
I/We formally protest against:

Competitor (signature):

Team Manager (signature):

For Official Use Only
Position of Official
Results of event announced at(determine exact time):
Verbal protest received by:Protest form received by:TimeInternational Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 2 – General Rules and Procedures

Decision:q Upheld (agree with protest)
q Dismissed (rule against protest)
q Referred to Appeals
q Referred to Disciplinary

Remarks:

Chief Referee (signature):
Time protest decision advised toCompetitor or Manager:
Protestor signature acknowledges
receipt of decision:
Appeals Form on other side

Page S2-35

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 2 – General Rules and Procedures

APPEAL FORM
Part 2: Appeals must be lodged in accordance with the ILS Competition Rule Book.
Decisions of the Appeals Committee are final.
Basis or explanation for appeal:

Page S2-36

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 2 – General Rules and Procedures

Page S2-37

For Official Use Only
Position of Official:
Verbal appeal received by:Appeal form received by:Appeal fee received by:Appeal fee returned (if applicable):
Appeal Chair name:
Decision:q Upheld (agree with protest)
q Dismissed (rule against protest)

Appeal Chair (signature):
Time appeal decision advised toCompetitor or Manager:
Appellant’s signature acknowledges
receipt of decision:
Remarks:Time:International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 2 – General Rules and Procedures

Page S2-38

WORLD RECORD APPLICATION FORM VERSION 2023
What

Reply

Type of Record
RecordName of the ILS Sanctioned
Competition
Please add the Sanctioning
Document.
Event
Gender£ Man£ Woman£ MixedAge Group£ Open£ Youth£ Masters Age group

Family Name of the Competitor
First Name(s) of the Competitor
Date of Birth (Year/Month/Day)//

Name of the Team
Names of the Relay Team Members Family NameFirst Name(names in order of competing)Date of Birth
Y/M/D

1.
2.
3.
4.
Country
Member Organisation
Record claimed (0’00”00 minutes)
Please add the official result

Date of Race
Time of Race (24h scale)
Venue: Country
Venue: City
Chief Referee Name
Chief Referee Signature
Date

Day:

Month:

Year:

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 2 – General Rules and Procedures

Page S2-39

Doping Control
External Sample Code
Please add the certificate
Note 1: The ILS does not recognise world records for any Masters team events, for the 100m Obstacles
event for Youth, Open and for Masters under 55 years of age, and mixed or single gender events in teamcategories except where conducted in those gender categories at Lifesaving World Championships.
Note 2: Masters world records set at any ILS LWC, World Games or ILS regional championships, ILS
sanctioned competition shall be recognised without a negative doping test certificate.
An interactive version of this form is available online at www.ilsf.org.
The completed form must be sent to the ILS Custodian of Records, Dr. Detlev Mohr PhD, e-mail:detlev.mohr@dlrg.de or to the Sport Commission of the ILS Region in accordance with the record rules.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 2 – General Rules and Procedures

Page S2-40

COMPETITION ORGANISATIONAL STRUCTURE – SCHEMATIC
DIAGRAMLIFESAVING FEDERATION / AUTHORITY

LOCAL ORGANISING COMMITTEE (LOC)

COMPETITION COMMITTEE (CC)SAFETYCOMMITTEE

LOC

EVENT

SAFETY &ILS SPORT

Representatives

ORGANISATIONEMERGENCY

COMMISSION

Representatives

Representatives

Representatives
And Chief Referee(s)Event Approvals

Admin

Volunteers

Registration

Competition
Services

Results

Site Logistics

Overall
ProgrammeWork Parties

Enquiries

Transport

Etc.

Sustenance,
Medals andPrizesSafety, Security
and Contingency
Plans

Chief Referees
Technical Officials
Appointments

Safety Operations

Briefings

Security Operations

Event Timetables

First Aid
Patrols,

Officials Recognition

Authorities
Etc.

Venue
Manager(s)Etc.
ATHLETES / TEAM MANAGERS / COACHESOTHER REGISTRATIONSAPPEALS
COMMITTEE

LiaisonEtc.

DISCIPLINARYCOMMITTEE

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 3 – Pool Events

World Water Safety

INTERNATIONAL LIFE SAVING FEDERATIONILS COMPETITION RULE BOOKSECTION 3
POOL EVENTS

2023 Edition(Effective 1 June 2023)

PageS3-1

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 3 – Pool Events

PageS3-2

SECTION 3
POOL EVENTSThe following pool events are described in this section:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
1.

Obstacle Swim – 200m and 100m
Manikin Carry – 50m
Rescue Medley – 100m
Manikin Carry with Fins – 100m
Manikin Tow with Fins – 100m
Super Lifesaver – 200m
Manikin Lifesaver Medley -100m
Line Throw – 12.5m
Manikin Relay – 4 x 25m
Obstacle Relay – 4 x 50m
Medley Relay – 4 x 50m
Pool Lifesaver Relay Mixed – 4 x 50m
Rescue Tow Relay – 4 x 50m
GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR POOL COMPETITIONTeam management and competitors are responsible for being familiar with the competition schedule,
and with the rules and procedures governing events.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.

G.
H.
I.
J.

K.
L.
M.
N.

Competitors may not be permitted to start in an event if they are late reporting to the marshallingarea (DQ3).
A competitor or team absent from the start of an event shall be disqualified (DQ4).
Only competitors and officials shall be allowed on the pool deck in the designated competitionarea. Competitors and officials must leave the designated competition area when not competingor officiating.
Unless specifically provided for in the rules, no artificial means of propulsion may be used incompetition (e.g., hand webs, arm bands).
The use of sticky, tacky or adhesive substances (liquid, solid or aerosol) on competitors’ hands
or feet, or applied to the surface of the manikin or rescue tube to improve grip, or to assist thecompetitor to push off the pool bottom, is not permitted in pool events (DQ7).
Body tape used for preventative, medical, therapeutic or kinesiology purposes is allowed at thediscretion of the Chief Referee as long as it does not provide a competitive advantage toimprove grip, grasping, or propulsion.
Note: The above means that, in general, tapes on the body (including limbs but not extremities)
may be acceptable. Further, in general tape is not permitted: - on multiple fingers (two or more
fingers taped together) as they may aid swimming and/or grip on a manikin: and - on a single
finger, if it improves manikin/equipment grasping and manikin carry.
Competitors shall not take assistance from the pool bottom except where specifically allowed(e.g., Obstacle Swim, surfacing with a manikin, 4 x 25m Manikin Relay, Super Lifesaver) (DQ8).
Taking assistance from any pool fittings (e.g., lane ropes, steps, drains or underwater hockey
fittings) is not permitted (DQ17, DQ24).
A competitor who interferes with another competitor during a race shall be disqualified (DQ2).
Unless otherwise specified in event rules, competitors must remain in their designated lane forthe entire race and, at the conclusion of the race; competitors shall remain in the water in theirlane until instructed to leave the pool (DQ9). Competitors must exit by the sides of the pool, notby the pool end over timing pads.
Competitors shall wear their club or national team swim caps in all events. Ocean event caps
or rubber or silicone caps may be worn.
Order-of-finish decisions, whether by Judges or automated timing equipment, are not subject
to protest or appeal.
Start decisions by the Event Director, Starter, or Chief Referee (or Chief Referee’s designate)
are not subject to protest or appeal.
The Chief Referee may permit a competitor or team to re-swim/run/throw a race due to provided
equipment failure or interference. The re-swim/run/throw time shall become the official time andinserted into the results.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 3 – Pool EventsO.

2.

Retrieving lost fins: Competitors may retrieve fins lost after the start and continue without
disqualification as long as the rules governing manikins are not violated (see S3-3 Manikins).
Competitors are not permitted to start again in another heat.

THE START
A.

B.

C.

2.1

PageS3-3

Prior to the start of each race, the Event Director or designated officials shall:•
Check that all technical officials are in position.
•
Check that competitors, manikin handlers and victims are properly attired and in correct
positions.
•
Check that all equipment is in a safe and correct position.
•
Notify competitors to remove all clothing except for swimwear and get ready to race.
When competitors and technical officials are ready for a legal start, a designated official shall:•
Signal the official start of each race with a long whistle indicating that the competitors
should take their position on the starting platform or, for the Manikin Relay event, enter
the water.
•
Signal the Starter (that the competitors are under the Starter’s control) with an
outstretched arm in the direction of the course.
Notwithstanding that the above procedure is undertaken officials are not responsible if acompetitor or team are not in attendance for the start of a race or are improperly attired i.e., noprotest or appeal is permitted by a competitor/team/handler on the above points.
Note 1: At the discretion of the Chief Referee, “over the top” starts may be used.
Note 2: See event description for start procedure for Line Throw (see S3-14).

Dive start procedure
At world championships, the one-start rule shall be used.
A.
B.
C.

2.2

On the long whistle, competitors step onto the starting platform and remain there.
On the Starter’s “Take your Marks” command, competitors immediately assume a starting
position with at least one foot at the front of the starting platform. When competitors are
stationary, the Starter gives the acoustic starting signal.
Competitors may start on the starting platform, or on the pool deck, or in the water with one
hand in contact with the starting wall/edge or starting block.

In-water start procedure
Refer to the individual event descriptions for the detailed start procedures for the Manikin Relay andLine Throw events that begin with an in-water start.

2.3

Disqualification
A.

B.
C.
D.

E.
F.

All competitors who start (i.e., commence a starting motion) before the starting signal has been
given, shall be disqualified (DQ10).
Competitors shall be disqualified if they “commence a forward starting motion” prior to thestarting signal. Movement by itself is not a disqualification. Anticipating the starting signal andcommencing a starting motion is a disqualification (DQ10).
The Event Director, Starter, and Chief Referee use their discretion in determining whether acompetitor – or more than one competitor – has commenced a starting motion. Commonly, theearly starting motion of one competitor causes movement by other competitors. Suchmovements are not a DQ.
If the starting signal sounds before the disqualification is declared, the race shall continue andthe competitor(s) shall be disqualified upon completion of the race (DQ10).
If the disqualification is declared before the starting signal, the signal shall not be given; theremaining competitors shall be called back and start again (DQ10).
The signal to call back the competitors shall be the same as the starting signal but repeatedalong with dropping of the false start rope. Alternatively, if the Chief Referee or Chief Referee's
designate decides that the start is not fair, the Chief Referee or Chief Referee's designate shallblow a whistle, to be followed by the Starter’s signal (repeated).
For the 100m Manikin Carry with Fins event, the call-back signal will be by an underwater
acoustic signal whenever possible. Competitors will be advised if an alternate call-back signal
is to be used.
If an error by an official follows a fault by a competitor, the fault of the competitor may be
expunged.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 3 – Pool Events

PageS3-4

Note 1: The duty of the Event Director, Chief Referee and Starter is to ensure a fair start. If the
Event Director, Starter, or Chief Referee decides that a start is not fair, for any reason, including
technical or equipment fault, the competitors shall be called back, and the race shall be started
again.
Note 2: Start decisions by the Event Director, Starter, or Chief Referee (or Chief Referee’s
designate) are not subject to protest or appeal.
3.

MANIKINS

3.1

Competitors surfacing the manikin
A.
B.

3.2

Competitors may push off the pool bottom when surfacing with the manikin.
Competitors must:•
Break the surface with the manikin.
•
Have the manikin in a correct carrying position when the top of the manikin’s head passes
the 5m line (Manikin Carry, Rescue Medley, Super Lifesaver) or 10m line (Manikin Carrywith Fins).
•
Not re-submerge after surfacing.
Note 1: The competitor must break the surface of the water while holding the manikin with atleast one hand before the designated 5/10m line. The competitor cannot swim underwater
beyond the designated 5/10m lines and must remain at the surface with the manikin throughout
the race beyond these lines.
Note 2: Surfacing the manikin judging criteria applies only when the top of the manikin’s headpasses the relevant 5/10m line.
Note 3: When judging the manikin carry, the competitor and manikin are treated as one
unit/entity. The judging focus is on the competitors’ actions, their carrying technique, and theposition of the manikin. Water flowing over the manikin is not a judging criterion.
Note 4: “Surface” means the horizontal plane of the surface of a still water pool.

Carrying the manikin
The manikin carry rules have been amended to improve fair judging of events by removing thedisqualification for the manikin being gripped or grasped by the throat (neck), mouth, nose, or eyes,
or carried with an arm over or around the throat (neck) of the manikin.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.

G.
H.

In events where the manikin is carried, the manikin (as victim) is presumed to be non-breathing.
Water over the face is not a judged criterion.
Competitors must carry the manikin with at least one hand (or arm) and must always be incontact with the manikin.
The manikin may not be “pushed” – a push is defined as the top of the manikin’s head being
forward of the competitor’s head.
Competitors must carry the manikin with the head of the manikin facing the direction of thecarry i.e., the manikin cannot be carried with the bottom of the manikin facing the direction of
the carry.
The manikin must not be gripped by the sealing plugs.
The competitor and manikin are considered to be one unit and, when in the carry position, either
must remain above the surface of the water.
Note 1: “Surface” means the horizontal plane of the surface of a still water pool.
Note 2: If the competitor and manikin are both fully “below the surface”, it is a disqualification.
However, there is no disqualification if the manikin is underwater and a competitor dips below
the surface of the water as part of their normal stroke or kick cycle provided that the competitor
breaks the surface throughout the race with some part of their body such as their head or arm.
Note 3: If the competitor and manikin are both below surface as the result of the competitor’s
final stroke/lunge to touch the turning or finish wall/edge or for a relay exchange, it shall not be
a disqualification.
Carrying the manikin judging criteria applies only when the top of the manikin’s head passes
the 5m or 10m line.
In the 5m start zone and in the changeover zones of the Manikin Relay, and the changeoverzone of the Lifesaver Relay event, competitors are not judged on carrying the manikin criteria.
However, competitors need to maintain contact with at least one hand with the manikin at all
times including during the manikin exchanges.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 3 – Pool Events

PageS3-5Note: As with all events, the standard “carrying the manikin” criteria (defined in this section)
applies to the final relay competitor at the finish of the Manikin Relay and Lifesaver Relay.
3.3

Towing the manikin
A.

B.
C.
D.

E.
F.

G.
H.

3.4

Manikin handlers
A.

B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
4.

In events where the manikin is towed, the manikin (as victim) is presumed to be breathing.
Before the tow, competitors must secure the manikin correctly within the 10m change-overzone. “Correctly” means the rescue tube is secured around the body and under both arms ofthe manikin and clipped to an O-ring.
Note: It is not a disqualification where the minimum pool depth allows the competitor to standwhile securing the manikin around the rescue tube.
Competitors may return back into the 10m change over zone to re-secure the manikin provided
the top of the manikin’s head has not passed the 10m line.
Competitors may swim on their back, side or front and may use any kick or stroke while towing
the manikin.
Beyond the 10m change-over zone, competitors must tow the manikin correctly secured withthe manikin face above the surface of the water.
Note: The manikin towing rules have been amended. The previous requirement to secure the
manikin under both arms at the 5m mark has been modified to securing the manikin within 10m
mark.
The line of the rescue tube must become fully extended by the time the top of the manikin’s
head passes the 10m line.
Competitors shall be disqualified if the rescue tube and manikin become separated.
Competitors shall not be disqualified if the rescue tube slips from under one arm of the Manikin
during the tow, provided that the rescue tube was “secured correctly” at the 10m line and theface of the manikin remains above the water surface.
Competitors shall be disqualified if the line of the rescue tube is or becomes wrapped aroundthe Manikin as it is deemed to be shortening of the line.
Competitors shall not be disqualified if the manikin rotates in the rescue tube as long as the
manikin’s face remains above the surface of the water. In addition, the manikin does not need
to be carried head first provided it was secured correctly at the 10m line and the manikin’s faceremains above the surface of the water.
Note: The manikin towing rules have been amended from the previous rules to remove thedisqualification for a manikin rotating within the rescue tube provided that the face remains
above the surface of the water.
A member of the competitor’s team assists as manikin handler in the Manikin Tow with Fins,
the Super Lifesaver, and the Manikin Lifesaver Medley events. With the Chief Referee’s
approval, non-team members may act as handlers, provided they are registered in thecompetition in some capacity.
Manikin handlers must wear a competition cap.
For the handover, the manikin handler, using at least one hand, positions and holds the manikin
upright and facing the turning wall floating at its natural buoyancy position anywhere within theallotted lane.
The manikin handler may let go of the manikin after the competitor has touched the turning wallbut must release contact with it immediately the competitor has deliberately made contact withthe manikin to secure it for the tow.
Make every effort to ensure that any part of their person, the manikin they are holding, and/or
any water movement they cause, does not impede any other competitor in the race (otherwise
disqualification of their competitor may result).
Manikin handlers may not intentionally enter the water during the event.
Comply with all race instructions of officials.

SEEDING
A.
B.
C.
D.

Seeding shall be used.
For pool events, competitors’ times are required to be submitted for both individual and teamevents. Competitors and teams shall be ranked according to the entry times.
Competitors for whom no times are submitted shall be considered to have the slowest times.
Placement of competitors with identical times and placement of those without times shall be
determined by draw.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 3 – Pool Events

4.1

PageS3-6

Seeding in heats
Where events are conducted as heats and finals (according to the entries received), competitors
shall be seeded in heats according to submitted times in the following manner:
A.
B.
C.

D.

E.

4.2

If one heat:
It shall be seeded as a final and swum during the final session.
If two heats:
The fastest competitor shall be seeded in the second heat, next fastest in the first heat, next
fastest in the second heat, next in the first heat, etc.
If three heats:
The fastest swimmer shall be placed in the third heat, next fastest in the second, next fastest
in the first. The fourth fastest shall be placed in the third heat, the fifth in the second heat, andthe sixth fastest in the first heat, the seventh fastest in the third heat, etc.
If four or more heats:
The last three heats of the event shall be seeded in accordance with point C above. The heatpreceding the last three heats shall consist of the next fastest competitors; the heat preceding
the last four heats shall consist of the next fastest competitors, etc. Lanes shall be assigned indescending order of submitted times within each heat, in accordance with the pattern outlinedin Assignment of lanes below.
Exception:
When there are two or more heats in an event, there shall be a minimum of three competitors
seeded into any one preliminary heat.

Seeding in time-finals
Where events are conducted as time-finals, competitors shall be seeded into heats according tosubmitted times in the following manner:
A.
B.

4.3

If one heat
It shall be seeded as a final.
If two or more heats
The fastest competitors shall be seeded in the last heat according to assignment of lanes
detailed in the next section, the next fastest competitors into the second last heat, and so on
until all competitors have been allocated a heat and lane according to submitted times.

Assignment of lanes
Lanes shall be assigned by placing the fastest competitor or team in lane four of an eight-lane pool.
(Lane one is on the right side of the pool viewed from the starting end.) The competitor having thenext fastest time is placed on the left of the fastest, then alternating other competitors to right andleft in accordance with the submitted times. Competitors with identical times shall be assigned lane
positions by draw within the aforesaid pattern.

4.4

Seeding in finals
Starting positions for pool events shall be by seeding as follows:
A.
B.

C.
D.

Based on the times established in heats, competitors with the top eight times shall be assigned
lanes in the A-final. Competitors with the ninth through sixteenth top times shall be assigned
lanes in the B-final.
In the event that competitors from the same or different heats have equal times registered to
1/100 second for either the eighth place or sixteenth place, there shall be a swim-off todetermine which swimmer shall advance to the appropriate finals. Such swim-off shall takeplace not less than one hour after all involved competitors have completed their heat (unlessaffected competitors agree to a shorter time interval). Another swim-off will take place if equal
times are registered again.
Competitors or teams who withdraw or do not start (DNS) in an A or B final shall not earn any
points to their team’s point score (i.e., zero points are scored for a “no show”).
Where one or more competitors or teams withdraw from an A-final, competitors shall be called
forward from the B-final, alternate competitors up to a maximum of four competitors shall becalled forward from the heats. Should insufficient reserves be on standby the B final shallprogress with those who have marshalled. If there is sufficient time both finals will be re-seeded
based on heat times.
Note: In pool events, reserves shall be determined based on heat times.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 3 – Pool Events

5.

PageS3-7

TIMEKEEPING AND DETERMINATION OF PLACING
Automatic officiating equipment should be used for all pool events to record the time of eachcompetitor and to determine the place of each competitor.

5.1

Automatic officiating equipment
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.

5.2.

Manual time keeping and officiating
A.

B.
C.
D.

6.

Any equipment installed must not interfere with competitors’ start and turns. The automatic
officiating equipment must be activated by the Starter and must provide easy digital readingsof competitors’ times.
Times recorded by automatic officiating equipment shall be used to determine the winner andall placings, and the time applicable to each lane. Results shall be recorded to 1/100 of asecond.
The placing and times determined by automatic officiating equipment shall have precedence
over the decision of Judges and timekeepers. This includes the back-up stops (buttons orplungers) to be operated by the timekeepers.
In addition to the electronic timekeeping, a minimum of two timekeepers per lane are required.
These timekeepers may operate both the back-up stops (buttons or plungers) and separate(manual) stopwatches.
If the electronic equipment fails, and/or a competitor’s touch is not registered with the back-up
stops (buttons or plungers) the following will apply using the manual stopwatches:•With three timekeepers, where two of them have the same time, this time shall beconsidered official. If the three timekeepers differ, the middle time shall be official. If one
watch fails, the average of the other two times shall constitute the competitor’s official
time.
•With two timekeepers, where they have the same time, this time shall be considered
official. If the two timekeepers differ, the average of the two times shall be official. If one
watch fails, the remaining time shall constitute the competitor’s official time.
•
If the order of finish indicated by the times recorded by manual timekeepers does notcoincide with the order of finish determined by the Finish Judges, the Finish Judges’
placings prevail.
•The times assigned to the competitors involved shall be identical. For example, if twocompetitors are involved, the times assigned shall be the time of the competitor whosetime is recorded correctly by the automatic equipment. Otherwise, if there is no correctly
recorded time by the automatic equipment, the times assigned shall be the sum of theirindividual times recorded divided by the number of separate stopwatches of the involved
competitors.
In ILS-sanctioned lifesaving competitions where automatic officiating equipment is unavailable,
the time of each competitor must be recorded by three timekeepers. There shall be two
additional timekeepers designated, either of whom shall be directed to replace a timekeeper
whose watch did not start or stopped during an event, or who for any other reason is not able
to record the time.
Watches are started when the starting signal is given and stopped when the competitor touches(clearly visible to the timekeeper) the finish wall/edge with any part of the competitor's body.
With three timekeepers, where two of them have the same time, this time shall be considered
official. If the three timekeepers differ, the middle time shall be official. If one watch fails, theaverage of the other two times shall constitute the competitor’s official time.
If the order of finish indicated by the times recorded by manual timekeepers does not coincidewith the order of finish determined by the Finish Judges, the Finish Judges placings prevail.
The times assigned to the competitors involved shall be identical. For example, if twocompetitors are involved, the times assigned shall be the sum of their individual times divided
by two.

TECHNICAL OFFICIALS
A.
B.
C.

Technical Officials ensure that events operate fairly and within ILS rules and procedures.
Technical Officials also assess whether competitors’ technique complies with specific event
rules.
Technical Officials must be positioned to ensure they have a clear view of the lane they are
judging.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 3 – Pool Events

7.

PageS3-8

OBSTACLE SWIM (200M AND 100M)

FIGURE 1: OBSTACLE SWIM (200M AND 100M)
7.1.

Event description – 200m
With a dive start on an acoustic signal, the competitor swims the 200m course passing eight times
under the immersed obstacles to touch the finish wall/edge of the pool.
A.
B.
C.

7.2.

Competitors must break the surface of the water after the dive entry before the first obstacle;
after passing under each obstacle; and after a turn prior to passing under an obstacle.
Competitors may push off the pool bottom when surfacing from under each of the obstacles.
“Surfacing” means the competitor’s head breaks the plane of the surface of the water.
Swimming into or otherwise bumping an obstacle is not a behaviour that results in
disqualification.

Event description – 100m
With a dive start on an acoustic signal, the competitor swims the 100m course passing four times
under the immersed obstacles to touch the finish wall/edge of the pool.
A.
B.
C.

7.3.

Competitors must surface after the dive entry before the first obstacle; after passing under eachobstacle; and after a turn prior to passing under an obstacle.
Competitors may push off the pool bottom when surfacing from under each of the obstacles.
Surfacing” means the competitor’s head breaks the plane of the surface of the water.
Swimming into or otherwise bumping an obstacle is not a behaviour that results in
disqualification.

Equipment
Obstacles: See Section 8.
Obstacles are fixed at right angles onto lane ropes in a straight line across all lanes. The first obstacle
is located 12.5m from the start wall, with the second obstacle located 12.5m from the opposite end.
The distance between the two obstacles is 25m.

7.4.

Disqualification
In addition to Section 2 and those rules outlined in S3-1 to S3-2, the following behaviour shall resultin disqualification:
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.

Passing over an obstacle without immediately returning over or under that obstacle and thenpassing under it (DQ11).
Failure to surface after the dive entry or after a turn before passing under an obstacle (DQ12).
Failure to surface after each obstacle (DQ13).
Taking assistance from any pool fitting (e.g., lane rope, steps, drains or underwater hockey
fittings) when surfacing – not including the bottom of the pool (DQ17).
Failure to touch the wall/edge during the turn (DQ14).
Failure to touch the finish wall/edge (DQ15).

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 3 – Pool Events

8.

PageS3-9

MANIKIN CARRY (50M)

FIGURE 2: MANIKIN CARRY (50M)
8.1.

Event description
With a dive start on an acoustic signal, the competitor swims 25m freestyle and then dives to recovera submerged manikin. Competitors must break the surface of the water after the dive entry andbefore recovering the manikin. The competitor surfaces the manikin within the 5m pick-up zone andcarries it to the finish wall/edge of the pool.
Competitors may push off the pool bottom when surfacing with the manikin.
The event is complete when the competitor touches the finish wall/edge of the pool.

8.2.

Equipment
A.
B.
C.
D.

8.3.

Manikin: See Section 8.
The manikin is completely filled with water and sealed for the event. Competitors must use the
manikins supplied by organisers.
Positioning the manikin: The manikin is located at a depth between 1.8 m and 3 m. In water
deeper than 3 m, the manikin shall be placed on a platform (or other suitable support) to position
it at the required depth.
The manikin is positioned on its back, the head in the direction of the finish, with the top of thetransverse line on the 25m line.
Surfacing the manikin: Competitors must have the manikin in the correct carrying position
before the top of the manikin’s head passes the 5m line.

Disqualification
In addition to Section 2 and those rules outlined in S3-1 to S3-3, the following behaviour shall resultin disqualification:
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.

Not surfacing before diving to the manikin (DQ16).
Taking assistance from any pool fitting (e.g., lane rope, steps, drains or underwater hockey
fittings) when surfacing with the manikin – not including the bottom of the pool (DQ17).
Not having the manikin in the correct carrying position before the top of the manikin’s headpasses the 5m line (DQ18).
Using an incorrect carrying technique as described in S3-3 Manikins (DQ19).
Releasing the manikin before touching the finish wall/edge (DQ21).
Failure to touch the finish wall/edge (DQ15).

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 3 – Pool Events

9.

PageS3-10

RESCUE MEDLEY (100M)

FIGURE 3: RESCUE MEDLEY (100M).
9.1.

Event description
With a dive start on an acoustic signal, the competitor swims 50m freestyle to turn, dive, and swim
underwater to a submerged manikin located at 17.5m from the turning wall.
The competitor surfaces the manikin within the 5m pick-up line, and then carries it the remaining
distance to touch the finish wall/edge.
Competitors may breathe during the turn, but not after their feet leave the turning wall/edge until they
surface with the manikin.
Competitors may push off the bottom when surfacing with the manikin.

9.2.

Equipment
A.
B.

C.
9.3.

Manikin: See Section 8. The manikin is completely filled with water and sealed for the event.
Competitors must use the manikins supplied by organisers.
Positioning the manikin:•
The manikin is positioned at a depth between 1.8 m and 3 m. In water deeper than 3 m,
the manikin shall be placed on a platform (or other suitable support) to position it at therequired depth.
•
The manikin is positioned on its back, head in the direction of the finish, with the top of
the transverse line on the 17.5m line.
Surfacing the manikin: Competitors must have the manikin in the correct carrying position
before the top of the manikin’s head passes the 5m line.

Disqualification
In addition to Section 2 and those rules outlined in S3-1 to S3-3, the following behaviour shall resultin disqualification:
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.

Surfacing after turning and before lifting the manikin (DQ22).
Taking assistance from any pool fitting (e.g., lane rope, steps, drains or underwater hockey
fittings) when surfacing with the manikin – not including the bottom of the pool (DQ17).
Not having the manikin in the correct carrying position before the top of the manikin’s headpasses the 5m line (DQ18).
Using an incorrect carrying technique as described in S3-3 Manikins (DQ19).
Releasing the manikin before touching the finish wall/edge (DQ21).
Failure to touch the finish wall/edge (DQ15).

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 3 – Pool Events

10.

PageS3-11

MANIKIN CARRY WITH FINS (100M)

FIGURE 4: MANIKIN CARRY WITH FINS (100M).
10.1.

Event description
With a dive start on an acoustic signal, the competitor swims 50m freestyle wearing fins and thenrecovers a submerged manikin to the surface within 10m of the turning wall. The competitor carries
the manikin to touch the finish wall/edge of the pool.
Competitors need not surface before touching the manikin.
Competitors do need not touch the turning wall/edge of the pool.
Competitors may push off the bottom when surfacing with the manikin.

10.2.

Equipment
A.
B.

C.
D.

10.3.

Manikins, fins: See Section 8. The manikin is completely filled with water and sealed for the
event. Competitors must use the manikins supplied by organisers.
Positioning the manikin: The manikin is located at a depth between 1.8m and 3m. In water
deeper than 3m, the manikin shall be placed on a platform (or other suitable support) to position
it at the required depth.
The manikin is positioned on its back in contact with the pool bottom and its base touching thepool wall, with its head in the direction of the finish.
Where the facility design does not provide a vertical wall that joins the bottom at 90 degrees,
the manikin must be positioned as close as possible to the wall, but no further than 300mm
from the wall as measured at the water surface.
Surfacing the manikin: Competitors must have the manikin in the correct carrying position
before the top of the manikin’s head passes the 10m line.
Retrieving lost fins: Competitors may retrieve fins lost after the start and continue without
disqualification as long as the rules governing manikins are not violated (see 3.3 Manikins).
Competitors are not permitted to start again in another heat.

Disqualification
In addition to Section 2 and those rules outlined in S3-1 to S3-3, the following behaviour shall resultin disqualification:
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.

Taking assistance from any pool fitting (e.g., lane rope, steps, drains or underwater hockey
fittings) when surfacing with the manikin – not including the bottom of the pool (DQ17).
Not having the manikin in the correct carrying position before the top of the manikin’s headpasses the 10m line (DQ23).
Using an incorrect carrying technique as described in S3-3 Manikins (DQ19).
Releasing the manikin before touching the finish wall/edge (DQ21).
Failure to touch the finish wall/edge (DQ15).

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 3 – Pool Events

11.

PageS3-12

MANIKIN TOW WITH FINS (100M)

FIGURE 5: MANIKIN TOW WITH FINS (100M).
11.1.

Event description
With a dive start on an acoustic signal, the competitor swims 50m freestyle with fins and rescue tube.
After touching the turning wall/edge, and within the 10m change-over zone, the competitor fixes the
rescue tube correctly around a manikin and tows it to the finish. The event is complete when thecompetitor touches the finish wall/edge of the pool.
Competitors need not surface before touching the turning wall/edge.

11.2.

Equipment
A.
B.

C.

D.

E.

F.
G.

Manikin, fins, rescue tube: See Section 8. Competitors must use the manikins and rescue tubes
supplied by organisers. The manikin is filled with water and sealed so that it floats with the topof its transverse line at the surface.
Positioning the manikin: A member of the competitor’s team assists as manikin handler. For
the handover, the manikin handler, using at least one hand, positions and holds the manikin
upright, facing the turning wall, and floating at its natural buoyancy position anywhere within
the allotted lane.
The manikin handler may let go of the manikin after the competitor has touched the turning wallbut must release contact with it immediately the competitor has deliberately made contact withthe manikin to secure it for the tow.
The manikin handler may not push the manikin toward the competitor or the finish wall.
Manikin handlers may not intentionally enter the water during the event.
With the Chief Referee’s approval, non-team members may act as handlers, provided they are
registered in the competition in some capacity. Manikin handlers must wear a competition cap.
Starts with rescue tubes: At the start, the rescue tube and rescue tube line may be positioned
at the competitor’s discretion, but within the competitor’s allotted lane. Competitors should
ensure a safe and correct position of rescue tube and line. The rescue tube remains unclipped
until secured around the manikin.
Wearing rescue tubes: Rescue tubes must be donned correctly, either with the loop over one
or two shoulders, or over the shoulder and across the chest – at the competitor’s discretion.
Assuming the rescue tube was donned correctly, there is no cause for disqualification if theloop falls down on the competitor’s arm or elbow during the competitor’s approach to the
manikin or during the manikin tow.
Securing the manikin: After first touching the turning wall/edge, the competitor then secures the
manikin correctly with the rescue tube around the body and under both arms of the manikin,and clipped to an O-ring, within the 10m change-over zone. Competitors may go back into the
10m change over zone to re-secure the manikin provided the top of the manikin’s head has notpassed the 10m line.
Note: Unintentionally touching the manikin before touching the turning wall/edge is not adisqualification.
Towing the manikin: Competitors must tow the manikin as detailed in the general conditions forpool competition. The rescue tube must be attached to the manikin and the line of the rescue
tube must be fully extended by the time the top of the manikin’s head passes the 10m line.
Competitors shall be disqualified if the rescue tube and manikin become separated.
Competitors shall not be disqualified if the rescue tube slips from under one arm of the Manikin
during the tow, provided that the rescue tube was “secured correctly” at the 10m line and theface of the manikin remains above the water surface.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 3 – Pool Events

H.
I.

J.
K.

11.3.

PageS3-13

Competitors shall be disqualified if the line of the rescue tube is or becomes wrapped aroundthe Manikin as it is deemed to be shortening of the line.
Competitors shall not be disqualified if the manikin rotates in the rescue tube as long as the
manikin’s face remains above the surface of the water. The manikin does not need to be carriedheadfirst provided it was secured correctly at the 10m line and the manikin’s face remains
above the surface of the water.
Retrieving lost fins: Competitors may retrieve fins lost after the start and continue without
disqualification as long as the rules governing manikins are not violated (see S3-3 Manikins).
Competitors are not permitted to start again in another heat.
Rescue Tube Defect: If in the opinion of the Chief Referee the rescue tube, line and/or harness(belt) presents a technical defect during the race, the Chief Referee may allow the competitor
to start again in another heat but only if the rescue tubes for the event were supplied by theorganising body and the rules required that the provided tubes must be used by all competitors.

Disqualification
In addition to Section 2 and those rules outlined in S3-1 to S3-4, the following behaviour shall resultin disqualification:
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
O.
P.

Taking assistance from any pool fitting (e.g., lane rope, steps, underwater hockey fittings) whenfixing the rescue tube around the manikin except where the minimum pool depth allows thecompetitor to stand while securing the rescue tube around the manikin. (DQ24).
Competitor clipping the rescue tube into the ring before touching the turning wall/edge. (DQ30)
Manikin handler not releasing the manikin immediately after the competitor makes deliberatecontact with the manikin (after first touching the turning wall/edge) (DQ27).
Manikin handler pushing the manikin towards the competitor or the finish wall/edge (DQ28).
Manikin handler positioning the manikin incorrectly or making deliberate contact with the
manikin after the competitor has grasped the manikin (DQ25).
Manikin handler intentionally entering the water during the event or entering the water andinterfering with the performance of another competitor or interfering with the judging of the event(DQ29).
At 50m, the competitor not touching the pool wall/edge before intentionally touching the manikin(DQ26).
Incorrectly securing the rescue tube around the manikin (i.e., not around body and under botharms and not clipped to an O-ring) (DQ31).
Not securing the rescue tube around the manikin within the 10m change-over zone, judged at
the top of the manikin’s head (DQ32).
The line of the rescue tube not becoming fully extended before the top of the manikin’s headpasses the 10m line (DQ34).
Not towing the manikin with the line of the rescue tube fully extended beyond the 10m (DQ35).
Towing the manikin with the face below the surface (DQ20).
Pushing or carrying, instead of towing, the manikin (DQ33).
The rescue tube and manikin become separated after the rescue tube has been secured
correctly around the manikin (DQ36).
Touching the finish wall/edge without the rescue tube and manikin in place (DQ37).
Failure to touch the finish wall/edge (DQ15).

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 3 – Pool Events

12.

PageS3-14

SUPER LIFESAVER (200M)

FIGURE 6: SUPER LIFESAVER (200M).
12.1.

Event description
With a dive start on an acoustic signal, the competitor swims 75m freestyle and then dives to recovera submerged manikin. The competitor surfaces the manikin within the 5m pick-up zone and carries
it to the turning wall/edge. After touching the wall/edge, the competitor releases the manikin.
In the water, the competitor puts on fins and rescue tube and swims 50m freestyle. After touching
the wall/edge, and within the 10m change-over zone, the competitor fixes the rescue tube correctly
around a manikin and tows it to the finish.
The event is complete when the competitor touches the finish wall/edge of the pool.

12.2.

Equipment
A.

B.
C.

D.

E.
F.

G.

Manikins, fins, rescue tubes: See Section 8. Competitors must use the manikins and rescue
tubes supplied by organisers. The first manikin that is used for the carry is completely filled withwater and sealed for the event. The second manikin that is used for the tow is filled with waterand sealed so that it floats with the top of its transverse line at the surface.
Placement of fins and rescue tubes: Prior to the start, competitors must place the fins andrescue tube on the pool deck – not the starting block/podium – within the confines of theirallotted lane.
Positioning the manikin for the carry: The manikin is located at a depth between 1.8m and 3m.
In water deeper than 3m, the manikin shall be placed on a platform (or other support) to position
it at the required depth.
The manikin is positioned on its back, head in the direction of the finish with the top of thetransverse line on the 25m line.
Surfacing the first manikin: Competitors may push off the bottom of the pool when surfacingwith the manikin.
Competitors must have the manikin in the correct carrying position before the top of the
manikin’s head passes the 5m line.
Donning tube and fins: After first touching the turning wall/edge, the competitor discards thefirst manikin. In the water, the competitor dons fins and rescue tube and swims 50m freestyle.
Wearing rescue tubes: Rescue tubes must be donned correctly, either with the loop over one
or two shoulders, or over the shoulder and across the chest – at the competitor’s discretion.
Assuming the rescue tube was donned correctly, there is no cause for disqualification if theloop falls down on the competitor’s arm or elbow during the competitor’s approach to the
manikin or during the manikin tow.
The rescue tube remains unclipped until secured around the manikin.
Positioning the manikin for the tow: A member of the competitor’s team assists as manikin
handler. For the handover, the manikin handler, using at least one hand, positions and holds
the manikin upright, facing the turning wall, and floating at its natural buoyancy position
anywhere within the allotted lane.
The manikin handler may let go of the manikin after the competitor has touched the turning wallbut must release contact with it immediately the competitor has deliberately made contact withthe manikin to secure it for the tow.
With the Chief Referee’s approval, non-team members may act as handlers, provided they are
registered in the competition in some capacity. Manikin handlers must wear a competition cap.
The handler may not push the manikin toward the competitor or the finish wall.
Manikin handlers may not intentionally enter the water during the event.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 3 – Pool Events

H.

I.
J.

K.
L.

M.
N.

12.3.

PageS3-15

Securing the manikin: After first touching the turning wall/edge, the competitor then secures the
manikin correctly with the rescue tube around the body and under both arms of the manikin,and clipped to an O-ring, within the 10m change-over zone. Competitors may go back into the
10m change over zone to re-secure the manikin provided the top of the manikin’s head has notpassed the 10m line.
Note: Unintentionally touching the manikin before touching the turning wall/edge is not adisqualification.
Competitors must tow the manikin as detailed in the general conditions for pool competition.
The rescue tube must be attached to the manikin and the line of the rescue tube must be fully
extended by the time the top of the manikin’s head passes the 10m line.
Competitors shall be disqualified if the rescue tube and manikin become separated.
Competitors shall not be disqualified if the rescue tube slips during the tow, provided that the
rescue tube was “secured correctly” at the 10m line and that the face of the manikin remains
above the water surface.
Competitors shall be disqualified if the line of the rescue tube is or becomes wrapped aroundthe Manikin as it is deemed to be shortening of the line
Competitors shall not be disqualified if the manikin rotates in the rescue tube as long as the
manikin’s face remains above the surface of the water. The manikin does not need to be carriedheadfirst provided it was secured correctly at the 10m line and the manikin’s face remains
above the surface of the water.
Retrieving lost fins: Competitors may retrieve fins lost after the start and continue without
disqualification as long as the rules governing manikins are not violated (see S3-3 Manikins).
Competitors are not permitted to start again in another heat.
Rescue Tube Defect: If in the opinion of the Chief Referee the rescue tube, line and/or harness(belt) presents a technical defect during the race, the Chief Referee may allow the competitor
to start again in another heat but only if the rescue tubes for the event were supplied by theorganising body and the rules required that the provided tubes must be used by all competitors.

Disqualification
In addition to Section 2 and those rules outlined in S3-1 to S3-4, the following behaviour shall resultin disqualification:
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
O.

Taking assistance from any pool fitting (e.g., lane rope, steps, drains or underwater hockey
fittings) – not including the bottom of the pool when surfacing the manikin (DQ17).
Not having the manikin in the correct carrying position before the top of the manikin’s headpasses the 5m pick-up zone (DQ18).
Using an incorrect carrying technique as described in S3-3 Manikins. (DQ19).
Releasing the manikin before touching the turning wall/edge. (DQ21).
Taking assistance from any pool fitting (e.g., lane rope, steps, underwater hockey fittings) whenfixing the rescue tube around the manikin except where the minimum pool depth allows thecompetitor to stand while securing the rescue tube around the manikin (DQ24).
Competitor clipping the rescue tube into the ring before touching the turning wall/edge. (DQ30).
Manikin handler not releasing the manikin immediately after the competitor makes deliberatecontact with the manikin (after first touching the turning wall/edge) (DQ27).
Manikin handler pushing the manikin towards the competitor or the finish wall (DQ28).
Manikin handler positioning the manikin incorrectly or making deliberate contact with the
manikin after the competitor has grasped the manikin (DQ25).
Manikin handler intentionally entering the water during the event or entering the water andinterfering with the performance of another competitor or interfering with the judging of the event(DQ29).
At 150m, the competitor not touching the pool wall/edge before intentionally touching the
manikin (DQ26).
Incorrect securing of the rescue tube around the manikin (i.e., not around body and under botharms and not clipped to an O-ring) (DQ31).
Not securing the rescue tube around the manikin within the 10m change-over zone judged at
the top of the manikin’s head (DQ32).
The line of the rescue tube not becoming fully extended before the top of the manikin’s headpasses the 10m line (DQ34).
Not towing the manikin with the line of the rescue tube fully extended beyond the 10m line
(DQ35).

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 3 – Pool Events

P.
Q.
R.
S.
T.

PageS3-16

Towing the manikin with the face below the surface (DQ20).
Pushing or carrying, instead of towing, the manikin (DQ33).
The rescue tube and manikin become separated after the rescue tube has been secured
correctly around the manikin (DQ36).
Touching the finish wall/edge without the rescue tube and manikin in place (DQ37).
Failure to touch the finish wall/edge (DQ15).

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 3 – Pool Events

13.

PageS3-17

MANIKIN LIFESAVER MEDLEY (100M)

FIGURE 7: MANIKIN LIFESAVER MEDLEY (100M)
13.1.

Event description
With a dive start on an acoustic signal, the competitor swims 25m freestyle and then dives to recovera submerged manikin. Competitors must break the surface of the water after the dive entry andbefore recovering the first manikin. The competitor surfaces the manikin within the 5m pick-up zone
and carries it to the turning wall/edge of the pool. Competitors may push off the pool bottom whensurfacing with the manikin. After touching the wall/edge, the competitor releases this manikin.
In the water, the competitor puts on fins and rescue tube and within the 10m change-over zone, thecompetitor fixes the rescue tube correctly around a second manikin and tows it to the finish.
The event is complete when the competitor touches the finish wall/edge of the pool.

13.2.

Equipment
A.

B.
C.

D.
E.
F.

G.

Manikins, fins, rescue tubes: See Section 8. Competitors must use the manikins and rescue
tubes supplied by organisers. The first manikin that is used for the carry is completely filled withwater and sealed for the event. The second manikin that is used for the tow is filled with waterand sealed so that it floats with the top of its transverse line at the surface.
Placement of fins and rescue tubes: Prior to the start, the manikin handler must place the finsand rescue tube on the pool deck at the 50m turning edge – not the starting block/podium –within the confines of their competitor’s allotted lane.
Positioning the manikin for the carry: The manikin is completely filled with water and sealed forthe event. The manikin is located at a depth between 1.8 m and 3 m. In water deeper than 3m,
the manikin shall be placed on a platform (or other support) to position it at the required depth.
The manikin is positioned on its back, head in the direction of the turning wall with the top of
the transverse line on the 25m line.
Surfacing the first manikin: The competitor may push off the bottom of the pool when surfacingwith the manikin.
Carry: The competitor must have the manikin in the correct carrying position before the top of
the manikin’s head passes the 5m line. The competitor then carries the manikin as detailed in
the general conditions for pool competition to the turn edge/wall.
Positioning the manikin for the tow: A member of the competitor’s team assists as manikin
handler. For the handover, the manikin handler, using at least one hand, positions and holds
the manikin upright, facing the turning wall, and floating at its natural buoyancy position
anywhere within the allotted lane.
The manikin handler may let go of the manikin after the competitor has touched the turning wallbut must release contact with it immediately the competitor has deliberately made contact withthe manikin to secure it for the tow.
With the Chief Referee’s approval, non-team members may act as handlers, provided they are
registered in the competition in some capacity. Manikin handlers must wear a competition cap.
The handler may not push the manikin towards the competitor or the finish wall.
Manikin handlers may not intentionally enter the water during the event.
Second Manikin: After first touching the turning wall/edge and discarding the first manikin, thecompetitor dons their fins and rescue tube, and then grasps the second manikin.
Note: Unintentionally touching the second manikin before touching the turning wall/edge is nota disqualification.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 3 – Pool Events

H.

I.

J.
K.

L.
M.

N.
O.

13.3.

PageS3-18

Securing the second manikin: The competitor must secure the manikin correctly with the rescue
tube around the body and under both arms of the manikin, and clipped to an O-ring, within the
10m change-over zone. Competitors may go back into the 10m change over zone to re-secure
the manikin provided the manikin’s head has not passed the 10m line.
Wearing rescue tubes: Rescue tubes must be donned correctly, either with the loop over one
or two shoulders, or over the shoulder and across the chest – at the competitor’s discretion.
Assuming the rescue tube was donned correctly, there is no cause for disqualification if theloop falls down on the competitor’s arm or elbow during the competitor’s manikin tow.
Competitors must tow the manikin as detailed in the general conditions for pool competition.
The rescue tube must be attached to the manikin and the line of the rescue tube must be fully
extended by the time the top of the manikin’s head passes the 10m line.
Competitors shall be disqualified if the rescue tube and manikin become separated.
Competitors shall not be disqualified if the rescue tube slips during the tow, provided that the
rescue tube was “secured correctly” at the 10m line and that the face of the manikin remains
above the water surface.
Competitors shall be disqualified if the line of the rescue tube is or becomes wrapped aroundthe manikin as it is deemed to be shortening of the line.
Competitors shall not be disqualified if the manikin rotates in the rescue tube as long as the
manikin’s face remains above the surface of the water. The manikin does not need to be carriedheadfirst provided it was secured correctly at the 10m line and the manikin’s face remains
above the surface of the water.
Retrieving lost fins: Competitors may retrieve fins lost after the start and continue without
disqualification as long as the rules governing manikins are not violated (see S3-3 Manikins).
Competitors are not permitted to start again in another heat.
Rescue Tube Defect: If in the opinion of the Chief Referee the rescue tube, line and/or harness(belt) presents a technical defect during the race, the Chief Referee may allow the competitor
to start again in another heat but only if the rescue tubes for the event were supplied by theorganising body and the rules required that the provided tubes must be used by all competitors.

Disqualification
In addition to Section 2 and those rules outlined in S3-1 to S3-4, the following behaviour shall resultin disqualification:
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.

Not surfacing before diving to the first manikin (DQ16).
Taking assistance from any pool fitting (e.g., lane rope, steps, drains or underwater hockey
fittings) – not including the bottom of the pool when surfacing the manikin (DQ17).
Not having the manikin in the correct carrying position before the top of the manikin’s headpasses the 5m pick-up zone (DQ18).
Using an incorrect carrying technique as described in S3-3 Manikins (DQ19).
Releasing the first manikin before touching the turning wall/edge (DQ21).
Taking assistance from any pool fitting (e.g., lane rope, steps, underwater hockey fittings) whenfixing the rescue tube around the second manikin except where the minimum pool depth allows
the competitor to stand while securing the rescue tube around the manikin (DQ24).
Competitor clipping the rescue tube into the ring before touching the turning wall/edge. (DQ30).
Manikin handler not releasing the manikin immediately after the competitor makes deliberatecontact with the manikin (after first touching the turning wall/edge and donning their fins)(DQ27).
Manikin handler pushing the manikin towards the competitor or the finish wall (DQ28).
Manikin handler positioning the manikin incorrectly or making deliberate contact with the
manikin after the competitor has grasped the manikin (DQ25).
Manikin handler intentionally entering the water during the event or entering the water andinterfering with the performance of another competitor or interfering with the judging of the event(DQ29).
At 50m, the competitor not touching the pool wall/edge before intentionally touching the manikin(DQ26).
Incorrect securing of the rescue tube around the manikin (i.e., not around body and under botharms and not clipped to an O-ring) (DQ31).
Not securing the rescue tube around the manikin within the 10m change-over zone judged at
the top of the manikin’s head (DQ32).

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 3 – Pool Events

O.
P.
Q.
R.
S.
T.
U.

PageS3-19

The line of the rescue tube not becoming fully extended before the top of the manikin’s headpasses the 10m line (DQ34).
Not towing the manikin with the line of the rescue tube fully extended beyond the 10m line
(DQ35).
Towing the manikin with the face below the surface (DQ20).
Pushing or carrying, instead of towing, the manikin (DQ33).
The rescue tube and manikin become separated after the rescue tube has been secured
correctly around the manikin (DQ36).
Touching the finish wall/edge without the rescue tube and manikin in place (DQ37).
Failure to touch the finish wall/edge (DQ15).

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 3 – Pool Events

14.

PageS3-20

LINE THROW (12.5M)

FIGURE 8: LINE THROW (12.5M).
14.1.

Even description
In this 45-second event, the competitor throws an unweighted line from a throw zone on the edge ofthe pool to a fellow team member located in the water on the near side of a crossbar located 12.5m
distant. The competitor pulls this “victim” back to the finish wall/edge of the pool.
A.

B.

C.

D.
E.

Throw zone: The throw zone is the area bounded by each team’s allotted lane. It extends fromthe vertical edge of the pool wall to the front of a team’s lane and is defined at the sides by anunmarked extended line in the middle of the lane ropes on each side of a team’s lane and to
the edge of the pool deck or raised platform. The back line of the throw zone does not need tobe marked but a minimum of 2.0m is required beyond the vertical edge of the pool wall to allow
for an unimpeded throw and the haul in.
Note 1: For the purposes of judging competitors are still required to remain within their lane.
However, the focus is not on the placement of feet on a line but, rather, not interfering with anyother team in an event.
Note 2: While not a compulsory requirement, to ensure a clear area for the throw and the victim
haul in, a line on the ground, or temporary rope or tape barrier may be placed approximately
2.0m behind the vertical edge of the pool wall. Backward movement by the competitor within
this area would not be regarded as a disqualification.
The start: On the first whistle, competitors (i.e., thrower and victim) prepare for the start. The“thrower” holds only one end of the throw line in one hand. The “victim” takes the other end of
the line, enters the water, and proceeds to the crossbar. The line is then extended between thevictim and the thrower. The surplus line can be left on either side of the cross bar and, if
extended beyond the 12.5m crossbar mark, the surplus line may be passed either over or under
the crossbar
No practice throws are permitted prior to the start.
At the second whistle, throwers take their positions for the start without undue delay. When allcompetitors have assumed their starting positions, the Starter shall give the command “Takeyour marks”. When all throwers and victims are stationary, the Starter gives the acoustic starting
signal.
Starting position: The thrower stands in the throw zone facing the victim, motionless with heels
and/or knees together and arms straight down and beside the body. The end of the throw line
is held in one hand.
The victim is located on the near side of the rigid crossbar in their allotted lane. The victim has
contact with the throw line and grasps the crossbar with one or two hands.
On an acoustic starting signal: The thrower shall retrieve the line, throw it back to the victim(who grasps it), and pull the victim through the water until the victim touches the finish wall/edge.
Victims may only grasp the line if it is a “fair throw”. A fair throw is one that a victim is able tograsp the throw line with their hand but only within their designated lane either in front or behindthe crossbar. A throw line lying over the lane rope is not “within the lane”.
As long as victims remain entirely within their designated lane and they do not release theirgrasp on the crossbar, they may use their foot or other part of the body to manoeuvre the throw
line within their lane to a position where they can grasp the line with their hand.
The victim can slide their hand anywhere along the crossbar but must be grasping the crossbar
when touching the line with any part of their body and when grasping the line.
There is no penalty for pulling on the rigid crossbar while attempting to reach the throw line.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 3 – Pool Events

F.

G.

H.
I.

J.

14.2.

Note: The victim may release their contact with the crossbar after the starting signal without
penalty, but they must be grasping the crossbar with their hand when using any part of theirbody to gather or to grasp the line with the other hand.
Pull through the water: While being pulled to the edge, victims must be on their front grasping
the throw line with both hands. Victims may not “climb” the throw line hand-over-hand. For
safety reasons, victims may release the line with one hand for the sole purpose of touching thewall/edge. This will not result in disqualification.
Victims may wear swim goggles.
Line throwers shall be disqualified if they exit their throw zone while competing and, in do so,interferes with another team. Remaining in the throw zone as defined means that the thrower
maintains at least one foot wholly within the inside edge of their throw zone, either on the groundor in the air above their throw zone. Any part of the thrower’s feet may cross over the front of
the “pool edge” in their throw zone without penalty.
The Line Thrower must haul in their victim using their arms and are not permitted to walk or run
with the throw line grasped in their hands or held around any part of their body or to deliberately
walk backwards while hauling in the victim to the finish wall.
Note: If there is a line on the ground, or a temporary rope or tape barrier placed approximately
2.0m behind the vertical edge of the pool wall, any backward movement by the competitor
within this area would not be regarded as a disqualification.
Throwers may reach to retrieve a line dropped outside the throw zone as long as there is nointerference with another competitor (as defined above). Throwers who enter (or fall into) thewater shall be disqualified.
To avoid any possible interference with other lanes, the victim may not exit the water and is toremain in their lane. The team will be disqualified if they attempt to climb out of the water beyond
their waist or sit on the pool edge or lane rope before the acoustic signal is given by thedelegated official for the completion of the race.
Similarly, the line thrower is not to interfere with any other teams in the event until the event
completion signal is given by the delegated official for the completion of the race.
Time limit: Throwers must make a fair throw and pull the victim to the finish wall/edge within 45
seconds.
Throwers who fail to get the victim to the finish wall/edge before the 45-second acoustic
completion signal shall be designated as “Did Not Finish” (DNF).

Equipment
A.
B.

14.3.

PageS3-21

Throw line: See Section 8. The throw line must be between 16.5m and 17.5m in length.
Competitors must use the throw lines supplied by organisers.
The rigid crossbar is positioned on the surface across each lane 12.5m from the starting end of
the pool. A tolerance of plus 100mm and minus 0.00mm in each lane is allowed.

Disqualification
In addition to Section 2 and those rules outlined in S3-1 to 2, the following behaviour shall result in
disqualification:
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.

Line Thrower executing practice throw(s) (DQ58).
Victim not keeping a grasp on the crossbar with their hand when using any part of their body togather or to grasp the line for the pull to the finish wall/edge. (DQ50).
Victim grasping the throw line outside the lane (DQ54).
Victim not on their front while being pulled to the finish wall/edge (DQ55).
Victim not holding the throw line with both hands while being pulled to the finish wall/edge(victim may release the line with one hand for the sole purpose of touching the wall/edge)(DQ56).
Victim “climbing” the throw line hand-over-hand (DQ57).
Line Thrower who, after the start signal and before the 45-second acoustic completion signal,
exits their allocated throw zone while recusing their victim and, in doing so, interferes with otherteams in the event (DQ51).
Line Thrower not hauling in using their arms and walking or running with the line grasped intheir hands or held around any part of their body to return the victim to the pool finish wall.
(DQ52).
Victim exiting the water before the 45-second acoustic completion signal (DQ53).
Failure to touch the finish wall/edge (DQ15).

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 3 – Pool Events

15.

PageS3-22

MANIKIN RELAY (4 X 25M)

FIGURE 9: MANIKIN RELAY (4 X 25M).
15.1.

Event description
Four competitors in turn carry a manikin approximately 25m each.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.

H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.

O.
15.2.

On the first long whistle, all competitors enter the water. On the second long whistle, allcompetitors, without undue delay, prepare for the start.
The first competitor is holding a manikin with one hand and the start wall/edge or starting blockwith the other hand and the second, third, and fourth competitors are in the water at the 25 m,
50m and 75m marks respectively.
When all competitors have assumed their starting positions, the Starter shall give the command“Take your Marks”.
When the first competitors are stationary, the Starter gives the acoustic starting signal.
The first competitor: The first competitor carries the manikin and passes it to the secondcompetitor within the 5m changeover zone situated between the 22.5m and 27.5m mark.
The second competitor: The second competitor carries the manikin to touch the turning
wall/edge and passes the manikin to the third competitor who is in contact with the turning
wall/edge or starting block with at least one hand.
The third competitor: The third competitor may touch or grasp the manikin with one hand before
the second competitor touches the turning wall/edge or starting block but must not releasecontact with the turning wall/edge or starting block until the second competitor has touched theturning wall/edge.
The third competitor carries the manikin and passes it to the fourth competitor in the changeoverzone between the 72.5m and 77.5m mark.
The fourth competitor: The fourth competitor completes the event by carrying the manikin totouch the finish wall/edge with any part of the competitor’s body.
Once they have completed their leg of the race and the exchange, competitors must remain in
the water, in their lane in the changeover zone, staying clear of any following exchanges, andremain there until the completion of the event has been signalled.
Only the incoming and outgoing competitors may participate in the manikin exchange within
their changeover zones. The incoming competitors may assist outgoing competitors, but only
as long as the manikin’s head remains within the changeover zones.
The hand of one competitor must be in contact with the manikin at all times.
The start zone and relay changeover zones shall be indicated by flags, poles, or cones.
Competitors involved in the exchange may push off the pool bottom in the changeover zone.
In the start and in changeover zones competitors are not judged on “carrying the manikin”
criteria (defined in S3-3) however competitors need to maintain contact with the manikin withat least one hand at all times and including during the exchanges.
Note: The standard “carrying the manikin” criteria (defined in S3-3) applies to the final relay
competitor at the finish of the event.
The manikin exchange must take place within the designated changeover zones, as judged by
the top of the manikin’s head.

Equipment
Manikin: See Section 8. The manikin is completely filled with water and sealed. Competitors must
use the manikins supplied by organisers.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 3 – Pool Events

15.3.

PageS3-23

Disqualification
In addition to Section 2 and those rules outlined in S3-1 to S3-3, the following behaviour shall resultin disqualification:
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.

Using incorrect manikin carry technique as described in Section 3, point 3 Manikins (DQ19).
Taking assistance from any pool fitting (e.g., lane rope, steps, drains or underwater hockey
fittings) – not including the bottom of the pool (DQ17).
The third competitor releasing contact with the turning wall/edge/starting block before thesecond competitor has touched the wall/edge (DQ40).
The manikin changing hands before or beyond the designated changeover zone (DQ41).
Assistance from a third competitor during the exchange between the incoming and outgoingcompetitors (DQ38).
Releasing the manikin before the next competitor has grasped it (i.e., one hand of eachcompetitor must be in contact with the manikin) (DQ42).
Not having the manikin in the correct carrying position before the top of the manikin’s headpasses the 5m line (DQ18).
Releasing the manikin before touching the turning wall/edge or finish wall/edge (DQ21).
Failure to touch the finish wall/edge (DQ15).
A competitor leaving the water after completing their leg of the relay and before the all-clear
signal is given (DQ60).
One competitor completing two or more legs of the event (DQ39).

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 3 – Pool Events

16.

PageS3-24

OBSTACLE RELAY (4 X 50M)

FIGURE 10: OBSTACLE RELAY (4 X 50M).
16.1.

Event description
Four competitors in turn swim a distance of 50m under obstacles.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.

16.2.

The first competitor: With a dive start on an acoustic signal, the first competitor swims 50m
freestyle passing under two obstacles.
The second, third and fourth competitors: After the first competitor touches the turning wall/edge
the second, third, and fourth competitors repeat the procedure in turn.
Competitors must surface after the dive entry before the first obstacle and after passing undereach obstacle. “Surfacing” means the competitor’s head breaks the surface of the water.
Competitors may push off the pool bottom when surfacing from under the obstacles.
Swimming into or otherwise bumping an obstacle is not a behaviour that results in
disqualification.
The first, second and third competitors must leave the water upon finishing their legs of therelay without obstructing any other competitors. The first, second and third competitors may not
re-enter the water.

Equipment
Obstacles: See Section 8. Obstacles are fixed at right angles on lane ropes in a straight line acrossall lanes. The first obstacle is positioned 12.5m from the start wall with the second obstacle 12.5m
from the opposite end. The distance between the two obstacles is 25m.

16.3.

Disqualification
In addition to Section 2 and those rules outlined in S3-1 to S3.2, the following behaviour shall resultin disqualification:
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.

Passing over an obstacle and not immediately returning over or under that obstacle and thenpassing under it (DQ11).
Failure to surface after each dive entry Q12).
Failure to surface after each obstacle (DQ13).
Taking assistance from any pool fitting (e.g., lane rope, steps, drains or underwater hockey
fittings) when surfacing – not including the bottom of the pool (DQ17).
Leaving the starting block before the previous competitor has touched the wall/edge (DQ40).
Failure to touch the finish wall/edge (DQ15).
A competitor re-entering the water after completing their leg of the relay (DQ49).
One competitor repeating two or more legs of the event (DQ39).

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 3 – Pool Events

17.

PageS3-25

MEDLEY RELAY (4 X 50M)

FIGURE 11: MEDLEY RELAY (4 X 50M).
17.1.

Event description
Four competitors in turn swim a distance of 50m undertaking different tasks.
A.
B.
C.
D.

E.
F.

G.
H.
I.
J.
K.

17.2.

The first competitor: With a dive start on an acoustic signal, the first competitor swims 50m
freestyle without fins
The second competitor: With a dive start after the first competitor touches the turning wall/edge,
the second competitor swims 50m freestyle with fins. The second competitor does not need tosurface before touching the turning wall/edge.
The third competitor: With a dive start after the second competitor touches the turning
wall/edge, the third competitor swims 50m freestyle without fins towing a rescue tube. The thirdcompetitor touches the turning wall/edge.
The fourth competitor: The fourth competitor (with fins) is in the water with at least one hand incontact with turning wall/edge or starting block, dons the harness. The fourth competitor may
make touch or grasp the rescue tube, its harness or line with one hand, before the thirdcompetitor has touched the turning wall/edge but must have at least one hand on the turning
wall/edge or starting block until the third competitor touches the edge. The fourth competitor
may push off the wall/edge with hand, arm, or feet.
The third competitor, playing the role of “victim”, holds the rescue tube and/or clip with both
hands while being towed 50m by the fourth competitor to the finish.
The victim must be in contact with the rescue tube before passing the 10m line. The line of the
rescue tube must be fully extended beyond the 10m line when the top of the “victim’s” headcrosses the 10m line.
Note: Should the line of the rescue tube not be fully extended because of the power of thevictim’s kick the team shall not be disqualified.
The victim may kick while being towed, but no other assistance is permitted.
The victim must grip the main body of the rescue tube and/or clip – not the rope.
The victim must hold onto the rescue tube and/or clip with both hands while being towed but
may reposition their hands on the tube and/or clip during the tow without disqualification.
The event is complete when the fourth competitor touches the finish wall/edge of the pool withthe victim in contact with the rescue tube.
The first and second competitors must leave the water upon finishing their legs of the relay
without obstructing any other competitors. The first and second competitors may not re-enter
the water.

Equipment
A.
B.

C.

Rescue tube, swim fins: See Section 8. Competitors must use the rescue tubes supplied byorganisers.
Starts with rescue tubes: For the third competitor’s start, the rescue tube and rescue tube line
may be positioned at the competitor’s discretion, but within the competitor’s allotted lane.
Competitors should ensure a safe and correct position of rescue tube and line. The rescue tube
remains unclipped throughout.
Wearing rescue tubes: Rescue tubes must be donned correctly, either with the loop over one
or two shoulders, or over the shoulder and across the chest – at the competitor’s discretion.
Assuming the rescue tube was donned correctly, there is no cause for disqualification if theloop falls down on the competitor’s arm or elbow during the competitor’s approach or tow.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 3 – Pool Events

D.
E.
F.

17.3.

PageS3-26

Towing the victim: Competitors must tow the victim with the line of the rescue tube fully
extended. Competitors may go back into the 10m change over zone to re-secure the victim
provided the top of the “victim’s” head has not passed the 10m line.
Retrieving lost fins: Competitors may retrieve fins lost after the start and continue without
disqualification as long as the rules governing manikins (if being used in the leg of the race) are
not violated (see 3.3 Manikins). Competitors are not permitted to start again in another heat.
Rescue Tube Defect: If in the opinion of the Chief Referee the rescue tube, line and/or harness(belt) presents a technical defect during the race, the Chief Referee may allow the competitor
to start again in another heat but only if the rescue tubes for the event were supplied by theorganising body and the rules required that the provided tubes must be used by all competitors.

Disqualification
In addition to Section 2 and those rules outlined in S3-1 to S3-3, the following behaviour shall resultin disqualification:
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.

Leaving the starting block/releasing contact with the turning wall/edge/starting block before theprevious competitor has touched the wall/edge (DQ40).
The competitor clipping the rescue tube into the ring (DQ44).
The victim holding the rescue tube by the rope (DQ45).
The victim helping with arm movements, or not holding the rescue tube and/or clip with both
hands (DQ46).
The victim not holding or losing the rescue tube after passing the 10m line (DQ47).
The fourth competitor towing the victim without the line of the rescue tube fully extended beyond
the 10m line (DQ48).
One competitor completing two or more legs of the event (excludes third competitor acting as
victim) (DQ39).
Failure to touch the finish wall/edge (DQ15).
A competitor re-entering the water after completing their leg of the relay (DQ49).

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 3 – Pool Events

18.

PageS3-27

POOL LIFESAVER RELAY (4 X 50M)

FIGURE 12: POOL LIFESAVER RELAY (4 X 50M).
18.1

Event description
Four competitors in turn swim a distance of 50m undertaking different tasks.
A.
B.

C.

D.

E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.

The first competitor: With a dive start on an acoustic signal, the first competitor swims 50m
freestyle without fins.
The second competitor: With a dive start after the first competitor touches the wall/edge, thesecond competitor swims 50m with fins and dives to retrieve a submerged manikin. The secondcompetitor does not need to touch the turning edge before passing the manikin to the thirdcompetitor.
Note: The second swimmer is permitted to swim the whole lap underwater before surfacingwith manikin or may surface one or more times after the start and before diving to retrieve the
manikin.
The third competitor: The third competitor is waiting in the water (without fins) in contact withthe turning wall/edge or starting block with at least one hand. The third competitor may touchor grasp the manikin with one hand before the head of the manikin breaks the surface of thewater. After the manikin’s head breaks the surface of the water the third competitor releases
their contact with the turning wall/edge or starting block. The second competitor is not required
to touch the turning wall/edge after surfacing with the manikin, but the manikin must not bereleased by the second competitor until the third competitor has grasped it (i.e., the hand of atleast one competitor must be in contact with the manikin at all times). The third competitor thencarries the manikin 50m and touches the wall/edge before passing the manikin to the fourthcompetitor.
The fourth competitor: The fourth competitor (with fins) is in the water with at least one hand incontact with the turning wall/edge or starting block. The fourth competitor may touch or grasp
the manikin with one hand before the third competitor has touched the turning wall/edge. The
fourth competitor must not release contact with the turning wall or starting block until the thirdcompetitor has touched the turning wall/edge and the manikin must not be released by the thirdcompetitor until the fourth competitor has grasped it (i.e., one hand of each competitor must be
in contact with the manikin at all times). The fourth competitor then carries the manikin to touch
the finish wall/edge with any part of the competitor’s body.
The incoming second and third competitors may assist their outgoing competitors, but only as
long as the manikin’s head remains within the changeover zones.
Flags, poles, or cones shall indicate the changeover zones for the manikin carry legs:•
At the 2nd to 3rd competitor changeover - 5m from the pool wall.
•
At the 3rd to 4th competitor changeover - 10m from the pool wall.
Competitors must have the manikin in the correct carrying position as follows:•
Third competitor - 5m from the pool wall.
•
Fourth competitor - 10m from the pool wall.
Competitors may not release the manikin until the next competitor has grasped it (i.e., one handof each competitor must be in contact with the manikin).
The third and fourth competitors are not judged on “carrying the manikin” criteria (see S3-3)
within the changeover zones as judged by the top of the manikin’s head. Carrying the manikin
criteria do apply within the finish zone at the end of the relay.
The third and fourth competitors may push off the wall/edge with hand, arm, or feet after taking
the manikin for their respective legs.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 3 – Pool Events

K.
L.
M.

18.2.

PageS3-28

The event is complete when the fourth competitor touches the finish wall/edge of the pool whilestill correctly carrying the manikin.
The first, second and third competitors must leave the water upon finishing their legs of therelay without obstructing any other competitors. These competitors may not re-enter the water.
Retrieving lost fins: Competitors may retrieve fins lost after the start and continue without
disqualification as long as the rules governing manikins (if being used in the leg of the race) are
not violated (see S3-3). Competitors are not permitted to start again in another heat.
Note: For Lifesaving World Championships each team shall consist of two males and two
females.
Teams are permitted to select their own gender order.

Equipment
Manikin: See Section 8. The manikin is completely filled with water and sealed. Competitors must
use the manikins supplied by organisers.
Swim fins: See Section 8.

18.3.

Disqualification
In addition to Section 2 and those rules outlined in S3-1 to S3-3, the following behaviour shall resultin disqualification:
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.

Using incorrect manikin carry technique as described in 3.3 Manikins (DQ19).
Taking assistance from any pool fitting (e.g., lane rope, steps, drains or underwater hockey
fittings) – not including the bottom of the pool (DQ17).
The third competitor releasing contact with the wall/edge before the head of the manikin breaks
the surface of the water (DQ59).
The third competitor not having the manikin in a correct carrying position before the top of the
manikin’s head passes the 5m line (DQ18).
Assistance from a third competitor during the exchange between the incoming and outgoingcompetitors (DQ38).
Releasing the manikin before the next competitor has grasped it (i.e., one hand of eachcompetitor must be in contact with the manikin) (DQ42).
The fourth competitor not having the manikin in a correct carrying position before the top of the
manikin’s head passes the 10m line (DQ23).
Failure to touch the finish wall/edge (DQ15).
One competitor completing two or more legs of the event (DQ39).
Leaving the starting block/releasing contact with the turning wall/edge/ starting block before theprevious competitor has touched the wall/edge (DQ40).
A competitor re-entering the water after completing their leg of the relay (DQ49).

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 3 – Pool Events

19.

PageS3-29

RESCUE TOW RELAY (4 X 50M)

FIGURE 13: RESCUE TOW RELAY (4 X 50M)
19.1

Event description
Four competitors in turn swim a distance of 50m undertaking different tasks.
A.
B.
C.
D.

E.
F.
G.

H.
I.

J.
K.

19.2

First competitor: With a dive start on an acoustic signal, the first competitor swims 50m freestylewithout fins.
Second competitor: With a dive start after the first competitor touches the wall/edge, the secondcompetitor swims 50m freestyle with fins.
Third competitor: With a dive start after the second competitor touches the wall/edge, the thirdcompetitor swims 50m freestyle with fins towing a rescue tube. The third competitor (who plays
the role of rescuer) touches the turning wall/edge.
Fourth competitor: The fourth competitor (playing the role of victim) is in the water with at least
one hand in contact with the turning wall/edge or the starting block. The fourth competitor may
touch or grasp the rescue tube, its harness or line with one hand before the third competitor
has touched the turning wall/edge. The fourth competitor must not release contact with theturning wall or starting block until the third competitor has touched the turning wall/edge.
Note: The third competitor unintentionally touching the fourth competitor before the touching
the turning wall/edge is not a disqualification.
As soon as the third competitor has touched the turning edge/wall of the pool, they can releasecontact with the turn edge/wall or starting block and the “clip in” into the rescue tube cancommence.
The rescuer and/or the victim secures the rescue tube around the victim’s body under botharms and clipped to an O-ring.
Both the rescuer and the victim must leave from the turning wall/edge. The victim must be insecured with the rescue tube clipped in around their body before passing the 10m line. The lineof the rescue tube must be fully extended beyond the 10m line when the top of the “victim’s”
head crosses the 10m line.
Note 1: Should the line of the rescue tube not be fully extended because of the power of thevictim’s kick the team shall not be disqualified.
Note 2: It is permitted for the rescuer and/or victim to push off from the turning wall.
Outside of the 10m line the victim must be towed on their back and the victim cannot be towed
in any other way than clipped into the rescue tube.
Outside of the 10m line the victim is permitted to assist by sculling under the surface of thewater and kicking, but they must not swim backstroke or any other swim style with an out-ofwater recovery.
Note: The victim repositioning their arms to a position in front of their head to streamline is nota disqualification.
The event is complete when the rescuer touches the finish wall/edge of the pool with the victim
clipped into the rescue tube.
The first and second competitors must leave the water upon finishing their legs of the relay
without obstructing any other competitors. The first and second competitors may not re-enter
the water.

EquipmentA.

Rescue tube, swim fins: See Section 8. Competitors must use the rescue tubes supplied byorganisers.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 3 – Pool Events

B.

C.

D.

E.

F.

19.3

PageS3-30

Starts with rescue tubes: For the third competitor’s start, the rescue tube and rescue tube line
may be positioned at the competitor’s discretion, but within the competitor’s allotted lane.
Competitors should ensure a safe and correct position of rescue tube and line. The rescue tube
remains unclipped until the rescuer secures the victim.
Wearing rescue tubes: Rescue tubes must be donned correctly, either with the loop over one
or two shoulders, or over the shoulder and across the chest – at the competitor’s discretion.
Assuming the rescue tube was donned correctly, there is no cause for disqualification if theloop falls down on the competitor’s arm or elbow during the competitor’s approach or tow.
Towing the victim: Rescuers must tow the victim with rescue tube clipped around the victim’s
body and with the line of the rescue tube fully extended. Rescuers may go back into the 10mchange over zone to re-secure the victim provided the top of the “victim’s” head has not passed
the 10m line.
Retrieving lost fins: Competitors may retrieve fins lost after the start and continue without
disqualification as long as the rules governing the towing of victims (if being used towed in theleg of the race) are not violated (see S3-3). Competitors are not permitted to start again in
another heat.
Rescue Tube Defect: If in the opinion of the Chief Referee the rescue tube, line and/or harness(belt) presents a technical defect during the race, the Chief Referee may allow the competitor
to start again in another heat but only if the rescue tubes for the event were supplied by theorganising body and the rules required that the provided tubes must be used by all competitors.

Disqualification
In addition to Section 2 and those rules outlined in S3-1 to 3-2, the following behaviour shall result in
disqualification:
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.

H.
I.
J.
K.

Leaving the starting block/releasing contact with the turning wall/edge/starting bock before theprevious competitor has touched the turning wall/edge. (DQ40)
Taking assistance from any pool fitting (e.g., lane rope, steps) when securing the rescue tube
around the victim (except where the minimum pool depth allows the athlete to stand). (DQ 17)
The competitor (rescuer) clipping the rescue tube into the ring before touching the turningedge/wall. (DQ30)
The rescue tube not being secured around the victim (judged at the top of the victim’s head)
before passing the 10m line. (DQ61)
The victim becoming detached from the rescue tube (other than a technical defect with the tube
- see tube defect note) after passing the 10m line and prior to the rescuer touching the finishingedge/wall. (DQ62)
The victim not being towed on their back and clipped into the rescue tube and behind therescuer. (DQ63)
The victim swimming backstroke or any other swim style with an out-of-water arm recovery.
(DQ64)
Note: The victim sculling under the water to assist the with tow or the victim repositioning theirarms to a position in front of their head to streamline is not a disqualification.
The victim touching the finish edge/wall before the rescuer. (DQ65)
One competitor completing two or more legs of the event. (DQ39)
Failure to touch the finish wall/edge. (DQ15)
A competitor re-entering the water after completing their leg of the relay (DQ49).

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 3 – Pool Events

20.

PageS3-31

DISQUALIFICATION CODES FOR POOL EVENTS

Code and Disqualification
Events
1. Not completing the event in accordance with the event description or All events
general rules.
2. A competitor or team may be disqualified if a competitor, team, or handler All eventsis deemed to have competed unfairly. Examples of “competing unfairly”
include:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Committing a doping or doping-related infraction.
Impersonating another competitor.
Attempting to defeat the ballot or draw for events or positions.
Competing twice in the same individual event.
Competing twice in the same event in different teams.
Purposely interfering with a course to gain advantage.
Jostling or obstructing another competitor or handler so as toimpede their progress.
Receiving physical or material outside assistance (other than verbal
or other direction).
Participating contrary to the spirit of the competition (as describedin the code of fair play).

3. Competitors may not be permitted to start in an event if they are late All events
reporting to the marshalling area. This may be noted as a “did not start”(DNS) or similar on result sheets.
4. A competitor or team absent from the start of an event shall be disqualified All events
except for the A- or B-final. This may be noted as a “did not start” (DNS)or similar on result sheets.
5. Activities that result in wilful damage to the venue sites, accommodation All events
sites or the property of others will result in disqualification of the individuals
involved from competition.
6. Abuse of officials resulting in disqualification from the competition.

All events

7. Using sticky, tacky, or adhesive substances (liquid, solid or aerosol) on All events
hands or feet, or on the manikin or rescue tube to improve grip or push of
the bottom of the pool.
8. Taking assistance from the pool bottom except where specifically allowed All events(e.g., Obstacle Swim, 4 x 25m Manikin Relay).
9. Leaving the water after an event before permission is given by the official. All events
10. Commencing a starting motion before the starting signal has been given. All events
11. Passing over an obstacle without immediately returning over or under that Obstacle Swim
obstacle and then passing under it.
Obstacle Relay
12. Failure to surface after the dive entry or after a turn before passing under Obstacle Swiman obstacle.
Obstacle Relay
13. Failure to surface after each obstacle.
14. Failure to touch the wall/edge during the turn.

Obstacle Swim
Obstacle Relay
Obstacle Swim

15. Failure to touch the finish wall/edge.

All events

16. Not surfacing before diving to the manikin.

Manikin Carry
Manikin Lifesaver Medley
17. Taking assistance from any pool fitting (e.g., lane rope, steps, drains or Obstacle Swim
underwater hockey fittings) when surfacing with the manikin (as applicable Obstacle Relay
Manikin Carryfor the event) – not including, where specified, the bottom of the pool.
Manikin Carry with Fins

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 3 – Pool Events

PageS3-32

Code and Disqualification

EventsManikin Lifesaver Medley
Line Throw
Manikin Relay
Rescue Medley
Super Lifesaver
Pool Lifesaver Relay
Rescue Tow Relay
18. Not having the manikin in a correct carrying position before the top of the Manikin Carrymanikin’s head passes the 5m line (for carries without fins).
Manikin Relay
Rescue Medley
Super Lifesaver
Manikin Lifesaver Medley
19. Using an incorrect manikin carrying technique (as described in S3-3).
Manikin Carry
Manikin Carry with Fins
Rescue Medley
Super Lifesaver
Manikin Lifesaver Medley
Manikin Relay
Pool Lifesaver Relay
20. Towing the manikin with the face below the surface.
Manikin Tow with Fins
Super Lifesaver
Manikin Lifesaver Medley
21. Releasing the manikin before touching the finish wall/edge or the turning Manikin Carrywall/edge.
Manikin Carry with Fins
Rescue Medley
Super Lifesaver
Manikin Relay
Manikin Lifesaver Medley
22. Surfacing after turning and before lifting the manikin.
Rescue Medley
23. Not having the manikin in the correct carrying position before the top of Manikin Carry with Fins
the manikin’s head passes the 10m line (for carries with fins).
Pool Lifesaver Relay
24. Taking assistance from any pool fitting (e.g., lane rope, steps, underwater Manikin Tow with Fins
hockey fittings) when fixing the rescue tube around the manikin and where Super Lifesaver
the minimum pool depth allows the competitor to stand while securing a Manikin Lifesaver Medley
rescue tube around the manikin.
25. Manikin handler positioning the manikin incorrectly or again making Manikin Tow with Fins
Super Lifesaver
contact with the manikin after the competitor has grasped the manikin.
Manikin Lifesaver Medley
26. At 50m / 150m, competitor not touching the pool wall/edge before Manikin Tow with Fins
intentionally touching manikin.
Super Lifesaver
Manikin Lifesaver Medley
27. Manikin handler not releasing the manikin immediately after the Manikin Tow with Fins
competitor makes deliberate contact with the manikin (after first touching Super Lifesaver
the turning wall/edge) and, for the Manikin Lifesaver Relay only, the Manikin Lifesaver Medley
competitor has donned their fins and rescue tube and makes deliberatecontact with the manikin.
28. Manikin handler pushing the manikin towards the competitor or the finish Manikin Tow with Fins
wall/edge.
Super Lifesaver
Manikin Lifesaver Medley
29. Manikin handler intentionally entering the water during the event or Manikin Tow with Fins
entering the water and interfering with the performance of another Super Lifesaver
competitor or interfering with the judging of the event.
Manikin Lifesaver Medley
30. Competitor clipping the rescue tube into the ring before touching the Manikin Tow with Fins
Super Lifesaver
turning wall/edge.
Manikin Lifesaver Medley

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 3 – Pool Events

PageS3-33

Code and Disqualification

EventsRescue Tow Relay
31. Incorrect securing of the rescue tube around the manikin (i.e., not around Manikin Tow with Fins
body and under both arms and not clipped to an O-ring).
Super Lifesaver
Manikin Lifesaver Medley
32. Not securing the rescue tube around the manikin within the 10m change- Manikin Tow with Fins
over zone (judged at the top of the manikin’s head).
Super Lifesaver
Manikin Lifesaver Medley
33. Pushing or carrying, instead of towing the manikin.
Manikin Tow with Fins
Super Lifesaver
Manikin Lifesaver Medley
34. The line of the rescue tube not becoming fully extended before the top of Manikin Tow with Fins
the manikin’s head passes the 10m line.
Super Lifesaver
Manikin Lifesaver Medley
35. Not towing the manikin with the line of the rescue tube fully extended Manikin Tow with Fins
beyond the 10m line.
Super Lifesaver
Manikin Lifesaver Medley
36. The rescue tube and manikin become separated after the rescue tube has Manikin Tow with Fins
been secured correctly around the manikin.
Super Lifesaver
Manikin Lifesaver Medley
37. Touching the finish wall/edge without the rescue tube and manikin in Manikin Tow with Fins
place.
Super Lifesaver
Manikin Lifesaver Medley
38. Assistance from a third competitor during the exchange between the Manikin Relay
incoming and outgoing competitors.
Pool Lifesaver Relay
39. One competitor repeating two or more legs of the event.

Obstacle Relay
Manikin Relay
Medley Relay
Pool Lifesaver Relay
Rescue Tow Relay
40. Leaving the starting block/releasing contact with the turning wall/edge/ Obstacle Relay
starting block before the previous competitor has touched the wall/edge. Manikin Relay
Medley Relay
Pool Lifesaver Relay
Rescue Tow Relay
41. The manikin changing hands before or beyond the designated Manikin Relaychangeover zone
42. Releasing the manikin before the next competitor has grasped it (i.e., one Manikin Relay
had of each competitor must be in contact with the manikin).
Pool Lifesaver Relay
43. Deleted
44. The competitor clipping the rescue tube into the ring.

Medley Relay

45. The victim holding the rescue tube by the rope.

Medley Relay

46. The victim helping with arm movements, or not holding the rescue tube Medley Relay
and/or clip with both hands.
47. The victim not holding or losing the rescue tube after passing the 10m line. Medley Relay
48. The fourth competitor towing the victim without the line of the rescue tube Medley Relay
fully extended beyond the 10m line.
49. A competitor re-entering the water after completing their leg of the relay.

Obstacle Relay
Medley Relay
Pool Lifesaver Relay
Rescue Tow Relay

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 3 – Pool Events

PageS3-34

Code and Disqualification
Events
50. Victim not keeping a grasp on the crossbar with their hand when using any Line Throwpart of their body to gather or to grasp the line for the pull to the finish
wall/edge.
51. Line Thrower who, after the start signal and before the 45-second acoustic Line Throwcompletion signal, exits their allocated throw zone while recusing their
victim and, in so, interferes with other teams in the event.
52. Line Thrower walking or running with the line grasped in their hands or Line Throw
held around any part of their body to return the victim to the pool finish walli.e., not using their arms to haul in. While it is not a compulsory
requirement, to ensure a clear area for the throw and the victim haul in, aline on the ground, or temporary rope or tape barrier may be placed
approximately 2.0m behind the vertical edge of the pool wall. Backward
movement by the thrower within this area would not be regarded as adisqualification.
52. Victim exiting the water before the 45-second acoustic completion signal. Line Throw
53. Victim grasping the throw line outside their lane.

Line Throw

54. Victim not on their front while being pulled to the finish wall/edge.

Line Throw

55. Victim not holding the throw line with both hands while being pulled to the Line Throw
finish wall/edge (victim may release the line with one hand for the sole
purpose of touching the wall/edge).
56. Victim “climbing” the throw line hand-over-hand.

Line Throw

57. Line thrower executing practice throws.

Line Throw

58. The third competitor releasing contact with the wall/edge before the head Pool Lifesaver Relayof the manikin breaks the surface of the water.
59. A competitor in the Manikin Relay leaving the water after completing their Manikin Relayleg of the relay and before the all-clear signal is given.
60. The rescue tube not being secured around the victim (judged at the top of Rescue Tow Relay
the victim’s head) before passing the 10m line.
61. The victim becoming detached from the rescue tube (other than a Rescue Tow Relay
technical defect with the tube – see tube defect note) after passing the
10m line and prior to the rescuer touching the finishing edge/wall.
62. The victim not being towed on their back and clipped into the rescue tube Rescue Tow Relay
and behind the rescuer.
63. The victim swimming backstroke or any other swim style with an out-of- Rescue Tow Relay
water arm recovery.
Note: The victim sculling under the water to assist the with tow or thevictim repositioning their arms to a position in front of their head tostreamline is not a disqualification.
64. The victim touching the finishing edge/wall before the rescuer.

Rescue Tow Relay

Note: In the Line Throw event failure to get the victim to the finish wall/edge before the 45-second acoustic
completion signal shall be designated DNF, not a DQ

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 4 – Beach and Ocean Events

World Water Safety

INTERNATIONAL LIFE SAVING FEDERATIONILS COMPETITION RULE BOOKSECTION 4
BEACH AND OCEAN EVENTS

2023 Edition(Effective 1 June 2023)

Page S4-1

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 4 – Beach and Ocean Events

Page S4-2

SECTION 4
BEACH AND OCEAN EVENTSThe following beach and ocean events are described in this section:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Surf Race
Surf Teams Race
Rescue Tube Rescue
Rescue Tube Race
Run-Swim-Run
Beach Flags
Beach Sprint
Beach Relay
Beach Run – 2km and 1km
3 x1km Beach Run Relay
Surf Ski Race
Surf Ski Relay
Board Race
Board Relay
Board Rescue
Oceanman/Oceanwoman (and Olympic “M” format variation)
Oceanman/Oceanwoman Relay
Ocean Lifesaver Relay Mixed (Oceanman/Oceanwoman Relay variation)

1

GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR BEACH AND OCEAN COMPETITIONTeam management and competitors are responsible for being familiar with the competition schedule,
and with the rules and procedures governing events.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.

Competitors may not be permitted to commence in an event if they are late reporting to the
Marshalling area. To assist the organisers in determining how many heats may be required,
events may be marshalled the day before or at the start of the day the event is scheduled.
A competitor or team absent from the start of an event shall be disqualified.
Unless specifically provided for, no artificial enhancements to propulsion may be used incompetition (e.g., hand webs, armbands).
The use of wax or similar substances to assist the competitor in maintaining the grip on orcontact with boards or surf skis or paddles is permitted in ocean events.
Body tape used for preventative, medical, therapeutic or kinesiology purposes is allowed at thediscretion of the Chief Referee as long as it does not provide a competitive advantage.
Video cameras may be mounted on boards and surf skis as long as such devices conform to
the requirements specified in Section 8. Video cameras may not be worn by or otherwise
attached to a competitor from start to finish of a race.
Competitors must wear their club or national team swim caps in all events. Ocean event caps,
securely fastened under the chin, must be worn on competitors’ heads at the start of each race.
A competitor shall not be disqualified if the cap is lost after the start of a race provided that
officials can identify that the competitor correctly completed the event.
Competition courses: Protests against the course will only be accepted prior to the start of each
event or race.
•
All courses shall be measured, set, and aligned to the Chief Referee’s satisfaction
ensuring as far as possible that all lanes have fair and equal conditions.
•
The ILS Event Management Committee and Chief Referee may authorise adjustments tocourse set-ups to ensure the safety, fair judging, and efficient running of the event (e.g.,
distances, number of lanes or buoys, number of competitors per race). Any coursechanges must be communicated to competitors prior to the start of the race (e.g., at theteam managers briefing, in the marshalling area, or at the start).
•
The use of colour-coded buoys and flags is recommended to guide competitors accurately
through the required courses.
•
Buoy distances shall be measured from the end of knee-depth water at low tide mark.
However, distances may vary depending upon beach conditions and safety factors.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 4 – Beach and Ocean Events

J.

K.
L.
M.

Adjustment of the buoys may be necessary during the competition if they move out ofalignment.
•
Competitors in craft events may pass through the swimming buoys on their craft on theunderstanding that they are solely responsible if the buoys offer an impediment to theirprogress.
Competitors and officials must leave the designated competition area when not competing or
officiating. The competition area may be defined as the section of the beach encompassed bya line or fence, or a direct line to the water from the extreme ends of a line or fence or otherdesignated areas as specified by the Chief Referee.
Finish Judges order-of-finish decisions are not subject to protest or appeal.
Start decisions by the Starter or Chief Referee (or Chief Referee’s designate) are not subject
to protest or appeal.
Luck of prevailing conditions: No protest or appeal will be entertained when an incident iscaused by the prevailing conditions (see S2-7).

2

THE START

2.1

Prior to the start
A.

B.

C.
2.2

Page S4-3

A Marshall shall:•
Place competitors in the order as drawn for all heats and or finals.
•
Accompany competitors and their required equipment to the starting area and ensure thatcompetitors are positioned in proper order.
Prior to the start of each race, designated technical officials shall:•
Check that all officials are in position.
•
Check that competitors have proper attire and caps for a legal start.
•
Check that equipment and course markers are in position.
A designated official e.g., Sectional Referee shall signal the Starter that the competitors areunder the Starter’s control.

The Starter
The Starter shall:
A.
B.
C.
D.

2.3

Have sole jurisdiction over the competitors from the time of the signal until the race has started.
Position himself or herself so as to have full visual control over all competitors during the start.
Ensure that the start for all races is consistent and fair.
Disqualify competitors for false starts (or in Beach Flags, eliminate competitors).

Start procedures
The starting of events is a three step process commencing with a signal or command that indicates“Take Your Marks” followed by a signal or command that indicates “Set” and then followed by a startsignal or command that indicates “Go”.
For the Beach Sprint the commands shall simply be the verbal command of “Take Your Marks”
followed by the verbal command that indicates “Set” and then followed by the start (“Go”) signal thatis usually a starting gun, air horn, electronic beeper, or whistle.
For a surf race or other similar events that commence on a line or cord on the beach, a verbal
command such as “Competitors place your toes on or behind the Line” is equivalent to “Take yourMarks”. The next verbal command is “Set”, or “You are in the Starter’s Hands”. The start (“Go”) signal
is then given by such means as a starting gun, air horn, whistle, or other appropriate means.
Similarly for an event that commences in the water such as a surf ski race, the verbal command for“competitors to enter the water” is equivalent to “Take your Marks”. The “Set” command may beeither a verbal “Set” or “You are in the Starters Hands” or an official holding a signal flag aloft toindicate that a start is imminent. The start (“Go”) signal is then given by such means as a starting
gun, air horn, whistle, or other appropriate means.
The start procedure may be clarified at the Team Managers and/or Competitor Briefing. See
individual event descriptions for the start procedures for Beach Flags, Surf Boat, and IRB events If,
for any reason, the Starter has to speak to any competitor after either command, the start process
shall be recommenced.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 4 – Beach and Ocean Events

A.
B.
C.
D.

2.4

B.
C.

D.

E.

Start lines may be designated by:•
A brightly coloured cord between two poles.
•
A line drawn on the sand between two poles.
•
A line of sight between two poles or otherwise as determined by the Starter.
At the start, competitors’ toes may be on or behind the start line (whether a cord, drawn on thesand or line of sight) but parts of the body may overhang the line.
In events where a line is drawn and beach sprint type start is utilised, toes and fingers shall beon or behind the line except where an upright starting position is adopted. In suchcircumstances, competitors’ toes shall be on or behind the line, but parts of the body may
overhang the line.
In events such as a board race where a line is drawn or a cord designates the start line, a partof the board held by competitors may be over the start line, but it must be at right angles to theline or at an angle to accommodate prevailing conditions. Where a board is placed on thebeach, it shall be placed at 90 degrees to, and on the shoreward side of, the start or changeoverline.
In surf boat and/or surf ski events where a line of sight is used with craft in the water, the bowof the craft shall be on or behind the line and at 90 degrees to the line or at an angle toaccommodate the prevailing conditions.

Disqualification
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.

2.6

If, for any reason, the Starter is not satisfied that all is ready for the start to proceed after
competitors are on their marks, the Starter shall order all competitors to withdraw from theirmarks and recommence the start.
While the Starter makes every attempt to effect a fair start, the decision to “go” on the startsignal rests with the competitor or team. If there is no recall by the Starter, Check Starter orChief Referee, no protest or appeal shall be allowed on the start.
After the start, competitors in swim, board, surf ski (if a dry start), and multi-discipline events
may enter the water at their own discretion, providing there is no interference to othercompetitors.
In relay or multi-discipline events, after completion of the first leg, the competitor entering thewater in second or subsequent legs shall be deemed to be at fault if the progress of a competitor
coming from the water is impeded.

Start linesA.

2.5

Page S4-4

The one-start rule shall be used in all events.
The first competitor or team that commences a forward starting motion after assuming a final
set position and before the starting signal shall be disqualified, except for Beach Flags in which
the competitor shall be eliminated (DQ7).
If the starting signal sounds before the disqualification is declared, the competitors shall becalled back and start again.
The signal to call back the competitors shall be the same as the starting signal but repeated.
Any competitor who is disqualified for a false start shall not be permitted to continue in the raceand must withdraw from the start line.
All competitors who fail to comply with the Starter’s commands within a reasonable time shallbe disqualified (DQ8).
Any competitor who, after the Starter’s first command, disturbs others in the race through soundor otherwise, may be disqualified or eliminated (in the case of Beach Flags) (DQ9).

Notes
A.

B.

C.

The duty of the Starter and Check Starter is to ensure a fair start. If the Starter or Check Starter
decides that a start is not fair, for any reason, including technical or equipment fault, surfconditions, or other matters not caused by competitors, the competitors should be called back,and the start process shall recommence.
Competitors shall be disqualified if they “commence a forward starting motion” prior to thestarting signal. Involuntary movement by itself e.g., a muscle twitch or wash from waves for inwater starts is not a disqualification. Anticipating the starting signal and commencing a starting
motion is a disqualification.
The Starter and Check Starter use their discretion in determining whether a competitor – ormore than one competitor – has commenced a starting motion. Commonly, the early startingInternational Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 4 – Beach and Ocean Events

D.
E.

2.7

B.
C.

B.
C.
D.

In events where competitors run across a finish line, they must cross the line on their feet andin an upright position (i.e., not fall across the line). The finish is judged on the chest of thecompetitor when crossing the finish line.
In events with in-water finishes such as surf skis and surf boats, competitors or teams or crews
are deemed to have finished when any part of the craft crosses the finish line.
In events where competitors are required to cross a finish line, and fail to do so correctly,
competitors may recover and correctly re-cross the finish line to record their placing.
Once a competitor has been judged to have correctly crossed the finish line, he or she isdeemed to have completed the race. The competitor may not re-enter the course to correct any
previous race errors.

Judging
A.
B.
C.

D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
3.2

Exchanges or changeovers in relay events shall be effected by a competitor “tagging” the next
team member unless otherwise provided (see Beach Relay).
In tagging, one competitor uses either hand to visibly touch the other competitor on the handor other part of the body. All tags must be performed above the water surface so that they are
visible.
The outgoing competitor shall be positioned with feet on, or on the shoreward side of, thechangeover line.
Competitors in relay events must start their leg of the race from the position or lane allotted by
the Marshall. If competitors do not start from their designated lane or position, the team risks
being disqualified.

THE FINISH
A.

3.1

motion of one competitor causes movement by other competitors. Such movements by theother competitors are not a DQ.
The Starter’s or Check Starter’s decisions on starts are not subject to protest or appeal.
While every endeavour should be made by the starter to effect an even and fair start, thedecision to “go” on the start signal rests with the competitor or team. If there is no recall by thestarter or the Check Starter(s) or the Chief Referee, no protest shall be allowed on the start.

Changeovers and tagging in relays
A.

3.

Page S4-5

All events shall be judged visually or by electronic means. Placing shall be decided by finish
Judges. Ties (dead heats) shall be declared as such.
Where available, electronic equipment (including video or other technology judging aids) should
be utilised in the judging process.
Should electronic means be used to aid the judging and/or recording of races, competitors must
place tags as directed by the relevant official, (e.g., worn in a vest, placed around a specified
wrist or ankle, or placed on a designated part of their craft/surf boat etc.). If used for judging theresult of such races shall then be determined by the order of the finish of the tags across thefinish line. In the event of failure of the electronic tags, all placings in a race shall be visuallyjudged and/or recorded using normal methods.
Judges shall be positioned to ensure a clear view of the finish line. Where appropriate Judges
shall be placed in elevated positions.
Judge 1 selects finishers 1 and 2; Judge 2 selects finishers 2 and 3 and so on, (that is, Judge
1 is primarily responsible for finisher 1, as well as noting who finished second).
Should video or other electronic judging aids be used to properly determine the result of a race,the initial judging result shall not be declared as final and the Chief Referee/Sectional Referee
and Chief Judge shall determine the final finish result of the event.
The Finish Judge results, when finalised, shall be regarded as final, and no protest or appeal
shall be permitted.
At the Chief Judge’s signal, placing decals shall be issued and/or names recorded.
The Chief Referee may allow competitors or team managers to view video playback, or otherelectronic judging aids under controlled circumstances.

Time limitsA.

A time limit may be imposed on the duration of an event at the Chief Referee’s discretion.
Competitors shall be advised of any time limits prior to the commencement of a round of theevent.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 4 – Beach and Ocean Events

B.

4.

Page S4-6

The Chief Referee may instruct competitors to withdraw from the event prior to finishing when
the time limit has been reached or when the number of competitors required for subsequent
rounds have qualified by completing the race without disqualification.

SEEDING
Seeding shall be used.

4.1

Seeding in heats
For the first round of an event, entries from the same club or nation will be seeded in different heats
if possible.

4.2

Seeding in semi-finals and finals
A.
B.

C.

D.

E.

F.

4.3

Seeding is required for all rounds after the heats. Seeding for further rounds, quarter-finals,
semi-finals, and finals shall be based on the result of heats.
Based on the results of heats, and/or further rounds, or semi-finals, the top 16 competitors or
teams shall be assigned places in the final of the following events: Surf Race, Surf Teams Race,
Run-Swim-Run, Beach Run, Surf Ski Race, Surf Ski Relay, Board Race, Board Relay,
Oceanman/Oceanwoman, Oceanman/ Oceanwoman Relay.
Where required (for point score purposes, etc.) A- and B-finals shall be conducted in thefollowing events: Beach Flags, Rescue Tube Race, Rescue Tube Rescue, Beach Sprint, Beach
Relay and Board Rescue. Based on the results of heats or semi-finals, the top eight competitors
or teams shall be assigned places in the A-final. The ninth through sixteenth top competitors or
teams shall be assigned places in the B-final.
When one or more competitors or teams withdraw from a final of 16 or more competitor/team,
up to a maximum of four competitors or teams shall be called forward from the reserves list.
Reserves will come from the same qualifying race as the withdrawn competitor or team. The
final shall not be re-seeded.
Where one or more competitors or teams are called up to an A-Final of 8 competitors orwithdraw from a B-final, alternate competitors up to a maximum of four competitors shall becalled forward from the heats. The B final shall not be reseeded. Should insufficient reserves
be on standby the B final shall progress with those who have marshalled. Reserves will comefrom the same qualifying race as the withdrawn competitor or team. The B-final shall not be reseeded.
Ties: When a tie occurs that qualifies for a final, if possible (in terms of the number ofcompetitors), the tied competitors or teams shall advance to the appropriate final. If there areinsufficient places available in the final, a repêcharge heat shall be conducted between the tiedcompetitors or teams to determine the finalists.

Draws for position
The initial draw for heats and beach positions may be conducted by competition management andsupplied to teams. Draws for positions in subsequent rounds (e.g., quarter-finals, semi-finals, andfinals) shall be made by competition officials.
The method used for the draws, including draws for initial heats, and seeding of competitors, shallbe approved by the Chief Referee.

4.4

Beach positions
For swimming, surf ski, board, multi-discipline, and surf boat events, starting positions and lanes
shall be consecutively numbered from the left (facing the water) starting with the number 1. For beach
events, the number 1 position shall be nearest the water.

4.5

Competitor limits
The Chief Referee shall decide whether events shall be conducted in heats, quarter finals, semifinals, or finals. The recommended maximum number of competitors in a heat or final race shall not
exceed the numbers in the following chart. Only the competition committee and Chief Referee may
authorise changes to these maximum numbers with due consideration for effective judging,environmental conditions, safety considerations and fairness for all competitors.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 4 – Beach and Ocean Events

Event
Surf Race
Rescue Tube Race
Run-Swim-Run
Beach Flags
Beach Sprint
Beach Run – 2km and 1km
3 x1km Beach Run Relay
Surf Ski
Board Race
Oceanman/Oceanwoman
Ocean M
Surf Teams Race
Rescue Tube Rescue
Beach Relay
Surf Ski Relay
Board Relay
Board Rescue
Oceanman/Oceanwoman Relay
Ocean M Lifesaver Relay

Page S4-7

Maximum Number of Competitors/Race
32 competitors
9 competitors
32 competitors
16 competitors (8 in finals or up to 16 in team point scorecompetitions e.g. LWCs)
10 competitors (8 in finals)
40 competitors
40 Teams of 3 competitors
16 competitors
16 competitors
16 competitors (24 for the Eliminator)
24 competitors
10 teams of 3 competitors
9 teams of 4 competitors
10 teams of 4 competitors (8 in finals)
16 teams of 3 competitors
16 teams of 3 competitors
9 teams of 2 competitors
16 teams of 4 competitors
24 teams of 4 competitors

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 4 – Beach and Ocean Events

5.

SURF RACE

5.1

Event description

Page S4-8

With a running start into the water from the start line on the beach, competitors swim around the
400m (280m for Masters) course designated by buoys, returning to shore to finish between the finish
flags on the beach.
To facilitate the recording of placing after the finish, competitors may be positioned either:••
5.2

On a straight line drawn at approximately a 30-degree angle from the finishing line and up thebeach.
On a series of lines 10m behind and at right angles to the finishing line and 5m apart.

The course
As shown in the following diagram, the U-shaped course shall be approximately 400m from start tofinish. To ensure fair starts and finishes, alignment of the start line and finish line to the buoys may
be altered at the discretion of the Chief Referee, depending on the prevailing sea conditions.
The start line – shall be designated by a line in the sand between two poles or a brightly coloured
cord stretched between two poles approximately 40m apart. The start line shall be situatedapproximately 5m from the water’s edge and centred on buoy number 1.
The finish line – between two green (or area coloured) flags positioned 5m apart – shall be situatedapproximately 15m from the water’s edge, centred on buoy number 9.
The swimming course shall be marked by buoys (as indicated on the diagram) the furthest situatedapproximately 170m beyond knee-deep water. Water distances may vary depending upon
conditions.

5.3

Judging
At the starting signal the competitors shall commence from the start line, enter the water without
impeding any other competitors in the event, swim to and around the buoys, and return to shore andfinish between the two green finish flags.
Note: Competitors may touch buoys and buoy ropes but are not permitted to use buoy ropes to dragthemselves along the course.
Competitors must finish on their feet in an upright position. The finish is judged on the competitor’schest crossing the finish line.
Judges shall be placed to observe the conduct of the event as well as determine competitors’ placeat the finish line.

5.4

Disqualification
In addition to the General Rules in Section 2 and those outlined in S4-1 to 4-3, the following behaviour
shall result in disqualification:
A.

Failure to complete the course as defined and described (DQ12).

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 4 – Beach and Ocean Events

Page S4-9

FIGURE 14: SURF RACE(Distances approximate only.)
Note: The beach setup relative to the positioning of the buoys may be adjusted dependent on the sea
conditions.
AGE GROUP
Open and Youth
Masters

APPROXIMATE DISTANCE
170m to back set of buoys
120m to front set of buoys

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 4 – Beach and Ocean Events

6.

SURF TEAMS RACE

6.1

Event description

Page S4-10

With a running start into the water from the start line on the beach, all three members of each teamswim around the 400m (280m for Masters) course designated by buoys, returning to shore to finish
between the finish flags on the beach.
Marshalling: The three members of each team shall be marshalled behind each other facing thewater’s edge in their drawn positions. The next team shall be lined up beside the first team and soon.
When all teams are assembled, a direction shall be given to face the competition area. On the
direction of an official the line of competitors nearest the water’s edge shall file onto the competitionarea with the No.1 position to the left facing the water. The first line of competitors is then followedby the second, and third lines. (This procedure spreads competitors from each team over the starting
line.)
Points: Points are allotted as follows: one for first, two for second, three for third, four for fourth, etc.
The team scoring the least number of points will be declared the winner. Should two or more teams
be allotted equal points, the team whose full complement of members first completes the course shallbe awarded the higher placing.
All competitors who finish shall be recorded as they are placed, and the points will be calculated. If
any teams are disqualified, places shall be reallocated, and points then calculated.
If Surf and Surf Teams races are combined, swimmers not in teams shall be eliminated from thepoints allotment for the purpose of determining the teams race result.
6.2

The course
The Surf Teams Race is conducted over the course provided for the Surf Race as shown in thefollowing diagram. To ensure fair starts and finishes, alignment of the start line and finish line to thebuoys may be altered at the discretion of the Chief Referee, depending on the prevailing sea
conditions.

6.3

Judging
At the starting signal the competitors shall commence from the start line, enter the water without
impeding any other competitors in the event, swim to and around the buoys, and return to shore andfinish between the two green finish flags.
Note: Competitors may touch buoys and buoy ropes but are not permitted to use buoy ropes to dragthemselves along the course.
Competitors must finish on their feet in an upright position. The finish is judged on the competitor’schest crossing the finish line.
Judges shall be placed to observe the conduct of the event as well as determine competitors’ placeat the finish line.

6.4

Disqualification
In addition to the General Rules in Section 2 and those outlined in S4-1 to 4-3, the following behaviour
shall result in disqualification: Failure to complete the course as defined and described (DQ12).

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 4 – Beach and Ocean Events

Page S4-11

FIGURE 15: SURF TEAMS RACE(Distances approximate only.)
Note: The beach setup relative to the positioning of the buoys may be adjusted dependent on the sea
conditions.
AGE GROUP
Open and Youth
Masters

APPROXIMATE DISTANCE
170m to back set of buoys
120m to front set of buoys

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 4 – Beach and Ocean Events

7.

RESCUE TUBE RESCUE

7.1

Event description

Page S4-12

Four competitors from each team participate in this event: a “victim,” one rescue tube swimmer, andtwo rescuers. The victim swims approximately 120m to a designated buoy, signals, and waits to be
rescued by the rescue tube swimmer. As they return to shore, the remaining two rescuers enter thewater to assist. The event finishes when the first competitor in a team crosses the finish line while incontact with the victim.
A.

B.

C.
D.
E.

7.2

The start: All four competitors assemble at their team’s allotted position at the start line. Prior
to the start signal, the rescue tube swimmer and equipment must be on the shoreward side of
the start/finish line. The rescue tube swimmer may hold or don the rescue tube and may holdthe swim fins in their hands. Rescue tubes may be worn either with the loop over or across one
or two shoulders, or over the shoulder and across the chest. Fins may not be worn prior tocrossing the start line.
•
On the starting signal, the victim enters the water, swims to touch the allotted buoy,
signalling arrival by raising the other arm to a vertical position while in contact with thebuoy. The victim then waits in the water on the seaward side of the buoy.
•
Note 1: The buoy is defined as the buoy only and does not include any attaching ropes
and/or straps. Competitors must visibly touch the buoy above the water line before
signalling their arrival at the buoy.
•
Note 2: Competitors may touch buoys and buoy ropes but are not permitted to use buoy
ropes to drag themselves along the course to reach their allotted buoy.
•
The Chief Referee may determine an acceptable alternative method of clearly signallingthe victim has touched the buoy.
•
Competitors must start from the correct allotted position. Competitors swimming to andsignalling from the wrong buoy shall be disqualified.
Rescue tube swimmer: On the victim’s arrival signal, and from the correct allotted position, therescue tube swimmer crosses the start line, dons the equipment at their discretion, and swims
past the left side (viewed from the beach) of the designated buoy to the victim waiting on theseaward side of the buoy. The rescue swimmer secures the rescue tube correctly around thevictim’s body and under both arms and clipped to an O-ring. The victim may assist with thesecuring and clipping of the rescue tube. With the victim clipped into the rescue tube,
competitors continue (clockwise) around the buoy towing the victim to the beach.
Note: Competitors may touch buoys and buoy ropes but are not permitted to use buoy ropes
to drag themselves along the course to reach their allotted buoy.
Rescuers: After the rescue tube swimmer has started to tow the victim to the beach, the two
rescuers, at their discretion, may cross the start line to enter the water and assist the rescue
tube swimmer to bring the victim to the beach.
The victim must be dragged or carried to the finish.
The finish is judged on the chest of the first team member crossing the finish line on their feetin an upright position while still in contact with the victim (the rescue tube need not be attached).
Note 1: It is not required for the rescue tube swimmer to assist rescuers drag or carry the victim
to the finish line or for the rescue tube swimmer to cross the finish line.
Note 2: While it is not necessary to drag the whole of the victim beyond the finish line teams
are requested to immediately move to the shoreward side of the finish line to assist with judging
of the event and to enable any trailing teams to finish.

Notes
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.

All team members must start from their allotted positions at the start line.
Rescue tube swimmers and the rescuers, who have previously crossed over the start line (forwhatever reason), will not be disqualified provided they return to the shoreward side of the startline prior to beginning their leg of the event.
At the start, rescue tube swimmers may place the rescue tubes and fins on the shoreward sideof the start/finish line or may hold their fins and rescue tubes in their hands. The rescue tube
lanyard may be donned.
Rescue tubes must be donned correctly, either with the loop over one shoulder, or over theshoulder and across the chest – at the competitor’s discretion.
The victim may assist the rescue tube swimmer in securing the rescue tube. Either may clip-in
the rescue tube, but the victim must be clipped into the tube behind the buoy line.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 4 – Beach and Ocean Events

F.
G.
H.

I.
J.
7.3

Page S4-13

Rescue tube swimmers must tow the victim with the tube secured around the body and underboth arms and clipped in an O-ring.
The victim must be towed on their back and the victim cannot be towed in any other way thanclipped into the rescue tube.
The victim is permitted to assist by sculling under the surface of the water and kicking, but theymust not swim backstroke or any other swim style with an out-of-water recovery.
Note: The victim repositioning their arms to a position in front of their head to streamline or forprotection is not a disqualification.
At no time, may the victim assist by walking or running, but the victim may assist by lifting thelegs during the carry.
Only the rescue tube swimmer may use the swim fins. Rescuers shall not use any equipment
or swim fins.

The course
As shown in the following diagram, the course shall be approximately 240m. To ensure fair starts
and finishes, alignment of the start line and finish line to the buoys may be altered at the discretionof the Chief Referee, depending on the prevailing sea conditions.
A.

B.
7.4

The start/finish line: shall be designated by a line in the sand between two poles carrying
green (or area coloured) flags or a brightly coloured cord stretched between the two poles,
approximately 54m apart and located at the water’s edge. Alignment of the start line to thebuoys may be altered at the discretion of the Chief Referee, depending on prevailing sea
conditions. Any cord placed at the start line may be removed once competitors are in line andprior to the start if there is any concern that the rescue tube may catch on it.
The swimming buoys shall be placed as for the Surf Race, so that all competitors have an
equal chance with regard to sandbanks and rips, etc.

Equipment
Rescue tube, swim fins: See Section 8.
Unless otherwise advised, competitors must use rescue tubes provided by organisers.

7.5

JudgingFinish Judges shall be positioned at each end of the finishing line at least 5m from the flagpole andin line with each flagpole. An in-boat Course Judge shall be positioned in line with the buoys as
shown in the diagram.
Infringements recorded during the event observed by any of the Judges shall be reported to the Chief
Referee who shall adjudicate on the infringement with the Judges concerned. An in-boat Judgeobserving an infringement shall report to the Chief Referee as soon as practical and prior to the race
result being declared.

7.6

Disqualification
In addition to the General Rules in Section 2 and those outlined in S4-1 to 4-3, the following behaviour
shall result in disqualification: Failure to complete the course as defined and described (DQ12).

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 4 – Beach and Ocean Events

Page S4-14

FIGURE 16: RESCUE TUBE RESCUE(Distances approximate only.)
Note: The beach setup relative to the positioning of the buoys may be adjusted dependent on the sea
conditions.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 4 – Beach and Ocean Events

8.

RESCUE TUBE RACE

8.1

Event description

Page S4-15

Rescue tubes and fins are placed on the beach, approximately 15m from the water’s edge in linewith the competitor’s designated buoy peg.
Competitors take their positions on the starting line approximately 5m from the water’s edge.
On the starting signal, competitors race up the beach to obtain their rescue tubes and fins, anddonning the equipment at their discretion, enter the water and swim toward and around (the left side,viewed from the beach) their designated buoy to return to the beach and cross the finish line.
Note: Competitors may touch buoys and buoy ropes but are not permitted to use buoy ropes to dragthemselves along the course to reach their allotted buoy.
The finish is judged on the chest of the competitor crossing the finish line in an upright position inpossession of both fins and with the rescue tube strap over the shoulder.
Note: At the start, the rescue tube and fins must be positioned at competitors’ discretion at and on
the seaward side of the competitors’ designated buoy peg.
Note: Rescue tubes may be worn either with the loop over one or two shoulders, or over the shoulder
and across the chest.
8.2

The course
The Rescue Tube Race shall be conducted under the general rules of the Rescue Tube Rescue.
The course shall be the same as the Rescue Tube Rescue as shown in the following diagram.
To ensure fair starts and finishes, alignment of the start line and finish line to the buoys may bealtered at the discretion of the Chief Referee, depending on the prevailing sea conditions.

8.3

Judging
An in-boat Judge shall be positioned in line with the buoys as shown in the diagram. Finish Judges
shall be positioned at each end of the finish line at least 5m from the flag pole and in line with eachflag pole.

8.4

Equipment
Rescue tube: See Section 8.
Unless otherwise advised competitors must use rescue tubes supplied by organisers.

8.5

Disqualification
In addition to the General Rules in Section 2 and those outlined in S4-1 to 4-3, the following behaviour
shall result in disqualification: Failure to complete the course as defined and described (DQ12).

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 4 – Beach and Ocean Events

Page S4-16

FIGURE 17: RESCUE TUBE RACE(Distances approximate only.)
Note: The beach setup relative to the positioning of the buoys may be adjusted dependent on the sea
conditions.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 4 – Beach and Ocean Events

9.

RUN - SWIM – RUN

9.1

Event description

Page S4-17

From the start line, competitors run to pass around the turning flag and enter the water to swim out
to and around the buoys. Competitors swim back to the beach to again run round the turning flag
before running to the finish line.
Note: Competitors may touch buoys and buoy ropes but are not permitted to use buoy ropes to dragthemselves along the course.
9.2

The course
As shown in the following diagram, the course shall be laid out so that competitors run approximately
200m, swim approximately 300m, and run approximately 200m to finish between two green (or area
coloured) flags.

9.3

Judging
Competitors must finish on their feet in an upright position. The finish is judged on the competitor’schest crossing the finish line.
Judges shall be placed to observe the conduct of the event as well as determine competitors’ placeat the finish line.

9.4

Disqualification
In addition to the General Rules in Section 2 and those outlined in S4-1 to 4-3, the following behaviour
shall result in disqualification: Failure to complete the course as defined and described (DQ12).

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 4 – Beach and Ocean Events

Page S4-18

FIGURE 18: RUN – SWIM – RUN(Distances approximate only.)
Note: The beach setup relative to the positioning of the buoys may be adjusted dependent on the sea
conditions.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 4 – Beach and Ocean Events

10.

BEACH FLAGS

10.1

Event description

Page S4-19

From a prone starting position on the beach in their allotted position, competitors rise, turn and race
approximately 20m to obtain a baton (beach flag) seated upright in the sand with about two-thirds
showing. Since there are always fewer batons than competitors, those who fail to obtain a baton are
eliminated.
Competitors lie face down with their toes on the start line with heels or any part of the feet together,hands on top of each other with fingertips to wrists and with the head up. Elbows should be extended
90 degrees to the body’s midline and hips and stomach (abdomen) must be in contact with the sand.
The body’s midline should be 90 degrees to the start line.
Note 1: Competitors may level, flatten, and compress their starting area. Competitors are notpermitted to create mounds or unreasonably alter the incline of the sand to assist the start.
Note 2: Competitors may dig their toes into the sand at the start line by digging with their hands orfeet before lying on the sand, or with their feet after lying on the sand.
Note 3: Competitors must comply with the direction of officials. A competitor who causes
unreasonable delay to the start of the event may be penalized (DQ8).
10.2

Start procedure
Beach Flags start procedure is different from the procedure described in 4.2 “The Start”. For Beach
Flags, the start is as follows:
Prior to the start, a Marshall shall:
A.
B.

Place competitors in the order as drawn for the run-through.
Accompany competitors to the starting area to ensure they are positioned in proper order.

The Chief/Sectional Referee shall:
A.
B.
C.
D.
10.3

Check that all technical officials and equipment are in position.
Signal the official start of each race with a long whistle indicating that the competitors shouldtake their positions on the start line.
Signal the Starter that the competitors are under the Starter’s control.
The Starter shall be positioned out of view of the competitors.

The start
On the Starter’s “Competitors Ready” command, competitors shall assume the starting position as
described. On the Starter’s “Heads Down” command, competitors – at once and without delay – shallplace their chins on their hands.
A.
B.

10.4

After a deliberate pause and when all competitors are stationary, the Starter shall signal thestart with a whistle blast.
At the start signal, competitors shall rise to their feet and race to obtain a baton.

Starting infringements
The following behaviours are starting infringements in Beach Flags:
A.
B.

10.5

Failure to comply with the Starter’s commands within a reasonable time.
Lifting any part of the body from the sand or commencing any starting motion after the Starter’s“Heads down” command and prior to the start signal.
If a competitor is disqualified or eliminated, the remaining competitors and batons shall be
realigned with no re-draw of positions. The run-through shall continue with the current starting
infringement in force until a fair start is affected.

Draw for positions
There shall be a preliminary draw for positions and further draws after each round. In semi-finals andfinals when contestants have been reduced to eight, there shall be a draw for positions after eachrun-through.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 4 – Beach and Ocean Events

10.6

Page S4-20

Number of competitors eliminated
In heats, the Chief Referee shall determine whether one or two competitors are to be eliminated ineach run-through. In semi-finals and finals, no more than one competitor can be eliminated in any
run-through.

10.7

Run-offs
A run-off between the competitors involved shall be called if two or more competitors hold the samebaton, and Judges cannot determine which competitor’s hand grasped the baton first – regardlessof the hand position on the baton. Likewise, a run-off between the competitors involved shall becalled if a baton is “lost” in the sand. If it is apparent that a baton has been “lost” to competitors inthe sand, the finish judge shall signal (by whistle or verbally) that the baton is “lost” and that the runthrough is finished.

10.8

The course
As shown in the following diagram, the course shall be approximately 20m from the start line to thebatons, and wide enough to provide for a minimum spacing of 1.5m between each of 16 competitors.
Batons shall be positioned in line parallel to the start line, and so that a “perpendicular line” between
any two adjacent competitors shall pass approximately through the base of the baton. In other words,
batons are aligned on the baton line equidistant between adjacent competitors.
The Beach Flags arena should be free of debris, and if the sand surface is hard, it should be raked
to make it safer before and throughout the competition.

10.9

Equipment and apparel
Beach flag (baton): See Section 8.
Shorts and shirts, which comply with team uniform requirements, may be worn at the competitors’
discretion.

10.10

Judging
The Chief Referee/Sectional Referee or their appointee shall be positioned to maintain overall
supervision.
The Starter and Check Starters shall be placed at either end of the starting line to observe any
starting infringements. Course Judges shall be placed on either side of the course to observe runthroughs and participation infringements.
Finish Judges shall be positioned a few metres behind the line of batons, to reclaim the baton fromsuccessful competitors and to set up the batons for the next run-through.

10.11

Elimination and disqualification
Each run-through or run-off shall be judged as a separate segment of this event. An infringement in
one segment shall not be carried over and counted against a competitor in a subsequent segment.
A competitor who commits a starting infringement or who impedes the progress of another competitor
shall be eliminated (not disqualified).
A competitor eliminated from the event shall retain the point score and/or placing as at the time inthe event. However, a competitor disqualified from the event shall lose all standing from the event.
In Beach Flags events a protest against an elimination must be lodged within 5minutes or before thenext run through of an event begins (whichever occurs first). If a Beach Flag elimination protest
occurs the Chief Referee will immediately consider the protest without delay before proceeding withthe event. There will be no Appeal permitted on Beach Flag elimination protest decisions of theReferee.
Note 1: A Chief Referee is authorised to refer a Beach Flag elimination protest directly to an onbeach Jury of Appeals representative for decision on the basis of the processes and timings detailed
above. No paperwork is required nor is a fee payable if this occurs.
Note 2: A competitor is permitted to protest and/or appeal against a disqualification decision in Beach
Flag events provided that correct processes are followed as detailed in Section 2 of this Manual.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 4 – Beach and Ocean Events

Page S4-21

Impedance: Impedance is defined as “the use of hands, arms, feet or legs to impede anothercompetitor’s progress”.
A competitor may otherwise use their body to improve their position in obtaining a baton. A competitor
may negotiate the shoulder and or body in front of an opponent, but may not use hands, arms, feet,or legs to obtain or remain in this position.
If a competitor legally obtains this front position and maintains normal running action, the competitor
behind is obliged to go around the competitor in front.
A competitor may cross over in front of a slower competitor.
If two or more competitors are guilty of impedance, the competitor who first used hands, arms, feet,or legs may be eliminated.
Notwithstanding the impedance clauses, if it is deemed that the competitor has breached the ILS
Code of Conduct and/or competed unfairly (see 2.16 Misconduct), the competitors involved may bedisqualified.
In addition to the General Rules in Section 2 and those outlined in S4-1 to 4-3, the following behaviour
shall result in disqualification:
A.
B.

Failure to complete the event as described and defined (DQ12).
Picking up or blocking more than one baton– e.g., lying on a baton or covering a baton fromsight (DQ11).

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 4 – Beach and Ocean Events

FIGURE 19: BEACH FLAGS (ONE ELIMINATION PER RUN-THROUGH)(Distances approximate only.)

FIGURE 20: BEACH FLAGS (TWO ELIMINATIONS PER RUN-THROUGH)(Distances approximate only.)
AGE GROUP
Open and Youth
Masters

DISTANCE
20m
15m

Page S4-22

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 4 – Beach and Ocean Events

11.

BEACH SPRINT (90M AND 70M)

11.1

Event description

Page S4-23

Competitors take their positions in their allotted lanes. At the starting signal, competitors race the
90m (70m for Masters) course to the finish line. The finish is judged on the competitor’s chest (only)
crossing the finish line. Competitors must finish the event on their feet in an upright position.
11.2

The start
No artificial starting blocks are permitted, but competitors may create holes and/or hillocks in and ofsand to aid their start. Competitors are not permitted to use any material other than sand to aid thestart. Competitors are permitted to flatten or level the sand in their lanes.

11.3

The course
As shown in the following diagram, the beach sprint course shall be 90m (70m for Masters) from thestart line to the finish line. An area of approximately 20m is to be provided at the start end formarshalling and at the finish end for competitor overrun.
The course shall be rectangular and “squared” to ensure that all competitors run the same distance,
and it shall be designated by four distinctly coloured poles, 2 m high.
Running lanes separated by coloured ropes shall be laid on the beach to assist runners in keeping
a straight course. The lanes shall be laid 1.8 m in width where possible with a minimum width of
1.5m.
Competitors must remain in their own lane throughout the course.
Numbered pegs identifying running lanes shall be placed before the starting mark and beyond thefinishing line.
A marshalling line shall be made 5m to the rear and parallel to the starting mark and designated bypoles 2 m high.

11.4

Equipment and apparel
Baton: See Section 8.
Shorts and shirts, which comply with team uniform requirements, may be worn at the competitors’
discretion.
Competitors may be required to wear coloured bibs to assist in judging.

11.5

Judging
The Chief Referee/Sectional Referee shall be positioned to maintain overall supervision.
Two Course Judges shall be appointed to ensure the competitors run the course as described.
Finish Judges shall select placings. The competitors shall be placed in the order in which any part oftheir chest crosses the finish line. Competitors must cross the line on their feet in an upright position.

11.6

Disqualification
In addition to the General Rules in Section 2 and General Conditions for ocean competition in S4-1
to 4-3, the following behaviour shall result in disqualification:
A.

Failure to complete the course as defined and described (DQ12).

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 4 – Beach and Ocean Events

FIGURE 21: BEACH SPRINT(Distances approximate only.)
AGE GROUP
Open and Youth
Masters

DISTANCE
90m
70m

Page S4-24

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 4 – Beach and Ocean Events

12.

BEACH RELAY

12.1

Event description

Page S4-25

Teams of four individuals (three in Masters) compete in baton relay fashion over a 90m (70m for
Masters) course. To start, two (one and two members in Masters) competitors take positions in theirallotted lane at each end of the course.
After the start each competitor completes a leg of the course with a baton held in either hand andpasses the baton at the conclusion of the first, second, and third legs to the next runner. All
competitors shall finish their leg of the event on their feet and in an upright position.
Competitors are not permitted to interfere with the progress of other competitors.
12.2

The start
The start shall be as for the beach sprint with the first competitor taking the mark.

12.3

Baton changeovers
The baton shall be exchanged in the following manner:
A.
B.
C.
D.

12.4

The competitor coming in to exchange the baton must carry the baton to the front line. (Thebaton may not be thrown to the next competitor.)
Competitors receiving the baton on the first, second, and third exchange can be moving while
taking the baton but will be disqualified if any part of the body or hands cross the front line
before taking possession of the baton.
If a baton is dropped during the exchange, the receiver may recover the baton (ensuring that
there is no interference to other competitors) and continue the race in their allotted lane.
If a baton is dropped at any other stage, the competitor may recover the baton (providing that
there is no interference to other competitors) and continue the race in their allotted lane.

The course
The course shall be similar to the Beach Sprint as shown in the following diagram.

12.5

Equipment and apparel
Baton: See Section 8.
Shorts and shirts, which comply with team uniform requirements, may be worn at the competitors’
discretion.
Competitors may be required to wear coloured bibs to assist in judging.

12.6

Judging/changeovers
In general, judging shall be as for the beach sprint with the Chief Referee, Course Judge, and theFinish Judges assuming similar duties in regard to the start and finish.
Course Judges shall be appointed to check the changeover lines for infringements at each end during
the changeovers.
Any infringements observed by the Course Judges shall be reported to the Chief Referee/Sectional
Referee in the case of the changeovers.

12.7

Disqualification
In addition to the General Rules in Section 2 and those outlined in S4-1 to 4-3, the following behaviour
shall result in disqualification: Failure to complete the course as defined and described (DQ12).

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 4 – Beach and Ocean Events

FIGURE 22: BEACH RELAY(Distances approximate only.)
AGE GROUP
Open and Youth
Masters

DISTANCE
90m
70m

Page S4-26

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 4 – Beach and Ocean Events

13.

BEACH RUN (2KM AND 1KM)

13.1

Event description – 2km

Page S4-27

Competitors race 2km on the beach. The course design shall maintain the total distance and be set
based on the venue’s features. The default lap distance is 500metres. The Chief Referee may set a
1km lap distance on beaches with more room.
On the starting signal, competitors race along the left side of the lane to round clockwise or righthand in or as otherwise advised by the Referee) the turning poles 250m distant and return 250m
toward the start/turn flags.
Competitors round all turning flags (clockwise or right hand in or as otherwise advised by the Referee)at the start/turn line, proceed back down the beach to round the turning flags as before and repeat
four times. On the last lap competitors cross the finish line to complete the race.
Deliberately jostling or obstructing another competitor so as to impede their progress is not permitted.
Judges shall be placed to observe the conduct of the event as well as determine competitors’ placeat the finish line.
The finish is judged on the competitor’s chest crossing the finish line. Competitors must finish on
their feet in an upright position.
13.2

Event description – 1km
Competitors race 1km on the beach on the course as described above.

13.3

The course
The course (as shown in the following diagram) shall be laid out on the beach (on soft sand wherepractical) parallel to the water’s edge.
The start line shall be designated by a line in the sand, or a brightly coloured synthetic cord stretchedbetween two poles with green and yellow flags attached. The finish line shall be two green flags
placed approximately 5m apart and on the shoreward side of the start/turn line. The Chief Referee
shall determine the length of the start/turn line.
Running lanes: The course shall be divided into two lanes parallel to the waterline The lane closest
to the water shall be for legs running from the start/finish lines. The lanes shall be divided by colouredtape, bunting, or other appropriate material.
Note: Should the course be run in the reverse direction the outwards legs shall be on the shoreward
side and the return legs on the water side.
Two poles with green and yellow flags attached approximately 5m apart and situated approximately
250m from the start at the end of the lane divider shall designate the turning point.

13.4

Equipment and apparel
Shorts and shirts, which comply with team uniform requirements, may be worn at the competitors’
discretion. Footwear is optional.

13.5

Judging
The Chief Referee/Sectional Referee shall be positioned at one side of the course to maintain overall
supervision.
Course Judges may be appointed to ensure the competitors run the course without interference toother competitors.
A Judge shall be positioned at the turning poles to ensure no unnecessary jostling or interference
occurs.
Finish Judges shall select placings.

13.6

Disqualification
In addition to the General Rules in Section 2 and those outlined in S4-1 to 4-3, the following behaviour
shall result in disqualification: Failure to complete the course as defined and described (DQ12).

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 4 – Beach and Ocean Events

FIGURE 23: BEACH RUN (1KM AND 2KM)(Distances approximate only.)
DISTANCE
1km Beach Run
2km Beach Run

COURSE2 x 500m legs
4 x 500m legs

Page S4-28

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 4 – Beach and Ocean Events

14.

BEACH RUN RELAY (3 X 1KM)

14.1

Event description – 3 x 1km

Page S4-29

Three competitors race 1km each on the beach. The course design shall maintain the total distanceand be set based on the venue’s features. The default lap distance is 500metres. Alternatively, forbeaches with more room, the Chief Referee may set a 1km lap distance.
On the starting signal, competitor’s race along the left side of the lane to round the turning poles(clockwise or right hand in) and return to the turning flags and repeats the course. The incoming
competitor rounds the first turning flag (clockwise or right hand in) and tags with the outgoingcompetitor who is waiting at a line approximately in the centre of the changeover zone as directedby the relevant official in the changeover zone between the first and second turning flags. The tag
must take place after the first turning flag and before the outgoing competitor rounds the second theturning flags.
The second competitor completes the same course as outlined above.
The third competitor completes the same course as outlined above before crossing the finish line.
Deliberately jostling or obstructing another competitor or team so as to impede their progress is not
permitted.
Judges shall be placed to observe the conduct of the event as well as determine competitors’ placeat the finish line.
The finish is judged on the competitor’s chest crossing the finish line. Competitors must finish on
their feet in an upright position.
14.2

The course
The course (as shown in the following diagram) shall be laid out on the beach (on soft sand wherepractical) parallel to the water’s edge in two lanes.
The start line shall be designated by a line in the sand, or a brightly coloured synthetic cord stretchedbetween two poles with green and yellow flags attached. The finish line shall be two green flags
placed approximately 5m apart and on the shoreward side of the start/turn line. The Chief Referee
shall determine the length of the start/turn line.
Running lanes: The course shall be divided into two lanes parallel to the waterline The lane closest
to the water shall be for legs running from the start/finish lines (first leg for both team members). The
lanes shall be divided by coloured tape, bunting, or other appropriate material.
Note: Should the course be run in the reverse direction the outwards legs shall be on the shoreward
side and the return legs on the water side.
Two poles with green and yellow flags attached approximately 5m apart and situated approximately
250m from the start at the end of the lane divider shall designate the turning point.

14.3

Equipment and apparel
Baton: See Section 8.
Shorts and shirts, which comply with team uniform requirements, may be worn at the competitors’
discretion. Footwear is optional.

14.4

Judging
The Chief Referee/Sectional Referee shall be positioned at one side of the course to maintain overall
supervision.
Course Judges may be appointed to ensure the competitors run the course without interference toother competitors.
A Judge shall be positioned at the turning poles to ensure no unnecessary jostling or interference
occurs.
Finish Judges shall select placings.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 4 – Beach and Ocean Events

14.5

Page S4-30

Disqualification
In addition to the General Rules in Section 2 and those outlined in 4.1 through 4.3, the following
behaviour shall result in disqualification: Failure to complete the course as defined and described(DQ12).

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 4 – Beach and Ocean Events

FIGURE 24: BEACH RUN RELAY(Distances approximate only.)
DISTANCE
3 x1km Beach Run Relay

COURSE3 x 1km (2 x 500m legs foreach competitor)

Page S4-31

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 4 – Beach and Ocean Events

15.

SURF SKI RACE

15.1

Event description

Page S4-32

A Single Surf Ski is a craft propelled primarily by a competitor with a paddle. Refer to the ILS Facility
and Equipment Standards Section for details.
Competitors steady their surf skis in line in approximately knee-deep water about 1.5m apart.
Competitors must obey directions from the Starter or Check Starter concerning surf ski alignment at
the start.
On the starting signal, competitors paddle their surf skis around the course marked by buoys andreturn to finish when any part of the surf ski crosses the in-water finish line – ridden, gripped, or
carried by the competitor.
Competitors may lose contact with or control of their surf ski without necessarily being disqualified.
To complete the race, competitors must have (or have regained) their surf ski and paddle and crossthe in-water finish line from the seaward side while maintaining contact with the surf ski and paddle.
Competitors are not permitted to hold or otherwise interfere with other competitors’ surf skis ordeliberately impede their progress.
Dry start and finish: If conditions are such that the Starter cannot provide a fair start, a dry start
and/or dry finish shall be used. See below.
15.2

The course
The course layout shall be as detailed in the following diagram.
To ensure fair starts and finishes, alignment of the start line and finish line to the buoys may bealtered at the discretion of the Chief Referee, depending on the prevailing water conditions.
Buoys: Three orange (or area coloured) buoys equal in size to a 50 litre drum shall be used: two“turning buoys” shall be placed approximately 75m apart, and a minimum of 300m (250m for Masters)
paddling distance from knee depth water at low tide mark. The third “apex” buoy shall be placed
midway and approximately 15m seaward of the turning buoys thus forming an arc with them.
The start line need not necessarily be identified, but if required it shall be marked by two poles andpositioned so that the centre of the start line is aligned with the first turning buoy.
The finish line shall be between two orange (or area coloured) flags mounted on stands or poles orother suitable markers in a position where the craft will finish afloat. The centre of the finish line isaligned with the third turning buoy (allowing for prevailing surf conditions).

15.3

Dry Start and Dry finish
For a dry start, competitors, with their skis and paddles line up in their drawn positions between two
start 2m poles approximately 5m from the water’s edge and 35m apart.
At the Starters signal the competitors at their own discretion carry their craft to the water and paddle
the surf ski course as per the diagram.
The dry finish line shall be situated on the beach approximately 15m from the water’s edge. It shallbe 20m in length and marked at each end by a flag on a 4m pole. Finish flags shall be the same
colour(s) as the course buoys.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.

Competitors must paddle their surf skis around the last course buoy and shall not be disqualified
if they lose contact with or control of their craft or paddle after the last course buoy on the return.
Competitors need not finish with craft or paddle.
The finish is judged on the competitor’s chest crossing the finish line. Competitors must finish
on their feet in an upright position.
A member of the competitor’s team assists with the removal of the competitor’s craft and paddle
from the course. With the Chief Referee’s approval, non-team members may act as handlers,
provided they are registered in the competition in some capacity.
Handlers shall:•
Wear a competition cap.
•
Wear a distinctive high visibility vest as required by the organisers if entering water beyond
knee depth.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 4 – Beach and Ocean Events

•
•
15.4

Page S4-33

Make every effort to ensure that they and the equipment they are handling do not impede
other competitors (otherwise disqualification may result).
Comply with all instructions of the officials.

Equipment
Surf ski and paddle: See Section 8.
Replacement surf skis or paddles for a competitor are permitted and may be brought to the water’sedge by other team members providing such replacement does not cause any interference to othercompetitors in the race and further provided that the competitor shall recommence the race from theoriginal starting area.

15.5

Judging
Judges shall be placed to observe the conduct of the event and to determine competitors’ place at
the finish.

15.6

Disqualification
In addition to the General Rules in Section 2 and those outlined S4-1 to 4-3, the following behaviour
shall result in disqualification: Failure to complete the course as defined and described (DQ12).

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 4 – Beach and Ocean Events

Page S4-34

FIGURE 25: SURF SKI RACE(Distances approximate only.)
Note: The beach setup relative to the positioning of the buoys may be adjusted dependent on the sea
conditions.
AGE GROUP
Open and Youth
Masters

DISTANCE
300m to base buoys
250m to base buoys

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 4 – Beach and Ocean Events

16.

SURF SKI RELAY

16.1

Event description

Page S4-35

The surf ski relay race shall be conducted under the general rules of the surf ski race. Teams shallconsist of three competitors, who may use the same craft.
Competitors must obey the Starter’s or Check Starter’s directions concerning surf ski alignment at
the start.
First competitor: Competitors for the first leg of the relay shall be started as in the surf ski race andpaddle around the buoys. Having completed the course, the first competitor may leave their craft(and paddle), round the two green and yellow turning flags and tags with the second competitor on
the designated surf ski changeover line.
Second competitor: The second competitor completes the same course, rounds the two turning
flags, and tags with the third competitor on the designated surf ski changeover line.
Third competitor: The third competitor completes the same course, rounds one turning flag, passes
the other flag on the shoreward side, and finishes between the two finish flags.
Competitors in the surf ski relay events must commence their leg of the event from the correct allotted
position.
The first and third competitor in each team commence from the team’s drawn starting position.
However, the drawn starting position is reversed for the second competitor in each team. For
example, in a 16-competitor race in which a team has drawn position 1: the first competitor
commences from position 1; the second competitor commences from position 16; the third competitor
commences from position 1.
1st & 3rd competitor’s starting position

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

…

16

2nd competitor’s starting position

16

15

14

13

12

11

10

9

…

1

Competitors are not permitted to hold or otherwise interfere with other competitors’ surf skis ordeliberately impede their progress.
16.2

The course
The course layout shall be as detailed in the following diagram. The finish is between two green (orarea coloured) flags.
In the surf ski relay, the start/changeover line is located in the water. To ensure fair starts andfinishes, alignment of the start line and finish line to the buoys may be altered at the discretion of the
Chief Referee, depending on the prevailing water conditions.

16.3

Equipment and apparel
Surf ski and paddle: See Section 8.
A.

B.
16.4

Members of the team or other members authorised by the Chief Referee shall ensure that any
craft used by any of the other team members does not cause any interference to another teamor competitor in the race. The craft shall be removed as soon as possible from the water’s edge
to avoid congestion and possible damage.
If a club enters more than one team in an event, each team shall be required to wear
distinguishing numbers or letters marked on their arm, leg, or caps.

Judging
Judges shall be placed to observe the conduct of the event and determine competitors’ place at thefinish.
Competitors must cross the finish line on their feet in an upright position. The finish is judged on thecompetitor’s chest crossing the finish line.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 4 – Beach and Ocean Events

16.5

Page S4-36

Control of craft
Competitors may lose control of or contact with the surf ski or paddle on the way out, provided theyregain the surf ski (and paddle) and round the last course buoy in contact with the craft and complete
the course.
Competitors must paddle their surf skis around the last course buoy and shall not be disqualified ifthey lose control of or contact with their craft (or paddle) after the last course buoy on the return.

16.6

Masters Ski Relay Course and Procedure VariationA.

The Ski course buoys for the Masters Ski Relay shall be as per the Oceanman/Oceanwoman
Relay Ski leg. Competitors must round all buoys in the water including the swimming buoys,
the black and white board buoys and the three orange ski buoys unless otherwise advised.
B. The two green/yellow turning flags are placed approximately 15m apart and either on the
shoreline or at knee depth water (as appropriate and taking into account prevailing surfconditions so as to minimise the run distance).
C. The two green (or area coloured) finish flags are placed on the water’s edge approximately 5mapart and approximately 5m from the second turning flag.
Note: All other conditions shall remain unaltered from the standard course.
16.7

Disqualifications
In addition to the General Rules in Section 2 and those outlined in S4-1 to 4-3, the following behaviour
shall result in disqualification: Failure to complete the course as defined and described (DQ12).

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 4 – Beach and Ocean Events

Page S4-37

FIGURE 26: OPEN AND YOUTH SURF SKI RELAY(Distances approximate only.)
Note: The beach setup relative to the positioning of the buoys may be adjusted dependent on the sea
conditions.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 4 – Beach and Ocean Events

Page S4-38

FIGURE 27: MASTERS SURF SKI RELAY(Distances approximate only.)
Note 1: The beach setup relative to the positioning of the buoys may be adjusted dependent on sea
conditions.
Note 2: The turning flags are to be set by the Referee or their delegate considering water conditions at thetime of a race e.g., the turning flags should be set back up to about 5m from the water’s edge in the event ofa steep drop off into the water and/or a heavy shore dump for safety, fairness, and practicality. However, ona flat beach and/or little wave surge, the turning flags may be placed at the water’s edge or in the water tominimise the run distance. The changeover line may be placed on the beach or in the water depending on
conditions and the placement of the turning flags.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 4 – Beach and Ocean Events

17.

BOARD RACE

17.1

Event description

Page S4-39

A surfboard is a craft propelled primarily by a competitor’s hands and arms. Refer to the ILS Facility
and Equipment Standards Section for details.
Competitors stand on or behind the start line on the beach with their boards 1.5m apart.
At the start signal, competitors enter the water, launch their boards, and paddle the course marked
by buoys, return to the beach, and run to cross the finish line.
Competitors are not permitted to hold or otherwise interfere with other competitors’ boards ordeliberately impede their progress.
17.2

The course
The course layout shall be as detailed in the following Board Race diagram.
To ensure fair starts and finishes, alignment of the start line and finish line to the buoys may bealtered at the discretion of the Chief Referee, depending on the prevailing sea conditions.
Buoys: Three black and white (or area coloured) buoys and equal in size to a 50-litre drum shall be
used: two “turning buoys” shall be placed approximately 75m apart, and a minimum 250m distance(same for Masters) from knee-depth water at low tide mark. The third “apex” buoy shall be placed
midway and approximately 15m seaward from the turning buoys thus forming an arc with them.
The start line, is depicted by a line in the sand between two poles or a bright coloured cord between
the two poles, situated on the beach approximately 5m from the water’s edge. The start line shall be
30m in length. The middle of the start line should be aligned with the first turning buoy but may bealtered at the discretion of the Chief Referee depending on the prevailing conditions to allow allcompetitors a fair passage around the first buoy.
The finish line shall be between two black and white (or area coloured) flags situated on the beachapproximately 15m from the water’s edge. It shall be 20m in length and marked at each end by a flagon a 4m pole.
The middle of the finish line should be aligned with the third turning buoy, but this may be altered by
the Chief Referee depending on the prevailing sea conditions.

17.3

Equipment
Board: See Section 8.
The use of a replacement board is permitted provided that the competitor recommences the racefrom the start line. Replacement boards may be brought to the start line by fellow team members
providing they do not cause any interference to other competitors.

17.4

Judging
The finish is judged on the competitor’s chest crossing the finish line. Competitors must finish on
their feet in an upright position while in control of the board.

17.5

Control of Craft
Competitors may lose contact with or control of their board without necessarily being disqualified. To
complete the race, competitors must have (or have regained) their board and cross the finish linefrom the seaward side while maintaining contact with their craft.

17.6

Disqualification
In addition to the General Rules in Section 2 and those outlined in S4-1 to 4-3, the following behaviour
shall result in disqualification: Failure to complete the course as defined and described (DQ12).

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 4 – Beach and Ocean Events

Page S4-40

FIGURE 28: BOARD RACE(Distances approximate only.)
Note: The beach setup relative to the positioning of the buoys may be adjusted dependent on the sea
conditions.
AGE GROUP
Open and Youth
Masters

DISTANCE
250m to base buoys
250m to base buoys

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 4 – Beach and Ocean Events

18.

BOARD RELAY

18.1

Event description

Page S4-41

The Board Relay event shall be conducted under the general rules of the Board Race event. Teams
shall consist of three competitors, who may use the same craft.
First competitor: The first competitors shall be started as in the Board Race and complete thecourse marked by the buoys. Competitors may then leave their board (anywhere after rounding thebuoys), round the two green and yellow flags, and tags with the second competitor on the designatedboard changeover line.
The second competitor: The second competitor completes the same course, rounds the two turning
flags, and tags with the third competitor on the designated board changeover line.
The third competitor: The third competitor completes the same course, rounds one turning flag,passes the other on the shoreward side, to finish between the two green (or area coloured) finish
flags.
The second and third competitors in the board relay event shall be positioned with their feet on, or
shoreward of, the changeover line. The second and third competitors do not need to cross the board
start line to enter the water after being tagged.
Competitors in the board relay events must commence their leg of the event from the correct allotted
position.
The first and third competitor in each team commence from the team’s drawn starting position.
However, the drawn starting position is reversed for the second competitor in each team. For
example, in a 16-team race in which a team has drawn position 1: the first competitor commencesfrom position 1; the second competitor commences from position 16; the third competitor commencesfrom position 1.
1st & 3rd competitor’s starting position
2nd competitor’s starting position

1
16

2
15

3
14

4
13

5
12

6
11

7
10

8
9

…
…

16
1

Competitors are not permitted hold or otherwise interfere with other competitors’ boards ordeliberately impede their progress.
18.2

The course
The course layout shall be as detailed for the Board Relay Race and shown in the following diagram.
To ensure fair starts and finishes, alignment of the start line and finish line to the buoys may bealtered at the discretion of the Chief Referee, depending on the prevailing sea conditions.

18.3

Equipment
Board: See Section 8.
A.
B.

C.
18.4

The use of a replacement board is permitted provided that the competitor recommences therace from the start line. Replacement boards may be brought to the start line by fellow teammembers providing they do not cause any interference to other competitors.
Members of the team or other members authorised by the Chief Referee shall ensure that any
craft used by any of the other team members does not cause any interference to another teamor competitor in the race. Boards shall be removed as soon as possible from the water’s edge
to avoid congestion and possible damage.
If a club enters more than one team in an event, each team shall be required to wear
distinguishing numbers or letters marked on their arm, leg, or caps.

Judging
The finish is judged on the competitor’s chest crossing the finish line. Competitors must finish on
their feet in an upright position.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 4 – Beach and Ocean Events

18.5

Page S4-42

Control of craft
Competitors may lose contact with or control of the board on the way out, provided they regain theboard and round the last course buoy in contact with the board and complete the course.
Competitors must paddle their board around the last course buoy and shall not be disqualified if theylose contact with or control of their board after the last course buoy on the return.

18.6

Masters Board Relay Course and Procedure Variation
A.
B.
C.

18.7

The Board course buoys for the Masters Board Relay shall be as per the Oceanman/
Oceanwoman Relay Board leg. Competitors must round all swimming buoys and the black andwhite board buoys unless otherwise advised.
The two green/yellow turning flags are placed approximately 15metres apart and either on the
shoreline or at knee depth water (as appropriate and taking into account prevailing surfconditions so as to minimise the run distance).
The two green (or area coloured) finish flags are placed on the water’s edge approximately
5metres apart and approximately 5metres from the second turning flag.
Note: All other conditions shall remain unaltered from the standard course.

Disqualification
In addition to the General Rules in Section 2 and those outlined in S4-1 to 4-3, the following behaviour
shall result in disqualification: Failure to complete the course as defined and described (DQ12).

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 4 – Beach and Ocean Events

Page S4-43

FIGURE 29: OPEN AND YOUTH BOARD RELAY RACE(Distances approximate only.)
Note: The beach setup relative to the positioning of the buoys may be adjusted dependent on the sea
conditions.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 4 – Beach and Ocean Events

Page S4-44

FIGURE 30: MASTERS BOARD RELAY RACE(Distances approximate only.)
Note 1: The beach set up relative to the positioning of the buoys may be adjusted dependent on the surfconditions.
Note 2: Masters competitors must round all swim and board buoys to complete the course.
Note 3: The turning flags are to be set by the Referee or their delegate considering water conditions at thetime of a race e.g., the turning flags should be set back up to about 5m from the water’s edge in the event ofa steep drop off into the water and/or a heavy shore dump for safety, fairness, and practicality. However, ona flat beach and/or little wave surge, the turning flags may be placed at the water’s edge or in the water tominimise the run distance. The changeover line may be placed on the beach or in the water depending on
conditions and the placement of the turning flags.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 4 – Beach and Ocean Events

19.

BOARD RESCUE

19.1

Event description

Page S4-45

In this event, one member of the team swims approximately 120m to a designated buoy, signals,
and waits to be picked up by the second member of the team on a board. They both paddle to shore
and cross the finish line on the beach in contact with the board.
A.
B.

C.
D.

E.
F.

G.
H.
19.2

Both competitors must start from the correct allotted position i.e., the start/finish line.
Competitors swimming to and signalling from the wrong buoy shall be disqualified.
First competitor: From the allotted position on the start line on the beach, and on the startsignal, the victim enters the water, swims to touch the allotted swimming buoy, signalling arrivalby raising the other arm to a vertical position while in contact with the buoy. The victim thenwaits in the water on the seaward side of the buoy.
Note1: The buoy is defined as the buoy only and does not include any attaching ropes and/or
straps. Competitors must visibly touch the buoy above the water line before signalling theirarrival at the buoy.
Note 2: Competitors may touch buoys and buoy ropes but are not permitted to use buoy ropes
to drag themselves along the course to reach their allotted buoy.
The Chief Referee may determine an acceptable alternative method of clearly signalling thevictim has touched the buoy.
Second competitor: On the victim’s arrival signal, and from the allotted position, the board
rescuer crosses the start line, enters the water and paddles to the victim on the seaward sideof the allotted buoy. The victim must make contact with the board on the seaward side of thebuoy. The board must round the buoy clockwise (right hand in) before proceeding to shore withthe victim. The board may extend into the shoreward side of the buoy during victim pick-up.
The victim may place themselves on the front or rear of the board. The victim may assist bypaddling the board on the return to shore.
.The finish is judged on the chest of the first competitor of each team to cross the finish line
marked by green (or area coloured) flags on their feet in an upright position, with both rescuer
and victim in contact with the board.
Note: While both competitors need to be in contact with the board at the time the first competitor
crosses the finish line to record a finish result, it is not necessary for the second competitor tocross the finish line on their feet and/or in contact with the board. However all teams arerequested to immediately move to the shoreward side of the finish line to assist with judging of
the event and to enable any trailing teams to finish.
The board rescuer may not start before the victim signals arrival. The board rescuer may crossthe start/finish line for any reason and will not be disqualified provided he or she then resumes
the correct start position to await the victim’s arrival signal.
Competitors are not permitted to hold or otherwise interfere with other competitors’ boards ordeliberately impede their progress.

The course
The course layout shall be as detailed in the following diagram.
The boards must be paddled around the allotted buoys clockwise (right side in) unless otherwise
advised by the Chief Referee prior to the event.

19.3

Equipment
Board: See Section 8.

19.4

Judging
Judges shall be placed to observe the conduct of the event and to determine competitors’ place at
the finish.

19.5

Control of victim or board
Rescuers and victims may lose contact with the board on the return journey, but both must be incontact with the board when crossing the finish line.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 4 – Beach and Ocean Events

19.6

Page S4-46

Victim pick-up
While it is not required that the entire board be on the seaward side of the allotted buoy, the victim
must make contact with the board on the seaward side.

19.7

Disqualification
In addition to the General Rules in Section 2 and those outlined in S4-1 to 4-3, the following behaviour
shall result in disqualification: Failure to complete the course as defined and described (DQ12).

FIGURE 31: BOARD RESCUE(Distances approximate only.)
Note: The beach setup relative to the positioning of the buoys may be adjusted dependent on the sea
conditions.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 4 – Beach and Ocean Events

20.

OCEANMAN/OCEANWOMAN

20.1

Event description

Page S4-47

Competitors cover a 1.4km (approx.) course that includes a swim leg, a board leg, a surf ski leg, anda beach sprint finish.
Except for the differences noted in this section, the conditions of racing of each leg are as generally
required for the individual conditions of that discipline including the rules governing the component
disciplines.
The sequence of legs shall be determined by draw at the commencement of each competition. The
same ballot shall determine the order of legs for the Oceanman/Oceanwoman Relay.
If the surf ski leg is first, competitors will start with a typical in-water start.
Starting positions: Competitors must start the race from their allotted beach position. Competitors
must commence craft legs from the correct allotted beach positions. The starting positions arereversed for the board and surf ski legs. For example, in a 16-competitor race in which a competitor
has drawn position 1: the competitor commences the initial craft leg from position 1 but commences
the other craft leg from position 16.
Competitor’s 1st craft leg starting
position
Competitor’s 2nd craft leg starting
position

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

…

16

16

15

14

13

12

11

10

9

…

1

Handler: A member of the competitor’s team assists the competitor. With the Chief Referee’s
approval, a non-team member may act as a handler, provided they are registered in the competition
in some capacity.
Handlers shall:
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
20.2

Wear a competition cap.
Wear a distinctive high-visibility vest as required by competition organisers if entering the water
beyond knee depth.
Hold the surf ski in a floating position as per the diagram or as directed by officials.
Make every effort to ensure that they and the equipment they are handling do not impede othercompetitors (otherwise disqualification of the competitor may result).
Comply with all instructions of the officials.

The course
Buoys shall be laid out for the swim, board, and surf ski legs as indicated in the following diagram.
To ensure fair starts and finishes, alignment of the start line and finish line to the buoys may bealtered at the discretion of the Chief Referee, depending on the prevailing sea conditions.
Buoy distances: Swimming buoys shall be positioned at a minimum of 120m from knee-depth waterat low tide mark.
The board leg buoys and surf ski leg buoys shall be positioned approximately 50m and 100m
respectively behind the swimming buoys. The board leg buoys should be approximately 17 m apartand the surf ski buoys approximately 50m apart, with the surf ski “apex” buoy a further 10m toseaward.
Flag layout: Two green and yellow flags located approximately 20m from the water’s edge designate
beach turning marks. One shall be positioned in line with swim buoy number 2, the other in line withthe swim buoy number 8.
Two green (or area coloured) flags 5m apart mark the finish line. They are positioned at right angles
to the water’s edge and approximately 50m from the first turning flag.
Start and changeover line: The start and changeover line shall be approximately 30m in length,
centred on the swimming buoy number 1 approximately 5m from the water’s edge, and marked by a
2m high pole at either end.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 4 – Beach and Ocean Events

Page S4-48

The start and changeover line serves as a start line if the board or swim leg is first. It serves as aboard placement line for the board leg. Competitors are not required to cross the start andchangeover line after the race has commenced.
Board course: The board leg is conducted from the start and changeover line to pass swim buoy 1
on the outside; round the board course buoys; return to the beach passing swim buoy 9 on theoutside; and round the two turning flags.
Surf ski course: The surf ski leg is conducted with the skis starting from the surf ski floating positionas per the diagram, around three surf ski course buoys, return to the beach and around the twoturning flags. Competitors must pass on the outside of all buoys. Competitors shall not cut throughthe swim course or board course buoys.
Swim course: The swim leg is conducted from the start and changeover line, around the swimming
buoys, return to the beach and around the two turning flags.
Run leg course and finish: The race shall be concluded when a competitor completes all legs. To
finish, a competitor rounds one turning flag, passes the other flag on the shoreward side, and finishes
between the two finish flags.
Note: Competitors round the turning flags in the same direction as the buoys for each leg of thecourse.
Masters: If the Masters Oceanman/Oceanwoman swim course would exceed 120m because ofprevailing surf conditions, two single buoys, laid a minimum of 10m apart at the 120m mark may be
used. In such circumstances, the standard swim course will be used for the board leg and for the first
and third turning buoys of the surf ski leg. An apex buoy placed 10m beyond the swim buoys willcomplete the surf ski course.
20.3

Masters Oceanman/Oceanwoman Variation
The Masters Oceanman/Oceanwoman is as per the standard Oceanman/Oceanwoman event
except that the two green/yellow turning flags are placed approximately 15metres apart and either
on the shoreline or at knee depth water (as appropriate and taking into account prevailing surfconditions so as to minimise the run distance). The two green (or area coloured) finish flags areplaced on the water’s edge approximately 5metres apart and approximately 5metres from the second
turning flag. If the first leg is the swim or board, the event starts at the water’s edge. For the second
and third leg handlers may hold the craft (as appropriate) in the water for the competitor pick up.
Note: All other conditions shall remain unaltered from the standard course.

20.4

Equipment
Surf ski, paddle, and board: See Section 8.
A.

B.
C.

20.5

Changing of damaged craft: A board or surf ski shall not be changed during a section of therace unless it is damaged or becomes unseaworthy. Team members/handler shall be permitted
to assist in replacing the damaged craft, but only to the extent of placing other craft at the startand changeover line.
Paddles: A lost, or damaged paddle may be replaced only after the competitor returns to thestart and changeover line.
Equipment removal: To assist with the safe conduct of the event, team members and/or
handlers may remove damaged or abandoned equipment from the course during the race
provided the progress of other competitors is not obstructed.

Judging
Judges shall be placed to observe the conduct of the event and to determine competitors’ place at
the finish.
Competitors must finish on their feet in an upright position. The finish is judged on the competitor’schest crossing the finish line.

20.6

Contact with craft
Competitors must be in contact with the surf ski or board up to and including the last course buoy.
Competitors shall not be disqualified if they lose contact with the craft on the return journey from theInternational Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 4 – Beach and Ocean Events

Page S4-49

buoys. Competitors may lose contact on the way out without penalty provided they regain the craft
and round the last turning buoy of each leg in contact with the craft and complete the course.
20.7

Disqualification
In addition to the General Rules in Section 2 and those outlined in S4-1 to 4-3, the following
behaviour shall result in disqualification: Failure to complete the course as defined and described(DQ12).

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 4 – Beach and Ocean Events

Page S4-50

FIGURE 32: OPEN AND YOUTH OCEANMAN/OCEANWOMAN.
(Distances approximate only.)
Note: The beach setup relative to the positioning of the buoys may be adjusted dependent on the sea
conditions.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 4 – Beach and Ocean Events

Page S4-51

FIGURE 33: MASTERS OCEANMAN/OCEANWOMAN AND OCEANMAN/OCEANWOMAN RELAY(Distances approximate only.)
Note 1: The beach setup relative to the positioning of the buoys may be adjusted dependent on the sea
conditions.
Note 2: The turning flags are to be set by the Referee or their delegate considering water conditions at thetime of a race e.g., the turning flags should be set back up to about 5m from the water’s edge in the event ofa steep drop off into the water and/or a heavy shore dump for safety, fairness, and practicality. However, ona flat beach and/or little wave surge, the turning flags may be placed at the water’s edge or in the water tominimise the run distance. The changeover line may be placed on the beach or in the water depending on
conditions and the placement of the turning flags.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 4 – Beach and Ocean Events

21.

OCEAN M (INDIVIDUAL)

21.1

Event description

Page S4-52

Competitors cover a 1.64km (approx.) in-water course that includes a swim leg, a board leg, a surf
ski leg, and a beach sprint finish.
Except for the differences noted in this section, the conditions of racing of each leg are as generally
required for the individual conditions of that discipline including the rules governing the component
disciplines.
Unless otherwise advised by the organiser or competition committee, the fixed sequence of legs in
the Ocean M shall be swim, board, and ski.
Starting positions: Competitors must commence the swim leg from their drawn position of the startline and the board leg. The starting positions are reversed after the board leg for the surf ski leg i.e.,
in a 24-competitor race in which a competitor has drawn position 1: the competitor commences theswim and board legs from position 1 but commences the ski leg from position 24.
Competitor’s Swim leg starting position
Competitor’s Board leg starting position
Competitor’s Ski Leg starting position

1
1
24

2
2
23

3
3
22

4
4
21

5
5
20

6
6
19

7
7
18

8
8
17

…
…
…

24
24
1

Craft Management/Handling:
Personal Handlers: A member of the competitor’s team may assist the competitor with craft
management. With the Chief Referee’s approval, non-team members may act as handlers, provided
they are registered in the competition in some capacity.
Personal Handlers shall:
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.

Wear a competition cap.
Wear a distinctive high-visibility vest as required by competition organizers if entering the water
beyond knee depth.
Place craft as per the diagram or as directed by officials.
Make every effort to ensure that they and the equipment they are handling do not impede othercompetitors (otherwise disqualification of the competitor may result).
Comply with all instructions of the officials.

Major Events: At some competitions (such as Olympic type promotional events) handlers shall not
be permitted into the competition arena. In such circumstances competitors or skilled officials (asnominated by Event Organisers) shall place boards at the start/changeover line in drawn order andthe skis (and paddles) placed behind the boards in drawn (reverse) order. There will be an
approximate one metre space between each board and each ski so that competitors are not impededby craft. Following competitor use the equipment will then be managed in the arena by the designatedofficials.
21.2

The course
Buoys shall be laid out for the swim, board, and surf ski legs as indicated in the following diagram.
To ensure fair starts and finishes, alignment of the start line and finish line to the buoys may bealtered at the discretion of the Chief Referee, depending on the prevailing sea conditions.
To encourage spectator, public, media and sponsor interest special audio and visuals may also be
utilised including changeover and finish arches, large in-water turning buoys, special on-beachturning markers/flags and on-beach grandstands.
Buoy distances: The swimming buoys shall be positioned approximately 90m from the water’s edge
and 50m apart.
The board leg buoys and surf ski leg buoys shall be positioned approximately 50m and 100m
respectively behind the swimming buoys. The board leg buoys should be approximately 55m apartand the surf ski buoys approximately 60m apart, with the surf ski buoys having an additional small
marker buoy placed approximately 1 m to the return side of each of the ski buoys to assist with ski
turns.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 4 – Beach and Ocean Events

Page S4-53

Markers: A large turning marker (or two flags approximately one metre apart) is to be placed in thecentre of the beach at approximately knee depth water to the designate beach turning point at thehalf-way of each leg of the race. In the event that there is no shallow water the marker shall be placedat the water’s edge.
Two further beach markers approximately 35m apart are to be placed on the beach directly behind
the turning markers to form a semi-circular run track to the finish/change line.
Finish/Change line: The finish/change line is designated by a finish arch or twin flags placed 5mapart and in the centre of the arena and approximately 20m (tide dependent) from the water’s edge.
If a finish arch is erected the judging line shall be delineated by two flags on the incoming side of thearch.
Note: For the Ocean M Lifesaver Relay event the finish/change line shall also be the changeoverline for team members in the event.
Start line: The start line shall be approximately 30m in length, centred on the swimming buoy number
1 approximately 25m from the water’s edge, (beach conditions permitting), and may be marked bypoles at either end.
Other than the initial starting swim leg competitors are not required to cross through the start line forthe board and ski legs of the event. Boards and skis are to be placed where directed prior to thecommencement of the race.
Swim course: The swim leg is conducted from the start line, around the first swimming buoy fromleft to right, return to the beach to round the turning marker(s) from right to left, then proceed aroundthe second swimming buoy from left to right and return to the beach, past the first beach marker,
through the finish/change arch and past the second beach marker to commence the board leg.
Board course: The board leg is conducted from the pick-up of the board on the beach, past swim
buoy 1 on the outside (i.e., the paddler stays to the left of the swim buoy 1) and around the first board
buoy from left to right, return to the beach passing swim buoy 1 on the outside (i.e., the paddler stays
to the left of the swim buoy 1). The turning marker is then rounded from right to left, and the board is
paddled past swim buoy 2 on the outside (i.e., the paddler stays to the left of the swim buoy 2) andaround the second board buoy from left to right, return to the beach passing swim buoy 2 on theoutside (i.e., the paddler stays to the left of the swim buoy 2) to return to the beach, past the firstbeach marker, through the finish/change arch and past the second beach marker to commence theski leg.
Surf ski course: The ski leg is conducted from the pick-up of the ski on the beach, past swim, andboard buoys 1 on the outside (i.e., the paddler stays to the left of the swim and board buoys 1) andaround the first ski buoy (and the marker buoy) from left to right, return to the beach passing theboard and swim buoys 1 on the outside (i.e., the paddler stays to the left of the swim and board
buoys 1). The turning marker is then rounded from right to left and the ski is paddled past the swim
and board buoys 2 on the outside (i.e., the paddler stays to the left of the swim and board buoys 2)
and around the second ski buoy (and marker buoy) from left to right, passing board and swim buoys
2 on the outside (i.e., the paddler stays to the left of the swim and board buoys 1) to return to thebeach, past the first beach marker and through the finish line and arch to complete the race.
Run leg course and finish: The race shall be concluded when a competitor completes all legs. To
finish, a competitor must past the first beach marker and through the finish at the finish arch (orthrough the two finish flags).
Note 1: Competitors round the turning flags in the same direction as the buoys for each leg of thecourse.
Note 2: If the swim buoy distance is to exceed 90m from the water’s edge because of prevailing tideor surf or beach conditions, the Event Management Committee may decide to use the two board
buoys for the swim. In such circumstances competitors shall not complete an M shape swim course
but shall proceed around both board buoys without returning to the beach and then commence the“M” board leg.
Note 3: Should tide or surf or beach conditions make it impractical to set a suitable M shaped water
course, the Event Management Committee may also alternatively decide to use the traditional
Oceanman/Oceanwoman for the water legs of the event while retaining the on-beach course for the
event.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 4 – Beach and Ocean Events

21.3

Page S4-54

Equipment
Surf ski, paddle, and board: See Section 8.
Changing of damaged equipment: A board, surf ski and/or paddle shall not be changed during asection of the race unless it is damaged or becomes unseaworthy. Team members/handler shall bepermitted to assist in replacing the damaged craft, but only to the extent of placing other craft at edgeof the competition arena where directed by the Chief Referee.
Equipment removal: To assist with the safe conduct of the event, team members and/or handlers
may remove damaged or abandoned equipment from the course during the race provided theprogress of other competitors is not obstructed.

21.4

Judging
Judges shall be placed to observe the conduct of the event and to determine competitors’ place at
the finish.
Competitors must finish on their feet in an upright position. The finish is judged on the competitor’schest crossing the finish line

21.5

Contact with craft
Competitors must be in contact with the surf ski or board up to and including the last course buoy.
Competitors shall not be disqualified if they lose contact with the craft on the return journey from thebuoys. Competitors may lose contact on the way out without penalty provided they regain the craft
and round the last turning buoy of each leg in contact with the craft and complete the course.

21.6

Disqualification
In addition to the General Rules in Section 2 and those outlined in S4-1 to 4-3, the following
behaviour shall result in disqualification: Failure to complete the course as defined and described(DQ12).

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 4 – Beach and Ocean Events

Page S4-55

FIGURE 34: INDIVIDUAL OCEAN M.
(Distances approximate only.)
Note: The beach setup relative to the positioning of the buoys may be adjusted dependent on the sea
conditions.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 4 – Beach and Ocean Events

22.

OCEANMAN/OCEANWOMAN ELIMINATOR VARIATION

22.1

Event Description

Page S4-56

The Eliminator format is an alternate format to conduct the traditional Oceanman and Oceanwoman
and the Ocean M Course events.
Qualification for the Elimination Event final is determined by heats and further rounds (whereapplicable) to arrive at a final of up to 24 competitors (see also the note). Unless otherwise advisedby the organiser or competition committee, any qualifying rounds for the Eliminator final shall be
conducted as single races (i.e., not in the Eliminator format).
The final is conducted over three Eliminator races as follows:
A. Race 1 eliminating the last 8 athletes
B. Race 2 eliminating the last 8 athletes
C. Race 3 (FINAL) 8 remaining athletes
Note: In some circumstances it may be possible to have greater or less than 24 competitors in thefirst race of an Eliminator final. If this occurs the organiser or referee shall advise the elimination
numbers in each round prior to the conduct of the first eliminator race.
Unless otherwise advised by the organiser or competition committee, the order of legs for the roundsof the elimination finals shall rotate as follows:
A.
B.
C.

Race 1: swim, board, ski
Race 2: ski, board, swim
Race 3: board, swim, ski

There will be 5 minutes rest between each race with the time commencing from the race winnercrossing the finish line. This time can be subject to the organiser’s discretion based on conditions
and advised prior to the Eliminator final commencing.
Rules for the Eliminator finals format shall be as per the traditional Oceanman/Oceanwoman or
Ocean M as appropriate except where varied below:
•
•
•
•
•

The final placing result (and any team point score points to be allocated) shall be dependent
on the round and placing where a competitor is eliminated.
Dependent on event promotion, area set up and/or conditions there may be longer or shorter
courses and/or run legs for either format.
Competitors who fail to complete the course correctly (including missing a turning buoy or mark)shall be subject to the following:
If an error occurs in the first race of the eliminator round, then the competitor would be
disqualified and allocated last place (and any relevant placing points).
If the error occurs in the second or third race of the eliminator, then the competitor would be
disqualified and allocated last place in that round. This is because the competitor has alreadyqualified above those who have already been eliminated.
The event winner is the competitor who correctly finishes first in the third (final) elimination raceirrespective of what qualifying place they achieved in the first two eliminator races.
Note: When racing occurs at “flat-water” venues an alternate course may be consideredparticularly when the events are conducted at standalone competitions. In such circumstances
the course shall be advised by way of entry circular and should include a course diagram and theapproximate distances for each leg.

22.2

Disqualification
In addition to the General Rules in Section 2 and those outlined in S4-1 to 4-3, the following
behaviour shall result in disqualification: Failure to complete the course as defined and described(DQ12).

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 4 – Beach and Ocean Events

23.

OCEANMAN/OCEANWOMAN RELAY

23.1

Event description

Page S4-57

The Oceanman/Oceanwoman Relays are a variation of the individual Oceanman/Oceanwoman
events.
Teams of four competitors (one swimmer, one board paddler, one surf ski paddler, and one runner)cover the course in a sequence of legs determined by draw at the start of each competition.
The run leg is always the final leg. If the surf ski leg is first, competitors shall start with a typical inwater start.
Masters: Teams of three competitors – one swimmer, one board paddler, one surf ski paddler. Thereis no running leg in Masters Oceanman/Oceanwoman Relay (refer also below for event procedurevariation).
Except for the differences noted in this section, the conditions of racing of each leg are as generally
required for the individual conditions of that discipline including the rules governing the component
disciplines.
To ensure fair starts and finishes, alignment of the start line and finish line to the buoys may bealtered at the discretion of the Chief Referee, depending on the prevailing sea conditions.
Competitors must commence their leg of the event from the correct allotted beach position.
Note: The second and third competitors do not need to cross the start/changeover line to enter thewater after being tagged.
The starting positions are reversed for the board and surf ski legs. For example, in a 16-team racein which a team has drawn position 1: the initial craft leg is commenced from position 1 but the othercraft leg is commenced from position 16.
1st craft leg starting position
2nd craft leg starting position

1
16

2
15

3
14

4
13

5
12

6
11

7
10

8
9

…
…

16
1

Note: If the swim leg is the second or third leg of the race, competitors are to commence their leg ofthe race from the same drawn position of their team in the leg immediately prior to the swim leg.
The following event description assumes the order to be swim – board – surf ski – run. The course
direction is clockwise.
Swim leg: From a beach start, swimmers enter the water, swim around the swimming course buoys,
and return to the beach, run around the two green and yellow turning flags to tag with the board
paddlers who are waiting with their boards, feet on, or on the shoreward side of, the start/changeoverline.
Board leg: Board paddlers enter the water with their boards; pass swim buoy 1 on the outside; roundthe board course buoys; return to the beach passing swim buoy 9 on the outside; round the twoturning flags, and through the start/changeover line to tag with the surf ski paddlers, who are waiting
with their surf skis and paddles in approximately knee depth water.
On their return, board paddlers may leave their boards at the water’s edge.
Surf ski leg: Surf ski paddlers paddle around the surf ski course buoys and return to shore to tag
the runners waiting at the water’s edge or in the water.
Paddlers must pass on the outside of all buoys. Paddlers shall not cut through the swim course orboard course buoys.
The location of the tag is at the discretion of the team provided it occurs after the last swim coursebuoy and before the first turning flag.
Run leg: Runners then round one turning flag, pass the other flag on the shoreward side, andcontinue to the finish between the two green (or area coloured) finish flags.
Note 1: It is permitted to tag the competitor anywhere from the shoreward side of the last turningbuoy to the first turning flag on the beach. All tags must be performed above the water surface sothat they are visible.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 4 – Beach and Ocean Events

Page S4-58

Note 2: Runners are permitted to enter the water to tag the incoming competitor and may wade,
porpoise/duck dive* off the bottom, catch waves and or run to the turning flag but are not permitted
to swim at any time (this includes taking any over arm swimming action to either catch or stay on awave).
* Providing the feet push off the bottom, it is permitted to have an above water arm action as part ofthe porpoise/duck dive movement.
23.2

Equipment
Surf ski, paddle, and board: See Section 8.
Each team shall provide at least one board and one surf ski.
Team members shall place gear adjacent to the respective starting areas for the various craft.
Equipment removal: To assist with the safe conduct of the event, team members and/or handlers
may remove damaged or abandoned equipment from the course during the race provided theprogress of other competitors is not obstructed.
Handlers shall:
A.
B.

Wear a competition cap.
Wear a distinctive high-visibility vest as required by competition organizers if entering the water
beyond knee depth.
C. Make every effort to ensure that they and the equipment they are handling do not impede othercompetitors (otherwise disqualification of the competitor may result).
D. Comply with all instructions of the officials.
Apparel: In the beach sprint course, shorts, and shirts, which comply with team uniform
requirements, may be worn at the competitors’ discretion.
23.3

Judging
Judges shall be placed to observe the conduct of the event and to determine competitors’ place at
the finish.
Competitors must finish on their feet in an upright position. The finish is judged on the competitor’schest crossing the finish line.

23.4

Contact with craft
Competitors must be in contact with the surf ski or board up to and including the last course buoy.
Competitors shall not be disqualified if they lose contact with the craft on the return journey from thebuoys. Competitors may lose contact on the way out without penalty provided they regain the craft
and round the last turning buoy of each leg in contact with the craft and complete the course.

23.5

Masters Oceanman/Oceanwoman Relay Procedure Variation
The Masters Oceanman/Oceanwoman relay is as per the standard Oceanman/Oceanwoman Relay
event except that the two green/yellow turning flags are placed approximately 15metres apart andeither on the shoreline or at knee depth water (as appropriate and taking into account prevailing surfconditions so as to minimise the run distance). The two green (or area coloured) finish flags areplaced on the water’s edge approximately 5metres apart and approximately 5metres from the second
turning flag. If the first leg is the swim or board, the event starts at the water’s edge. For the second
and third legs swimmers and craft competitors (as appropriate) may commence in the water.
Note 1: Dependent on conditions Officials may direct the depth to which competitors may enter thewater to await the tag from incoming competitors.
Note 2: All other conditions shall remain unaltered from the standard course.

23.6

Disqualification
In addition to the General Rules in Section 2 and those outlined in S4-1 to 4-3, the following behaviour
shall result in disqualification: Failure to complete the course as defined, described and illustrated(DQ12).

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 4 – Beach and Ocean Events

24.

OCEAN M LIFESAVER RELAY

24.1

Event description

Page S4-59

The Ocean M Lifesaver Relay is a variation of the Individual Ocean M event.
Teams of four competitors (one swimmer, one board paddler, one surf ski paddler, and one runner)complete the course.
Note: The one runner completes all four run legs of the Ocean M Lifesaver Relay.
Unless otherwise advised by the organiser or competition committee, the fixed sequence of legs in
run - swim – run - board – run - surf ski – run. The course direction is clockwise unless otherwise
directed.
Except for the differences noted in this section, the conditions and rules are as per the Individual
Ocean M event.
The runner is not permitted to wear shoes unless otherwise approved by the Chief Referee.
24.2

The course
The course shall be as per the Ocean M Lifesaver Relay diagram.
First Run Leg The event commences with an approximate 50m run leg that is conducted from thestart line located on the left hand side of the finish arch (looking seaward) to the water. The runnershall then visibly tag their swimmer who shall be standing at their discretion at the water’s edge or in
the water.
Note: Runners are permitted to enter the water to tag their competitor and may wade, porpoise/duckdive* off the bottom with their feet but are not permitted to swim at any time before tagging with theircompetitor.
* Providing the feet push off the bottom, it is permitted to have an above water arm action as part ofthe porpoise/duck dive movement.
Swim Leg: The swimmers are to swim around the “M” swim course and return to the beach andvisibly tag with their runner. The tag can be effected anywhere between the last turning buoy and theseaward side of the first beach marker.
Note: Runners are permitted to enter the water to tag their competitor and may wade, porpoise/duckdive* off the bottom with their feet, catch waves and/or run to the changeover zone, but are notpermitted to swim at any time, (this includes taking an overarm swimming action to either catch or
stay on a wave).
* Providing the feet push off the bottom, it is permitted to have an above water arm action as part ofthe porpoise/duck dive movement.
Second Run Leg: The runners proceed around the finish arch and then visibly tags their board
paddler who shall be standing with their board at their discretion at the water’s edge or in the water.
Note: The runners tag and actions are as per the “note” for the first run leg.
Board course: The board paddlers paddle around the “M” board course, returns to the beach, andvisibly tags with their runner. The tag can be effected anywhere between the last turning buoy andthe seaward side of the first beach marker.
Note: The runners tag and actions are as per the “note” for the swim leg.
Third Run Leg: The runners proceed around the finish arch and then visibly tags their ski paddler
who shall be standing with their ski and paddle at their discretion at the water’s edge or in the water.
Note: The runners tag and actions are as per the “note” for the first run leg.
Ski Course: The ski paddler paddles around the “M” ski course, returns to the beach, and visibly
tags with their runner. The tag can be effected anywhere between the last turning buoy and theseaward side of the first beach marker.
Note: The runners tag and actions are as per the “note” for the swim leg.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 4 – Beach and Ocean Events

Page S4-60

Fourth Run Leg: The event shall be concluded when the runner passes the first beach marker andthrough the finish judging line at the Finish Arch/flags.
Note: The runners tag and actions are as per the “note” for the first run leg.
24.2

Course Variations
If the swim buoy distance is to exceed 90m from the water’s edge because of prevailing tide or surfor beach conditions, the Event Management Committee may decide to use the two board buoys forthe swim. In such circumstances competitors shall not complete an M shape swim course but shallproceed around both board buoys without returning to the beach and then commence the “M” board
leg.
Should tide or surf or beach conditions make it impractical to set a suitable M shaped water course,
the Event Management Committee may also alternatively decide to use the traditional
Oceanman/Oceanwoman for the water legs of the event while retaining the on-beach course for the
event.

24.4

Disqualification
In addition to the General Rules in Section 2 and those outlined in S4-1 to 4-3, the following behaviour
shall result in disqualification: Failure to complete the course as defined and described (DQ12).

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 4 – Beach and Ocean Events

Page S4-61

FIGURE 35: OCEAN M LIFESAVER RELAY(Distances approximate only.)
Note: The beach setup relative to the positioning of the buoys may be adjusted dependent on the sea
conditions.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 4 – Beach and Ocean Events

25.

Page S4-62

DISQUALIFICATION CODES FOR BEACH AND OCEAN EVENTS
Code and Disqualification

Events1.

Not competing in accordance with the general rules.

All events2.

A competitor or team may be disqualified if a competitor, team, or handler is All events
deemed to have competed unfairly. Examples of “competing unfairly” include:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

3.
4.

Committing a doping or doping-related infraction.
Impersonating another competitor.
Attempting to defeat the ballot or draw for events or positions.
Competing twice in the same individual event.
Competing twice in the same event in different teams.
Purposely interfering with a course to gain advantage.
Jostling or obstructing another competitor handler so as to impede theirprogress.
•
Receiving physical or material outside assistance (other than verbal orother direction)•
Participating contrary to the spirit of the competition (as described in thecode of fair play).
Competitors may not be permitted to start in an event if they are late reporting All eventsto the marshalling area. This may be noted as a “did not start” (DNS) or similaron the result sheet.
A competitor or team absent from the start of an event shall be disqualified All events
except for the A- or B Final. This may be noted as a “did not start” (DNS) or
similar on the result sheet.

5.

Activities that result in wilful damage to the venue sites, accommodation sites All eventsor the property of others will result in disqualification of the individuals involved
from competition.

6.

Abuse of officials may result in disqualification from the competition.

7.

The first competitor or team to start (i.e., commence a starting motion) before All events
the starting signal has been given shall be disqualified – except for Beach
Flags in which the competitor(s) shall be eliminated8.

Failing to comply with the starter’s commands within a reasonable time.

9.

A competitor who, after the starter’s first command, disturbing others in the All events
race through sound or otherwise may be disqualified (or eliminated in Beach
Flags).

10.

Starting from a position other than the allotted position or lane.

11.

Picking up or blocking more than one baton – e.g., lying on a baton or covering Beach Flags
a baton from sight.

12.

Failure to complete the event and/or course as defined and described.

All events

All events

All events

All events

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 5 – Simulated Emergency Response Competition

World Water Safety

INTERNATIONAL LIFE SAVING FEDERATIONILS COMPETITION RULE BOOKSECTION 5
SIMULATED EMERGENCY RESPONSE COMPETITION

2023 Edition(Effective 1 June 2023)

Page S5-1

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 5 – Simulated Emergency Response Competition

Page S5-2

SECTION 5
SIMULATED EMERGENCY RESPONSE COMPETITIONThe Simulated Emergency Response Competition (SERC) may be held in a variety of indoor and outdoor
swimming pool or open water aquatic environments. The event may also be conducted in non-aquatic
environments.
The SERC tests the initiative, judgement, knowledge, and abilities of four lifesavers who, acting as a team –under the direction of a team leader – apply lifesaving skills in a simulated emergency situation unknown tothem prior to the start. This competition is judged within a two-minute time limit.
All teams respond to the same scenario and are evaluated by the same Judges. Every effort will be made toensure that the scenario is executed in the same manner for every team.
The Simulated Emergency Response Competition shall be conducted without male and female categories.
Teams may consist of any combination of males or females.
1.

GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR SIMULATED EMERGENCY RESPONSE COMPETITION
A.
B.
C.
D.

E.
F.

G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
1.1

Team management and competitors are responsible for being familiar with the competitionschedule, and with the rules and procedures governing the competition.
Teams may not be permitted to commence in the SERC event if they are late reporting to themarshalling area. To assist the organisers in determining how many heats may be required,
events may be marshalled the day before or at the start of the day the event is scheduled.
The Chief Referee shall decide whether the competition shall be conducted in heats, quarterfinals, semi-finals, or finals. An A-final may not have more than 28 teams of four.
If heats are conducted the top 16-point scoring teams shall be assigned places in the final. Ifheats are conducted in different “tanks” (i.e., separate area with separate judges) the top teams
from each competition “tank” will progress to the final (e.g., if there are four tanks used for theheats, the top four teams from each tank will progress to the final). When a tie occurs that
qualifies for a final the tied teams shall all advance to the final. Should one or more teams
withdraw from the final, up to a maximum of four teams shall be called forward from the reserveslist. Reserves will come from the same “tank” as the withdrawn team provided that marshalling
lock-up has not closed for the event. The final shall not be re-seeded.
The order of teams shall be determined by draw in a method approved by the Chief Referee.
Any written instructions provided in lock-up, which are required for the management of thesimulated emergency, shall be provided in English. Each team may bring one additional person
into lock-up to provide interpretation/translation of the English instructions. This person remains
in lock-up with the team.
Note: Organisers should allow sufficient time for translation of verbal or written instructions.
Competitors shall report promptly to the lock-up area at the designated time before the start ofthe competition. A team that is absent from lock-up at the start of the competition shall bedisqualified (DQ3).
Competitors shall treat and handle victims with care: verbal and physical abuse is unnecessary
and inappropriate and may result in penalty or disqualification (DQ10).
Competitors may wear corrective eyewear such as glasses and contact lens. Loss of such
eyewear shall not be grounds for protest or appeal. Corrective goggles or masks are notpermitted.
Body tape used for preventative, medical, therapeutic or kinesiology purposes is allowed at thediscretion of the Chief Referee as long as it does not provide a competitive advantage.
Team members must wear their national team or club cap. A competitor shall not be disqualified
if the cap is lost after the start of an event provided that officials could identify that the competitor
correctly completed the event.
No other personal belongings or equipment are permitted in the competition arena (e.g.,
watches, phones or any other communication device, goggles, masks, fins). Competitors may
be required to remove jewellery which might cause harm to the rescuer or victim.
Judges scores are not subject to protest.

Security and lock-up
Before the start and throughout the competition, teams are isolated in a secure “lock-up” area out ofsight and sound of the competition arena. The scenario, actors, and any equipment shall be secretuntil competitors are locked up.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 5 – Simulated Emergency Response Competition

Page S5-3

After competing, a team may observe subsequent teams compete.
Teams in lock-up are not permitted to see or communicate with anyone who is not also in lock-up.
Any device that would allow such communication is prohibited.
1.2

Competition start
One at a time, teams are escorted from lock-up to the pool where, following an acoustic signal, they
are confronted with “victims” in various locations who need various types of assistance.
Actors will begin their victim simulations immediately prior to the acoustic starting signal, and as theteam enters the competition area. At the acoustic signal competitors respond to the victims in any
manner they wish within the time limit.

1.3

Competition arena: Aquatic Environment
The aim of the aquatic (“wet”) SERC is to demonstrate how lifesavers work as a team in performingsome or all of the skills associated with emergency response situations in an aquatic environment.
The wet SERC may be conducted in indoor and outdoor swimming pool or open water aquatic
environments.
Unless otherwise advised all Lifesaving World Championship SERC events shall be conducted in a
wet environment.
Simulated aquatic emergency scenarios are unknown until the start of the competition and shall be
designed using one or more of the following approaches:••••

An amalgam of single or multiple victim situations which are related.
A group of victims involved in several situations which relate to a common theme, such as apool party, an upturned crowded boat, missing person, or a workplace accident, etc.
The inclusion of additional victims and bystanders with medical or physical conditions requiring
emergency care such as an unconscious, shock, injured, heart attack, or stings or bites, etc.
Simulated emergencies shall be staged as realistically (and as safely) as possible and should
not test the competitors’ imagination. For example, if a situation requires a burns victim there
should be simulated evidence of a fire, or electrical wire, or chemicals.

Note: The use of live wires, or actual chemicals or other evidence that could cause real danger tothe victims or competitors shall not be used.
The situation may evolve (e.g., a conscious victim becomes unconscious) during the scenario
provided that:•••

Delineating marks on the victim reflect the potential change to victim status.
That there is consistent timing in the change occurring.
That any change is consistent for every competitor throughout the competition.

The competition arena shall be clearly defined to all teams in advance. There shall be a clear
indication of the location of both entry and exit points from the scenario area (e.g., which pool sides
can be used).
Competitors shall be advised in advance if there are water or land entry or exit points that may be
used or not used in undertaking the SERC.
Unless otherwise advised, competitors shall assume that the conditions in the competition arena are“as found.”When electronic timing is available, it must be used as a countdown clock for competitors andspectators.
1.4

Competition arena: Non- Aquatic Environment
The aim of a non-aquatic (“dry”) SERC is to demonstrate how lifesavers work as a team in performingsome or all of the skills associated with emergency response situations in a non-aquatic environment.
Because of the non-aquatic nature of the dry SERC, this event variant focusses more on first aid
techniques rather than rescue of victims (although there may be some movement required as part ofthe scenario to ensure the safety of victims).

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 5 – Simulated Emergency Response Competition

Page S5-4

Like the wet SERC, the dry SERC emergency scenarios are unknown until the start of the competitionand shall be designed using one or more of the following approaches:
•
•
•
•
•
•

The event will be conducted in an appropriate environment and location. Where it is conductedadjacent to water the test shall be set to ensure competitors are NOT required to enter thewater.
Note: Victims requiring assessment/treatment will not be in the water.
An amalgam of single or multiple victim situations which are related.
A group of victims involved in several situations which relate to a common theme, such as a
motor vehicle accident, a picnic, or workplace incident, etc.
The inclusion of additional victims and bystanders with medical or physical conditions requiring
emergency care such as an unconscious, shock, injured, heart attack or animal bite, etc.
Groups of victims in several multiple themes.

Simulated emergencies shall be staged as realistically (and as safely) as possible and should nottest the competitors’ imagination. For example, if a situation requires a burns victim there should be
simulated evidence of a fire, or electrical wire, or chemicals.
Note: The use of live wires, or actual chemicals or other evidence that could cause real danger tothe victims or competitors shall not be used.
The role-playing may evolve (e.g., a conscious victim becomes unconscious) during the scenario
providing that:
•
•
•
1.5

Delineating marks on the victim reflect the potential change to status.
That there is consistent timing in the change occurring.
That any change is consistent for every competitor throughout the competition.

Situation scenarios
Simulated emergency scenarios, secret until the start of the competition, shall be designed using
one or more of the following approaches:A.
B.

An amalgam of single or multiple-person situations which are related.
A group of people involved in a number of situations which relate to a common theme, such asa pool party or an upturned crowded boat.
C. A number of groups of people in a number of multiple themes.
Simulated emergencies shall be staged as realistically (and as safely) as possible, and not test thecompetitors’ imagination. For example, a situation in which an actor complains of burned hands
should be staged with simulated evidence of a fire, or electrical wire, or chemicals. (Real fire, live
wires, or actual chemicals shall not be used.)
1.6

Victims, manikins, and bystanders
Victims shall be role-played by actors who present different problems necessitating different types ofaid. Victim types may include simulated non-swimmers, weak swimmers, injured swimmers, andunconscious victims. In addition, competitors may be confronted by resuscitation manikins in the roleof “victim” as well as by bystanders and swimmers.
The role-playing may evolve (e.g., a conscious victim becomes unconscious) during the course of
the scenario providing that marks reflect the change, that there is consistent timing in the change,
and that the change is consistent for every competitor throughout the competition.
Competitors shall be notified before the start if victim type is to be signified by a symbol (e.g., a
red/black cross on forehead indicating unconsciousness). Competitors shall treat manikins as nonbreathing, pulseless victims.
Note 1: A bystander in a competition is not in immediate danger.
Note 2: Only simulated CPR should be applied to live human victims that are designated as being
non breathing, pulseless victims.

1.7

Equipment
Competitors may use all material and equipment available within the competition arena. Competitors
may not bring their own equipment into the competition arena.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 5 – Simulated Emergency Response Competition

1.8

Page S5-5

Start and timekeeping
An acoustic signal will indicate the start and finish of each team’s emergency response.

2.

PRINCIPLES OF RESCUE

2.1

Lifesaver versus lifeguard response
SERC competitors are expected to respond as a group of four individual lifesavers acting in acoordinated team under the direction of a team leader.
Lifesavers must be prepared to respond appropriately in unexpected emergencies and sometimes
without the benefit of specialised equipment, back-up, or established procedures andcommunications systems. In such circumstances, the personal safety of the lifesaver is paramountat all times, and this shall be reflected in the marking sheets.
A.

B.

C.

D.
E.

F.
G.
H.

I.
J.
3.

Competitors apply the following basic rescue steps:•
Recognition of a problem•
Assessment of the situation•
Plan a course of action to overcome the problem•
Action to effect the rescue•
Care of the victim
When assessing the situation, competitors consider:•
Capabilities of the rescuer•
Number of victims•
Position of the victims•
Condition of the victims (e.g., non-swimmer, weak swimmer)•
Rescue aids (equipment) available•
Conditions prevailing (e.g., water depth, entry, and landing points)
On the basis of their assessment, competitors plan a course of action which may involve:•
Seeking assistance•
Organising assistance•
Informing an available helper•
Gathering any appropriate aids or equipment•
Performing the rescue as necessary
The plan should establish control of the situation and aim to preserve as many lives as possible.
The management of a rescue of multiple victims presents rescuers with choices.
In brief, rescuers should manage the situation as follows:•
Mobilise the mobile•
Secure the safety of those in imminent danger•
Recover and resuscitate those in need of continuous care
The mobile may include those capable of assisting themselves to safety. Those in imminent
danger may include non-swimmers and injured swimmers. Those in need of continuous careinclude unconscious, non-breathing, or suspected spinal-injured victims.
When a suitable plan has been devised it should be put into action promptly. Competitors
should be alert to changes in the situation and adapt their plan of action to respond to suchchanges.
When carrying out rescue competitors must remember:•
Rescue from a position offering greatest safety to oneself•
The management of rescue principles•
Approach victims with extreme caution•
Avoid direct personal contact with conscious victims
If entering the water is inevitable, competitors select the most effective techniques for thesituation without endangering their own life in any way.
It is important that competitors clearly show their intentions and actions to the Judges.

JUDGING AND MARKINGThe marking sheets shall be prepared with one Judge marking the entire scenario while the others
judge the handling of the individual victims. One Judge per victim is recommended.
Before the competition start, Judges shall be briefed on the situation scenarios, scoring procedure,
and marking priorities.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 5 – Simulated Emergency Response Competition

Page S5-6

A Judge shall be assigned to a victim or group of victims and assess all teams in that part of the
scenario for the entire competition.
3.1

Marking system
The marking system used in this competition allows Judges to use their skill in assigning marks andprovides for a competitor offering an appropriate but unanticipated rescue response. In allocating
marks, Judge(s) consider the following:
A. Victim type
B. Victim’s distance from safety
C. Equipment available and used
D. Speed of assessment
E. Priority given
F. Quality of action/task
G. Victim care
Early and accurate recognition of the victim’s problem(s) is the essential first step to success in thiscompetition. Successful recognition is closely related to the quality of the victim simulation andstaging of the incidents.
Scoring shall reward the competitors’ accurate assessment of which victims take priority. The
competitors’ assessment of which victims take priority will depend on the nature of the emergency.
For in-water victims, competitors should follow these victim priorities in determining whom to help
first:A.
B.
C.

Weak swimmers and others who are mobile
Victims in imminent danger: non-swimmers and injured swimmers
Victims requiring continuous care: unconscious, non-breathing, suspected spinal-injured
victims.
Specific aspects of the scenario may be weighted to provide higher scores for a rescue performancerequiring a greater degree of skill and judgement.
See sample score sheets at the end of this section. These score sheets are samples only. Uniqueand competition-specific score sheets are designed for each world championships. Scenarios,
marks, and weighting will vary.
In addition, consult the SERC Guide for Coaches, Competitors, Judges and Officials posted atwww.ilsf.org.
3.2

Disqualification
In addition to the General Rules in Section 2 and the General conditions for Simulated Emergency
Response Competition in 5.2, the following behaviour may result in disqualification:
A.
B.
C.
D.

Receiving outside assistance, direction, or advice (DQ7).
Taking any telecommunication device into the security area (DQ8).
Using any equipment not provided as part of the competition (DQ9).
Competitors who verbally or physically abuse a victim may be assigned a penalty or disqualified(DQ10).

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 5 – Simulated Emergency Response Competition

4.

Page S5-7

DISQUALIFICATION CODES FOR SERC
Code and Disqualification

Events1.

Not competing in accordance with the general rules.

All events2.

A competitor or team may be disqualified if a competitor, team, or handler is All events
deemed to have competed unfairly. Examples of “competing unfairly” include:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

3.
4.

Committing a doping or doping-related infraction.
Impersonating another competitor.
Attempting to defeat the ballot or draw for events or positions.
Competing twice in the same individual event.
Competing twice in the same event in different teams.
Purposely interfering with a course to gain advantage.
Jostling or obstructing another competitor handler so as to impede theirprogress.
•
Receiving physical or material outside assistance (other than verbal orother direction)•
Participating contrary to the spirit of the competition (as described in thecode of fair play).
Competitors may not be permitted to start in an event if they are late reporting All eventsto the marshalling area. This may be noted as a “did not start” (DNS) or similaron the result sheet.
A competitor or team absent from the start of an event shall be disqualified All events
except for the A- or B Final. This may be noted as a “did not start” (DNS) or
similar on the result sheet.

5.

Activities that result in wilful damage to the venue sites, accommodation sites All eventsor the property of others will result in disqualification of the individuals involved
from competition.

6.

Abuse of officials may result in disqualification from the competition.

All events

7.

Receiving outside assistance, direction, or advice.

SERC

8.

Taking any telecommunication device into the security area.

SERC

9.

Using any equipment not provided as part of the competition.

SERC

10.

Competitors who verbally or physically abuse a victim may be assigned a SERC
penalty or disqualified.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 5 – Simulated Emergency Response Competition

Page S5-8

SERC: OVERALL – SAMPLE CHIEF JUDGE SCORING SHEET
Draw No: ________Team Name: _____________________Judge Name: ________________________
Scenario description: You have all come to the local swimming pool to relax for the morning and you noticethat there are some people in trouble in the water. The lifeguards have not turned up for their shifts and there
is no other staff around that you can see. There is only one designated access or exit point for the scenario.
If you secure or land a victim, it must be done within this entry area. If you use any other area, you will notscore any marks.
Judges notes: You have the overview of the SERC and assess overall efficiency of the team. In particular
you mark the Team Leader’s control of the team – assessment of priorities and dispatch/direction of teammembers to deal with the victims. You will also mark communication between the Leader and the team andbetween team members and this may include information about the condition of the victims and what help isneeded.
Your marks MUST take into account:••Any loss of control by the Leader becoming committed or involved to such an extent that overall control
is lost. Do not mark any rescues the leader carries out. They will be marked by another judge
allocated to that victim.
Whether assistance was sought.
Note: any person sent for help will not be allowed to return during the scenario.
Areas of marking

Marks out of 10

Assessment
Assessment of the emergency
Did the leader coordinate the team and direct to the correct priorities of rescue?
On-going assessment / re-assessment
Control
Control and safety over the scenario area
Leader retains control throughout the scenario
On-going assessment / re-assessment
Communication
Communication and feedback from Leader to team, and between team members andvictims
Effective questioning / clear instructions given to victims and team
SearchEffective search of scenario area
Identification and location of victims
Teamwork
Teamwork, summon assistance (emergency services called) with appropriate
information provided
Identification and securing of all victims
Effective use of bystanders / victims
Rough handling of victims – Deduct points
Total
Marking notes (in increments of 0.5 allotted by the Judge):
Perfect 10
Very Good 7.5-9.5
Satisfactory 5.0-7.0
Weak 2.5-4.5
Poor 0.0-2.0
Specific aspects of the scenario may be weighted to provide higher scores for a rescue performancerequiring a greater degree of skill and judgement.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 5 – Simulated Emergency Response Competition

Page S5-9

SERC: NON-SWIMMER – SAMPLE JUDGE SCORING SHEET
Draw No: ________Team Name: ______________________Judge Name: _______________________
Victim: Non-swimmer trying to get to the edge
The victim is struggling to stay above the water and is starting to panic as he/she cannot get to the edge.
He/she will take a rescue aid if pushed into his reach. However, if a contact rescue is attempted, he/she will
struggle and try to grab hold of the rescuer (he/she will not turn on his back). He/she needs assistance to get
out of the water and when out will be exhausted from the experience. He/she is on his own at the pool.
Judges notes:
Non-swimmer is in imminent danger and is a high priority for rescue. He/She will attempt to grab any rescuer
who approaches him/her directly without an aid. If a contact rescue is used, no marks should be recorded
for the rescue component. He/She should be made safe with an effective and efficient return to the edge.
Landing should be done with care. He/She will answer questions put to him/her but will not volunteer the
information.
He/She will not leave the area to call for emergency services as he is frightened.
Areas of marking

Marks out of
10

Victim recognition/approach
Recognition of non-swimmer (high priority), speed of reaching victim
Safe approach by rescuer
RescueRescue with extreme caution
Effective rescue, non-contact (if contact rescue, no marks for this section)
Control of victim
Clear effective questioning and reassurance
Reassurance during rescue until returned to the edge
Landing
Care of the victim; protection of the head
Appropriate landing for size and strength of rescuer
Care and aftercare of victim
Safe position away from the edge; warmth and protection where possible;
monitor safety; ongoing reassurance
Rough handling of victims – Deduct points
Total
Marking notes (in increments of 0.5 allotted by the Judge):
Perfect 10
Very Good 7.5-9.5 Satisfactory 5.0-7.0 Weak 2.5-4.5
Poor 0.0-2.0
Specific aspects of the scenario may be weighted to provide higher scores for a rescue performancerequiring a greater degree of skill and judgement.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 5 – Simulated Emergency Response Competition

Page S5-10

SERC: WEAK SWIMMER – SAMPLE JUDGE SCORING SHEET
Draw No: ________Team Name: ______________________Judge Name: _______________________
Victim: Cooperative weak swimmer who was playing with friends
The victim is a weak swimmer struggling to get back to the edge after playing with friends. He/She is shouting
at his other friends to follow him/her, but he/she is not sure where they are. He/She can take an aid but can
get to the edge without one. If a contact rescue is attempted, he/she will struggle and resist. He/She isconcerned about getting the message to his other friends to swim to the edge. He/She can land
himself/herself unaided. He/She will provide assistance or contact emergency services and remains
cooperative throughout (except if a contact rescue is attempted but will revert to cooperative after).
Judges notes:
Weak swimmer needs to be made safe very quickly. He/She can be talked at or given signs to return to theedge; he/she will need to be kept under observation. He/She will struggle at the time of rescue if a contact
rescue is used, and low marks should be awarded for the rescue component.
Areas of marking

Marks out of
10

Victim recognition/approach
Recognition that he/she is a weak swimmer and high priority to mobilize
Safe approach by rescuer
RescueEncourage return to the edge with clear directions; perform a non-contact rescue(low marks for contact rescue – maximum 5marks for this section)
Monitor while still in water; may require further directions/instructions
Control and use of victim
Effective communication / instruction; use for keeping another victim warm / safe
(especially his friends)
Landing
Make secure and land
Appropriate landing for size and strength of rescuer
Care and aftercare of victim
Safe position away from the edge; warmth and protection where possible;
monitor safety; ongoing monitoring and care
Rough handling of victims – Deduct points
Total
Marking notes (in increments of 0.5 allotted by the Judge):
Perfect 10
Very Good 7.5-9.5 Satisfactory 5.0-7.0 Weak 2.5-4.5
Poor 0.0-2.0
Specific aspects of the scenario may be weighted to provide higher scores for a rescue performancerequiring a greater degree of skill and judgement.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 5 – Simulated Emergency Response Competition

Page S5-11

SERC: UNCONSCIOUS / NON-BREATHING VICTIM – SAMPLE JUDGE SCORING SHEET
Draw No: ________Team Name: ______________________Judge Name: _______________________
Victim: Child (manikin) unconscious, not breathing
This child is on the bottom of the pool. He/She was playing with his friends.
Judges notes:
This victim is a low-order rescue priority and rescuers should deal with the high priority victims as quickly as
possible in order to get to this casualty who requires continuous care.
CPR should be commenced as soon as possible, and your marks should reflect the efficiency andeffectiveness of the CPR simulation (and not measured against your own country’s teaching / standards).
Areas of Marking
Victim Recognition/Approach
Identification of casualty
RescueSpeed of rescue (considering priority of rescue)
Speed in getting back to the edge
Control of victim
Effective and efficient carry
Landing
Careful handling/landing of the casualty
Care and aftercare of victim
Effective and efficient CPR likely to assist recovery
Safe position away from the edge; monitor safety; ongoing monitoring and care
Rough handling of victim – Deduct points
Total

Marks out of 10

Marking notes (in increments of 0.5 allotted by the Judge):
Perfect 10
Very Good 7.5-9.5 Satisfactory 5.0-7.0 Weak 2.5-4.5
Poor 0.0-2.0
Specific aspects of the scenario may be weighted to provide higher scores for a rescue performancerequiring a greater degree of skill and judgement.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 5 – Simulated Emergency Response Competition

Page S5-12

SERC: INJURED VICTIM – SAMPLE JUDGE SCORING SHEET
Draw No: ________Team Name: ______________________Judge Name: _______________________
Victim: conscious victim with injured shoulder
Fell into water, injured shoulder. Victim is calm.
Judges notes:
This is a medium priority victim requiring assistance. Rescuer should use an aid. Victim can hold aid andneeds assistance to climb out of the pool. The victim should be removed carefully from the water withattention to the injured shoulder. He/She is uncooperative and will not go for assistance or contact emergency
services.
Areas of Marking

Marks out of 10

Casualty recognition/approach
Recognition that he/she is an injured swimmer and medium priority to mobilize
Safe approach by rescuer
RescueEncourage to return to the edge with clear directions
Perform non-contact rescue (low marks for contact rescue – maximum 5marks for thissection)Monitor while still in water; may require further directions/instructions
Control of victim
Effective communication / instruction
Reassurance throughout rescue
Landing
Careful removal from water with attention to injured shoulder
Make secure and land (monitor while still in water; may require further
directions/instructions)
Appropriate landing for size and strength of rescuer
Care and aftercare of victim
Safe position away from the edge; warmth and protection where possible; monitor safety;
ongoing monitoring and care
Rough handling of victim – Deduct points
Total
Marking notes (in increments of 0.5 allotted by the Judge):
Perfect 10
Very Good 7.5-9.5
Satisfactory 5.0-7.0
Weak 2.5-4.5
Poor 0.0-2.0
Specific aspects of the scenario may be weighted to provide higher scores for a rescue performancerequiring a greater degree of skill and judgement.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 5 – Simulated Emergency Response Competition

Page S5-13

SERC: BYSTANDER – SAMPLE JUDGE SCORING SHEET
Draw No: ________Team Name: ______________________Judge Name: _______________________
Bystander: Adult
The adult will provide assistance or contact emergency services and remains cooperative throughout andwill follow directions and provide assistance, if directed.
Judges notes:
The bystander is a high priority bystander and is a witness to the scenario and can provide assistance, firstaid treatment and information on the victims conditions, if directed.
Areas of marking
Victim recognition/approach
Recognition that they are a bystander and cooperative.
Assesses relevant information
Questions bystander to assess information about the scenario.
(Low marks for not giving the bystander directions - maximum 5marks for this section).
Provides direction and instructions
Rescuer provides directions or instructions to assist the rescue scenario such as;
assist removal, reassure victims, calls emergency services.
Monitor bystanders actions
Check periodically to ensure that bystander has followed the directions of the Rescuer
throughout rescue.
Provides ongoing encouragement
Provides feedback to bystander on their actions to encourage them to assist with victim
supportRough handling of bystanders – Deduct points
Total

Marks out of 10

Marking notes (in increments of 0.5 allotted by the Judge):
Perfect 10
Very Good 7.5-9.5 Satisfactory 5.0-7.0 Weak 2.5-4.5
Poor 0.0-2.0
Specific aspects of the scenario may be weighted to provide higher scores for a rescue performancerequiring a greater degree of skill and judgement.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 6 – Surf Boat Events

World Water Safety

INTERNATIONAL LIFE SAVING FEDERATIONILS COMPETITION RULE BOOKSECTION 6
SURF BOAT EVENTS

2023 Edition(Effective 1 June 2023)

Page S6-1

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 6 – Surf Boat Events

Page S6-2

SECTION 6
SURFBOAT COMPETITION
1.

GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR SURF BOAT COMPETITIONTeam management and competitors are responsible for being familiar with the competition schedule,
and with the rules and procedures governing surf boat events.
A.

B.
C.
D.
E.
F.

A surf boat is an oared craft used by a crew consisting of five competitors, four of whom shallbe Rowers and the fifth who shall control the boat by a sweep oar and shall be known as the
Sweep oarsman or Sweep. A crew must commence each race with all five competitors.
Note: Refer to the ILS specifications for surfboat details.
The sweep: With the approval of the Organising Committee, proficient sweeps who are nonteam members may act as sweeps for clubs from national lifesaving organisations which aredeveloping surf boat racing, provided the sweeps are members of a current ILS Full Member
Organisation, and are registered in the competition in some capacity.
Surf Boat competition shall be conducted in both male and female categories. Crews are
permitted to compete in more than one category, with the following exceptions:•No crew or individual may compete in both Open and Reserve Grade categories.
•
19 Years or 23 Years crews or individuals may compete in their age category and either
Open or Reserve Grade but not both.
•
Sweeps may participate in any category as a sweep including Male and Female
categories irrespective of their gender and age. However, with the exception of the Note:“The sweep” (above) may only compete in a category once, irrespective of whether they
are sweeping or rowing.
•
Sweeps may compete in multiple Masters total-age groups as a sweep, but shall only
compete in a particular category once, irrespective of whether they are sweeping or
rowing.
•
The Masters Surf Boat Race shall be conducted in both male and female categories ineight total-age groups: 120 years or more; 140 years or more; 160 years or more; 180
years or more; 200 years or more; 220 years or more; 240 years or more; and 260 years
or more. The age group is calculated using the total of the ages of the four rowers in thecrew and does not include the sweep.
•
A Masters competitor may only compete in one Masters age group as a rower, but may
also compete in multiple Masters age groups as the sweep•
The sweep need not be a Masters competitor but must be proficient as a sweep. The
sweep is considered to be gender neutral with respect to participation in male and female
events.
•Masters competitors are permitted to compete as a rower in one Masters age-group andin either Open or Reserve grade categories.
•
Should a member of any crew become indisposed, he or she may be replaced subject toapproval of the Chief Referee, provided the competitor complies with the requirements forteam substitution and any special entry conditions.
•
If 19 Years or 23 Years competitors are rowing in an older age category made up of mixed
age-groups, they can continue to row in that older age category event if their own
individual age division is suspended or cancelled. However, a crew made up entirely ofrowers from suspended or cancelled age or gender group(s) shall not be permitted tocompete.
Crews may not be permitted to start in an event if they are late reporting to the marshalling area
A crew absent from the start of an event shall be disqualified.
Crew and officials must leave the designated competition area when not competing or
officiating.
Unless specifically provided for, no artificial means of propulsion may be used in competition.
Video cameras may be mounted on Surf Boats as long as such devices conform to therequirements specified in Section 8, Facility and Equipment Standards and Scrutineering
Procedures. With the exception of the sweep, video cameras may not be worn by competitors
or otherwise attached to a competitor from start to finish of a race.
The sweep may wear a video camera on their helmet, provided that the camera is installed ona mounting device and toggle strap supplied or recommended by the manufacturer of thedevice.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 6 – Surf Boat Events

G.
H.
I.
J.
K.

l.

M.

1.1.

Page S6-3

Boat crews shall be dressed in accordance with 2.10 Competition attire. However, the sweep
may wear different style apparel as warranted by the conditions. Crews may wear flotation
vests.
All boat rowers and sweeps must wear an approved aquatic helmet (e.g., EN1385 certified orequivalent) during competition unless the Competition Committee or the Chief Referee has
issued a dispensation because of favourable conditions.
Should conditions alter during the course of an event, the Chief Referee may reverse the initialand subsequent decisions for the optional wearing of an approved aquatic helmet and mandatethat all boat rowers and sweeps must wear an approved aquatic helmet in competition.
A decision to make wearing of an approved aquatic helmet optional is subject to a documented
risk assessment that determines an acceptably low risk level.
A nominal wave height of 1 m is considered the maximum threshold where wearing of an
approved aquatic helmet may be considered optional. Wave height is only one considerationin assessing surf zone hazards (examples of others could include: a heavy shore break, littoral
drift, shorter wave periods, wind strength and direction). Helmets should be presented in teamcolours and design.
Helmets (or club swim caps if wearing of an approved aquatic helmet is not required) securely
fastened under the chin, must be worn on competitors’ heads at the start. A team shall not bedisqualified if the helmet or cap is lost after the start of an event provided that officials canidentify that the crew correctly completed the course.
A Boat Rowers Panel of at least three qualified and experienced surf boat representatives shallbe appointed to discuss boat rowing conditions with competition officials and to represent
competitors. The Organising Committee shall endorse the members of the Boat Rowers Panelfor the competition. The Boat Rowers Panel shall act as a communication link between
competitors and officials and act under the following guidelines:•
The representatives of the Boat Rowers Panel shall liaise directly with the Chief Refereeon all matters pertaining to the conduct of the competition.
•
The Boat Rowers Panel will assist in assessing hazards and provide advice to the Chief
Referee regarding event-specific safety considerations including recommendations
regarding the wearing of helmets for a competition in the event of acceptably low risk
levels (see (g) above).
Note: Should conditions alter during the course of an event the Chief Referee may reverse theinitial decision for the optional wearing of approved aquatic helmets and mandate that all boat
rowers and sweeps must wear an approved aquatic helmet in competition.
•
The Boat Rowers Panel may assist the Referee in setting competition courses prior to thecommencement of competition.
•
Protests regarding surf boat competition shall be dealt with in accordance with the ILS
Competition Rule Book and any subsequent bulletins and entry conditions.
•
The Boat Rowers Panel representatives shall abide by any decision of the Organising
Committee, Chief Referee and/or Appeals Committee.
•

Luck of prevailing conditions
No protest or appeal will be entertained when an incident is caused by the prevailing conditions (seeS2-7 Luck of Prevailing Conditions).

1.2.

Competition area
The competition area may be defined as the section of the beach encompassed by a line or fence,or a direct line to the water from the extreme ends of a line or fence or other designated areas as
specified by the Chief Referee.

2.

THE COURSE
The course shall be as detailed in the diagram.
The boat turning buoys and the gate buoys should be of distinctive colours.
The turning buoys should be set at a minimum of 350m rowing distance from the end of knee depth
water at the low tide mark depending on prevailing surf conditions and should be set in such a
position to allow the boats to clear other course buoys by taking a straight course to and from theirrespective turning buoys.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 6 – Surf Boat Events

Page S6-4

The turning buoys should be set so as to provide a course which is as fair as possible and which will
give all crews the same distance to row, regardless of which position they are allocated.
The gate buoys, which are optional at the Chief Referee’s discretion for usage on the return journey,
should be:••

Set in line with the turning buoys on the seaward side of the break area and inshore from theturning buoys.
Negotiated as directed by the Chief Referee or Sectional Referee.

The finishing line shall be a line of sight drawn between two orange and blue diagonal flags (or othercolour(s) as determined by the Chief Referee) on poles positioned far enough apart to correspondwith the number of buoys laid (see diagram) and to allow all boats to finish afloat.
In some circumstances a video finish line will be used. In these cases, the finish line will be the lineof sight between the video cameras, but the competition area will still be marked by the flags or poles.
The Surf Boat Referee will inform competitors when the video is being used as the finish line.
As an alternative to the above, there is also an option for dry starts and finishes in any combination
with wet starts and wet finishes.
Large, elevated boat position markers, in the corresponding boat buoy colours, may be positionedon the beach in each lane to assist sweeps returning to the beach within their lane.
When it is not possible to provide a fair course over the full number of positions, the Chief Referee,at their discretion, may reduce the number of crews in each race, including the finals to improve thefairness of racing.
If it is clearly evident that the turning buoys are not parallel to the beach and therefore not fair for allcrews, the buoys may be adjusted immediately at the discretion of the Chief Referee.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 6 – Surf Boat Events

Page S6-5

FIGURE 36: SURF BOAT RACE(Distances approximate only)
Notes: The beach set-up relative to the positioning of the buoys may be adjusted depending on surfconditions.
The positioning of the judges in boats will be determined based on conditions and to ensure an un-obstructed
view at all times.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 6 – Surf Boat Events

3.

THE COMPETITION

3.1

Pre-Start
A.
B.
C.

D.

E.

F.
G.

Page S6-6

For each race the boat crews shall be marshalled to their allocated positions on the beach near
the water’s edge with the craft being fully equipped (which includes a rescue tube).
At the appropriate time for a wet start, the Check Starter shall direct the crews to float and holdtheir boats in their allocated positions approximately 23 m apart in readiness for a race start.
Starts may be wet or dry and will be decided by the Chief Referee. When a dry start is used,coloured markers corresponding with the buoy colours will be placed in line on the beach,approximately 10m from the water’s edge. A crew member from each crew shall line up behind
the allocated marker in readiness for a race start. The remaining four crew members shall holdthe boat either floating in the water or at the water’s edge. A handler may be permitted in theevent of a dry start, but they must not interfere with any other crews or provide any assistancethat would increase the speed of the boat they are handling
Handlers: Handlers shall not be considered to be a competitor but shall be required to:•
Be a member of the same club as the crew and be registered in the competition. With theChief Referee’s approval, non-team members may act as handlers, provided they are
registered in the competition in some capacity.
•
Wear a competition cap (or helmet if they have been deemed mandatory for the event).
•
Wear a distinctive high visibility vest as required by competition organizers if entering thewater beyond knee depth.
•Comply with all instructions of the officials.
•
Make every effort to ensure that they, or the equipment that they are handling, do not
impede another competitor (otherwise both crew and handler may be subject todisqualification).
•
Handle the boat and/or oar as directed by the relevant official.
The Check Starter shall hold a flag aloft when the crews are in line and ready to race. At thediscretion of the sweep, a crew may draw their boat back from the line if they so wish, provided
the boat is stationary at the time of the start. If crews disregard the directions of the Check
Starter or Starter they may be disqualified.
The Check Starter raises a flag to signal the Starter that the crews are ready to race. The Startershould be in an elevated position approximately mid-field on the beach.
If a crew has a problem prior to the start, the sweep may raise an arm to indicate that the crew
is not ready to race, whereupon the Check Starter may lower their flag and the Starter may
lower the gun. Once the problem has been rectified, the start process may recommence. A
crew that disregards the further directions of the Check Starter may be disqualified.

3.2 The Start
The Starter shall make every effort to ensure that all crews are given a fair and even start. However,the decision for the crew to “in and away” is ultimately the responsibility of the sweep. Crews may
not protest the start.
If the Chief Referee, Starter or Check Starter is not satisfied that the start has been fair for all crews,
the race shall be recalled by way of a second shot from the gun or a whistle blast.
In a dry start, the crew member runs to the boat when the start signal is given. When the crew
member visibly touches the body of the boat (not the oars), the crew may board the boat andcommence rowing. Failure by the runner to visibly make contact with the boat before the crew boards
may result in disqualification.
3.3

The Seaward Journey
A.

B.

On the starting signal, the boats shall be rowed to sea. Crews should endeavour to steer astraight course to their allocated turning buoy. Failure to steer a straight course to their allocatedturning buoy may result in a penalty or disqualification if another crew is impeded or
disadvantaged by such action.
During the seaward journey, if a boat is swamped and overturns, the crew may right and empty
the boat and continue the race. To achieve this, it may be necessary for the crew to return theboat to shore. If a time limit has been advised and it is clearly evident that a restarting crew will
not complete the course in the allowed time, the Chief Referee should withdraw the crew fromthe race to prevent delays to the programme.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 6 – Surf Boat Events

C.

D.
E.
F.
G.

3.4

Page S6-7

During the seaward journey, lost or damaged boats and/or gear (e.g., oars, rowlocks, etc.) may
be replaced by other club members. Club members may place replacement boats and gear forcollection at the water’s edge by the crew and remove damaged or lost equipment to ensurethat interference is not caused to other competing crews.
Any member of any club or official authorised to be in the competition area may assist in theremoval of damaged or lost boats and/or gear from the competition area to assist in maintaining
safe competition.
Non-crew members may not recover lost boats and/or gear and place same on the start line forreuse by a crew during a race.
Replacement gear may be brought into the competition arena and placed adjacent to thestarting line as directed by the Chief Referee or relevant official.
If a crew runs aground while steering a straight line to their allotted turning buoy, the Chief
Referee may halt the race and re-run that particular heat of the race or place the crew in anotherheat or round of the race.

The Turn
Turns are usually made from left to right (i.e., anti-clockwise or right hand in). However, this maychange at the discretion of the Chief Referee after giving due consideration to the sea conditions
applicable at the time of that round. All crews must be informed of a decision to change from “left toright” to “right to left”. Failure to make the turn in the correct direction shall result in disqualification.
The turn shall be effected giving due consideration to other competing crews. The turn should be
kept as tight as is required to avoid impeding other crews. This applies when approaching anddeparting the turning buoys (see diagram). Impeding another crew may result in penalty or
disqualification.

3.5

The Return Journey
A.
B.
C.

D.

E.

After completing the turn, crews should make every effort to steer a straight course to the finishline. Failure to do so may result in penalty or disqualification if another competing crew isimpeded or disadvantaged by such action.
Boats taking a wave must keep clear of boats in front of them and may pass other boats oneither side. Failure to comply may result in a penalty or disqualification if another crew isimpeded by such action.
If a crew overturns its boat after completing the turn and before crossing the finishing line (or in
the case of a dry finish, the runner completing the course), the crew may continue the race after
ensuring the safety of all crew members who rounded the buoys in the boat at the time of theroll over.
•This is to be demonstrated by all crew members who were in the boat at the time of theroll over firstly completing a head count to ensure that every member is at the surface andsafe and then one of the crew giving the ILS “All Clear” signal. The crew may then proceed
to complete the race as described in “The Finish” section of this Section.
•
Only those crew members who rounded the buoy in the boat are eligible to assist in
finishing the race.
Note: Should a boat in a race cause another boat to overturn, the Chief Referee shall decide
whether the affected crew may progress to the next round. However, there shall not normally
be a re-run of the final in such circumstances.
When gate buoys are in use, crews must pass through their allocated gate as decided by the
Chief Referee. The Chief Referee shall advise crews of the boat buoy usage. Any changes
made during competition shall also be advised to crews. Failure to negotiate the correct gate
shall result in disqualification. If another crew cannot pass through their gate buoy as a resultof failure by another crew to correctly negotiate their correct gate, the matter shall be
adjudicated upon by the Chief Referee.
Should a boat on the return journey, when close to the finish line be stopped by grounding, thisboat shall be deemed to have finished the race. This boat may be allocated a placing as decided
by the finish judges provided that the boat is not full of water and is heading towards the finishline.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 6 – Surf Boat Events

FIGURE 37: SURF BOAT TURNS AT BUOYS
Some typical situations

Page S6-8

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 6 – Surf Boat Events

3.6

The Finish
A.

B.

C.
D.

4.

Page S6-9

A wet finish placing shall be determined when any part of the hull of the boat crosses the finish
line under the control of the crew and properly equipped from the seaward side between thefinishing flags or when a boat runs aground. The crew may recover a boat that has crossed thefinish line not under the control and/or properly equipped and then again cross the finish line
correctly to record a finish placing result.
Note 1: “Under control” is defined as a boat being in an upright position with a crew of at least
three members in contact with the boat and the boat moving in a direction towards the finish
line.
Note 2: “Properly equipped” to complete a finish is defined as a boat equipped with a rescue
tube, a minimum of three rowing oars or two rowing oars and a sweep oar which shall be in theboat or in the rowlocks.
Note 3: Where video cameras are used to assist with the judging process the judging (finish)line may be modified to accommodate the optimum use of such technology e.g., rigid poles
without flags may be used. The standard finish flags may then be placed on the shoreward sideof the rigid judging line poles and as close as practical to the rigid judging line poles. Boats are
expected to proceed past the judging line and through the finish flags to complete a race.
A dry finish is determined when a crew member leaves the boat and runs to their allocatedposition marker and crosses the line. The crew member may leave the boat at any time after
the turn has been completed and must cross the line while remaining in an upright position on
their feet.
An alternate to crossing the line to finish may be prescribed by the Chief Referee. In suchcircumstances, the crew member leaves the boat as described and then is required to touch
the crew’s finish marker while remaining on their feet.
Any boat that dislodges a judging stand so as to impede judging shall be disqualified. If one
boat causes another boat to dislodge a judging stand, the matter shall be adjudicated by the
Chief Referee.

RACING FORMAT
A.
B.

C.

The ILS may conduct surf boat events in either “Elimination”, “Round Robin”, “Other”, or a
combination of racing formats.
In consultation with the Surf Boat Panel, the Organising Committee or Chief Referee shalldecide the racing format and advise competitors accordingly prior to the commencement of thecompetition, or prior to the first round of each boat race.
If conditions dictate, and in consultation with the Surf Boat Panel, the Organising Committee orChief Referee may vary the racing format during the competition.
The standard format for the conduct of round robin racing is described in 6.10 below.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 6 – Surf Boat Events

Page S6-10

FIGURE 38: SURF BOAT RACE OPTIONAL START AND/OR FINISH
5.

ROUND ROBIN RACING
Surf, beach, weather, and time constraint issues conditions permitting, “Round Robin” racing may be
conducted over three rounds to determine qualifiers to further rounds of competition in boat events.
Progression into further rounds and finals shall then be by elimination. The conditions detailed are
not subject to protest.
Qualifiers to further rounds of the competition will be determined based on total points gained in therounds of the round robin (unless otherwise disqualified from the event). The points available in eachof the rounds of the round robin are as follows:
•
•
•
•
•
•

1st place: 10 points
2nd place: 9 points
3rd place: 8 points
4th place: 7 points
5th place: 6 points
6th place: 5 points

In the event of a dead heat (tie) in an individual round of the Round Robin, equal points shall beallocated for the placing achieved. For example, if two crews finish equal first place in a race, theyshall be awarded 10 points each with the crew finishing third being awarded 8 points.
If a count back is required to determine the crews to progress to the elimination rounds of thecompetition, then the following procedures shall apply:••

All the results from the round robin will be compared between the crews involved in the countback. The highest placing points achieved in any of the individual round robin races shall be, inthe first instance, the determining factor. The second highest placing points achieved by thecrews shall then be compared.
If crews cannot be separated after comparing all placing points in all three rounds, then all thecrews achieving the dead heat will be allowed to progress in the competition.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 6 – Surf Boat Events

Page S6-11

Prior to the first round of an event commencing the Chief Referee shall advise the number ofqualifiers in the elimination rounds of competition or finals (as appropriate).
If a crew is disqualified in a round for a serious discipline offence (e.g., Competing Unfairly, Abuse/
Inappropriate Behaviour or a Code of Conduct breach - as detailed in Section 2), they are disqualified
and lose all standing in the event. Other penalties may also apply.
If a penalty is applied, a crew may continue in an event or be allocated placings or points (in theround robin) or be eliminated from a round or event as determined.
A “penalty" is defined as a punishment or consequence as a result of an infringement or breach of
the competition rules. Penalties may include but are not limited to:
A.

B.

C.
D.

Allocation or reallocation of placing(s) (and therefore points in the round robin). In suchcircumstances, the aggrieved crew may be allocated or reallocated placings and therefore
points and the crew may be permitted to continue through to the following round if they qualify
on points.
Elimination from a round in round robin racing (but allowed to continue) in the event. In suchcircumstances, zero points will be allocated to the crew in that particular round of the roundrobin and the crew may be permitted to continue through to the following round if they qualify
on points.
Total disqualification from the event.
Crew being permitted to continue through to the following round.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 6 – Surf Boat Events

6.

Page S6-12

PENALTIES AND DISQUALIFICATION
In addition to the General Rules in Section 2, and Ocean Events in 4.1 through 4.3, the following
behaviour shall result in disqualification: Failure to complete the course as defined and described(DQ 11).

7.

DISQUALIFICATION CODES FOR SURF BOAT EVENTS
Code and Disqualification

EventsAll events1.

Not competing in accordance with the general rules.

2.

A competitor or team may be disqualified if a competitor, team, or handler is All events
deemed to have competed unfairly. Examples of “competing unfairly” include:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

3.
4.

Committing a doping or doping-related infraction.
Impersonating another competitor.
Attempting to defeat the ballot or draw for events or positions.
Competing twice in the same individual event.
Competing twice in the same event in different teams.
Purposely interfering with a course to gain advantage.
Jostling or obstructing another competitor handler so as to impede theirprogress.
•
Receiving physical or material outside assistance (other than verbal orother direction).
•
Participating contrary to the spirit of the competition (as described in thecode of fair play).
Competitors may not be permitted to start in an event if they are late reporting All eventsto the marshalling area. This may be noted as a “did not start” (DNS) or similaron the result sheet.
A competitor or team absent from the start of an event shall be disqualified. All events
This may be noted as a “did not start” (DNS) or similar on the result sheet.

5.

Activities that result in wilful damage to the venue sites, accommodation sites All eventsor the property of others will result in disqualification of the individuals involved
from competition.

6.

Abuse of officials may result in disqualification from the competition.

7.

The first competitor or team to start (i.e., commence a starting motion) before All events
the starting signal has been given shall be disqualified.

8.

Failing to comply with the starter’s commands within a reasonable time.

9.

A competitor who, after the starter’s first command, disturbing others in the All events
race through sound or otherwise may be disqualified.

10.

Starting from a position other than the allotted position or lane.

All events

11.

Failure to complete the event and/or course as defined and described.

All events

All events

All events

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 7 – Inflatable Rescue Boat Competition

World Water Safety

INTERNATIONAL LIFE SAVING FEDERATIONILS COMPETITION RULE BOOKSECTION 7
INFLATABLE RESCUE BOAT COMPETITION

2023 Edition(Effective 1 June 2023)

Page S7-1

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 7 – Inflatable Rescue Boat Competition

Page S7-2

SECTION 7
INFLATABLE RESCUE BOAT (IRB) COMPETITION
The aims of IRB competition are to:•
Improve the prowess of IRB drivers and crewpersons (collectively referred to as ‘crew’).
•
Encourage crews to correctly equip and maintain their IRB and motors for optimum safe performanceand reliability for both lifesaving patrol duties and competition.
•
Allow crews to demonstrate their techniques and their abilities to perform a rescue.
•
Bring crews together to discuss and improve IRB techniques and operations.
•
Promote safety awareness techniques for the crewpersons and patients in simulated rescue scenarios.
1.

INDEMNITY
All IRB competition participants acknowledge and agree that:
A.

B.

C.

D.
2.

They each release and will release ILS and/or their ILS Member Organisation from all claims
that they have or may have had but for this release arising from or in connection with theirmembership of the ILS and/or their ILS Member Organisation and/or participation in any ILS
and/or their ILS Member Organisation authorised or recognised competition or activity whether
conducted under this rule book or otherwise.
They each indemnify and will keep indemnified the ILS and/or their ILS Member Organisation
to the extent permitted by law in respect of any claims arising as a result of or in connection
with their membership of the ILS and/or their ILS Member Organisation and/or participation in
any ILS and/or their ILS Member Organisation authorised or recognised competition or activity(whether conducted under this rule book or otherwise).
In paragraphs A. and B. above the word "claims" means and includes any action, suit,proceeding, claim, demand, damage, penalty, cost, or expense however arising but does notinclude a claim in respect of any action, suit, etc., made by any person entitled to make a claim
under a relevant ILS and/or their ILS Member Organisation insurance policy or under the ILS
and/or their ILS Member Organisation constitution or regulations.
The rules contained in this rule book are made for the purpose of ensuring a safe and fairsystem or framework within which lifesaving competitions are to be regulated and conducted.

GENERAL CONDITIONSIn addition to the specific rules and procedures governing events, team management andcompetitors are responsible for being familiar with the general conditions outlined below as well as
those outlined for Ocean Competition in S4-1 – specifically A., B., and E. through to J.

2.1

Safety essentials
A.

B.

C.

D.

Warning: IRB competition can be inherently dangerous. IRB competition participants
acknowledge that they are exposed to certain risks during IRB competition including but notlimited to leg, spinal and neck injuries, physical exertion, contact with the IRB, temperature,
weather, and water conditions and even drowning. IRB competition participants acknowledge
that accidents can and often do happen which may result in IRB competition participants being
injured or even killed. All members through their participation in IRB events agree with,acknowledge, and understand this warning and accept and assume the inherent risks in IRB
competition.
The Chief Referee must be satisfied that the surf and other relevant conditions are satisfactory
before competition proceeds and at all times during the conduct of competition. The ILS event
safety guide may be used to assist in the process. The Chief Referee shall confirm details at
safety briefings (see S7-2.2).
Safety procedures: Course Judges will monitor and observe all driving, operating, safety
practices and techniques. Should such practices and techniques be considered to be unsafe,
dangerous, or contrary to the rules or procedures of the event the Course Judges are to reporttheir observations to the Referee with a recommendation as per their authority. The Chief
Referee has the authority to immediately disqualify the offending competitor(s) from the event
and/or issue a safety infringement. Recommendation for further penalties and/or referral to thedisciplinary committee may also be considered.
Equipment safety: Scrutineers and Referees will monitor the safety of all equipment used in thecompetition and are empowered to request repair and/or substitution of unsafe or dangerous
equipment at any stage of competition.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 7 – Inflatable Rescue Boat Competition

E.

F.

G.

Page S7-3

Helmets: The wearing of approved (EN1385 or equivalent) aquatic helmets is compulsory for
drivers, crewpersons, and patients in all events. IRB patients are to wear helmets in bothtraining and in competition. It is not required to wear caps under helmets. See also S2.10F.
Competition Caps and Helmets and S8-4.7.
Personal Flotation Devices (PFDs): The wearing of approved PFDs (ISO 12402.5 PFD – Level
50 or equivalent) is compulsory for drivers, crewpersons and patients in both training andcompetition. It is not required to wear high visibility vests under PFDs. See also S2-10C.
Flotation vests and S8-4.6.
Signs or banners shall be displayed to provide a 50m buffer zone on either side of thecompetition area. These may be the same signs used to indicate IRB training and shall be aminimum of 1 m x 1 m. The text of the banners shall be in English and in the official languageof the host organisers. For example:‘CAUTION - KEEP CLEAR - POWER RESCUE BOAT TRAINING’Or‘CAUTION - KEEP CLEAR’
Or‘INFLATABLE RESCUE BOAT – RESCUE EVENTS’

H.

2.2

Competitors in IRB events are reminded of the ILS drug policy and doping controls. IRB drivers
must be mindful of local country/state/province, etc. laws respecting alcohol and certain drugs.
Drivers shall be subject to testing by local authorities and/or the ILS to ensure they do not
exceed local laws. All competitors may be subject to other drug testing.

Pre-competition safety briefing
A safety briefing may be conducted in conjunction with the officials, coaches and team managers
briefing before the commencement of IRB competition. The following items may be included:
•
•
•
•
•
•

2.3

An explanation of all safety procedures that shall be observed by all competitors.
Patient care and indicative water temperature.
Identification of the location of emergency and first aid areas during the competition.
Forecast of surf and weather conditions for the competition period and any inherent dangers.
Safety and rescue plan and contingency relocation plan.
Attention shall be drawn to S2-3 Competition Safety.

Safety and technical infringements
A strong emphasis will be placed on safe driving, crewing, and patient practices. All competitors mustcomplete each event in a safe and controlled speed and manner or face immediate disqualificationfrom the event, and/or issue of a safety infringement and consideration for further penalties.
A.

B.

C.
D.
E.

The Chief Referee or their deputy shall issue a safety infringement to any competitor deemed
to have committed an unsafe practice. This will result in immediate disqualification of thecompetitor and their entire team (i.e., driver/s, crewperson/s, and patient/s) from the event inwhich the infringement occurred. The Chief Referee may (not compulsory) also issue a yellow
card to indicate a first safety infringement and disqualification from the event.
A competitor who receives more than one safety infringement in any one competition, shall bedisqualified from the entire competition. The Chief Referee may also (not compulsory) issue a
red card to indicate a second safety infringement and disqualification of the competitor from theentire competition.
A team that incurs a safety infringement shall earn zero points in that event to any point scorebeing conducted.
A technical infringement is one where a team is disqualified from an event for a breach of rules
not related to safety or for non-completion of an event. Such disqualifications may not affect ateam’s participation in further events in the competition.
If a technical infringement occurs in a final, a team shall be allocated points towards any pointscore as detailed in the Championship’s Handbook.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 7 – Inflatable Rescue Boat Competition

F.
G.
2.4

Page S7-4

Safety and technical disqualifications for IRB competition are detailed at the end of this Section.
The Chief Referee or their deputy, shall advise team managers of any disqualification
immediately after each heat, round or final.

Competitor prerequisites
To compete in ILS IRB competition competitors must be a minimum of 15 years of age in the year of
the competition, or an older age if required by their ILS Member Organisation and be endorsed bytheir lifesaving organisation to compete.
In addition:
A.

B.
C.
D.

2.5

Entry limitations and substitutions
A.

B.

2.6

Drivers must be a minimum of 18 years of age in the year of the competition, or older if requiredby their ILS Member Organisation. Drivers are required to hold their ILS Member Organisation’s
IRB driver award (or equivalent); any other requisite awards including statutory driving licences
and be currently proficient as required by their lifesaving organisation.
Crewpersons must be a minimum of 16 years of age in the year of the competition and are
required to hold their ILS Member Organisation’s IRB crewperson award (or equivalent) andany other requisite awards and be currently proficient.
Patients (or victims) must be a minimum of 15 years of age in the year of the competition andare required to hold their ILS Member Organisation’s lifesaving award and any other requisiteawards and be currently proficient.
Handlers, must be a minimum of 15 years of age in the year of the competition and are required
to:•Hold their ILS Member Organisation’s lifesaving award and any other requisite awards
and be currently proficient.
•
Be a member of the same club or team as the crews and be entered at the competition.
With the Chief Referee’s approval, non-team members may act as handlers, provided
they are registered in the competition in some capacity.
•
Wear a competition cap (or approved aquatic helmet) while acting as a Handler.
•
Wear a distinctive high visibility vest (or an approved lifejacket) as determined bycompetition organizers if entering the water beyond knee depth.
•Comply with all instructions of the officials.
•
Make every effort to ensure that they, or the equipment that they are handling, does not
impede another crew, otherwise both their competitor and the Handler may be subject todisqualification.
Competitors may only compete in a particular event once, e.g., a driver cannot compete in thesame event on a different team as a crewperson or patient. However, eligible competitors maychange their role within a team in different heats of the same event. Team substitutions are
permitted only if a team member is entered for the competition and has not already competedin the same event as a member of another team.
Unless event specific conditions dictate otherwise (e.g., IRB National Teams Lifesaving WorldChampionships), IRB patients are considered gender neutral with respect to their participationin male and female IRB events.

Equipment requirements, scrutineering, and compliance
A.

B.
C.

D.

At ILS World Championships the host organising committee will provide fully equipped IRBs on
a pooled basis. In other competitions, organisers will advise whether IRB competition
equipment may be provided on a pooled basis or whether competitors may use their own
equipment.
All IRBs and equipment shall comply with the specifications of the ILS and may be subject toscrutineering to ensure compliance with specifications and for safety.
Video cameras may be mounted on IRBs as long as such devices conform to the requirements
specified in Section 8, Facility and Equipment Standards and Scrutineering Procedures. With
the exception of the IRB driver, video cameras may not be worn by or otherwise attached to acompetitor from start to finish of a race.
The IRB driver may wear a video camera on their helmet, provided that the camera is installed
on a mounting device and toggle strap supplied or recommended by the manufacturer of thedevice.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 7 – Inflatable Rescue Boat Competition

2.7

The course
A.
B.
C.

D.
E.
F.
2.8

The course for IRB competition shall be as detailed in the diagram and set at the discretion of
the Chief Referee.
A ‘lane’ is defined as an area centred on a line of sight from the ‘beach position marker’, locatedon the ‘start/finish line’, and the relative ‘turning buoy’.
Lanes are bounded by ‘lane marker’ poles (typically red or orange in colour) that are placed ina line parallel to the start/finish line and approximately 10m from the water’s edge. These poles
form the “changeover line” used for the tag in the teams and relay events. The beach position
markers are placed in the centre of the lane and approximately 5meters behind the changeoverline.
Note: For the IRB Teams Rescue event a pole is be placed directly behind the beach position
marker and is to extend approximately 1.8m out of the sand to assist with ensuring the correctchangeover procedure. Alternatively, 1.8 metre high (approximate) beach position markers may
be used for all events.
The turning buoys shall normally be set at a minimum measured distance of 120m from the endof knee-depth water at the low tide mark and taking into account varying conditions such as
sandbars, exclusion of holes and rips, surf conditions, prevailing winds, and safety factors.
The ‘patient pick-up buoy’ for the rescue, mass rescue and teams rescue events is positioned
approximately 10m directly behind the turning buoy.
The ‘rescue tube patient buoy’ for the rescue tube event is positioned approximately 25m
directly behind the turning buoy.

Course variations
A.
B.
C.

D.
E.
2.9

Page S7-5

Water start: If the Referee decides that the start shall be in the water, the start/finish line shallbe located 10m from the water’s edge. The beach position turn markers shall be placed 5m
shoreward from the start/finish line.
Curved beach start: Crews are positioned to take into account the curved nature of the beach.
Water finish: Normally (as per the diagram), the finish is dry and within the crews’ allotted lanemarkers unless the Chief Referee decides on a water finish. In a water finish, the team isdeemed to have finished once any part of the hull of the IRB crosses the finish line from theseaward side between the two finishing flags/poles or finish gates.
Curved beach finish: Drivers shall be required to run up to the start/finish line and raise theteam’s beach position flag above their head while remaining on their feet.
Electronic finish: Drivers shall activate an electronic device at the start/finish line to register thefinish and be on their feet when the device is activated.

Administration and officials
A.
B.
C.

Events may be held separately or as part of a surf competition and, as such, will come under
the overall control of the Chief Referee.
The Chief Referee shall have knowledge of ILS competition, the ILS Competition Rule Book
and any relevant circulars regarding the competition and IRB operations.
Other officials shall be appointed to assist the conduct of the competition. In addition, specialist
advisers (e.g., hull and motor experts etc.) may be appointed to assist.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 7 – Inflatable Rescue Boat Competition

Page S7-6

Figure 39: Typical Inflatable Rescue Boat Competition Area.
Distances approximate only. The beach set-up relative to the positioning of the buoys may be adjusted
depending on surf conditions.
3.

PROCEDURE

3.1

Placing of patients
A.
B.

C.

Patients, wearing helmets, shall be taken to sea by either the duty boats (preferred) or theirown crews. Patients shall be placed in the water at their allocated patient pick-up buoy. For the
rescue tube event the patient shall be placed at the allocated rescue tube patient buoy.
Patients may hold onto their buoy until the patient pick-up. Patients are not permitted to attempt
to move the buoy in any direction to gain an advantage. For the pick-up, they shall release allcontact with the buoy and position themselves clear of and behind their pick-up buoy on theseaward side.
In the mass rescue and teams events the second patient will wait on the beach side of the pickup buoy and move to the seaward side of the buoy after the first patient has been picked up
and the IRB has crossed back to the shoreward side of the pick-up buoy.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 7 – Inflatable Rescue Boat Competition

3.2

Preparing for the Start
A.
B.
C.

D.

E.

F.

G.
H.

3.3

Page S7-7

All competitors in IRB events wear approved aquatic helmets and approved PFDs. Drivers are
to wear the identifying coloured apparel of their allocated lane.
Patients shall assemble in the marshalling area. The Marshall shall inform each team of their
allocated lane. The remainder of the crew go directly to their allocated lane with their IRB in
preparation for the start.
Crews are able to claim bonus time. This is an optional concession, provided at the discretionof the Referee, for crews at the start of events. Each club is allowed a maximum of five minutes
bonus time per day of competition, which may be claimed in a minimum of one-minuteincrements.
The process of starting events should commence with a signal or command that indicates “TakeYour Mark” followed by a signal or command that indicates “Set” and then followed by a startsignal or command that indicates “Go”. If, for any reason, the Starter has to speak to any
competitor after either command, the start process shall be recommenced.
On the “Take your Mark” signal from the Starter (usually by whistle or verbal command), thecrew shall position themselves on the start line and the IRB shall enter the water and be heldat the desired depth wholly within their allocated lane. Check Starter/s may be utilised to guidecrews to their starting position. Handlers may assist with the positioning of the IRB.
A maximum of two handlers may hold the IRB to assist with keeping it in place for the start. The
motor may be in or out of gear. The handlers may move the IRB at any time (including prior toand after the start signal) as long as the boat is in the “correct IRB starting position” when thedriver or crew first make contact with the boat.
Note 1: The “correct IRB starting position” is defined as the boat being stationary, with the bow
facing perpendicular to the wave line and wholly within its lane at a depth of water as determinedby the handlers. It is also permitted for the IRB to be placed at an angle to assist driver and/orcrew if it is safe to do so.
Note 2: If conditions warrant the Referee may increase the number of handlers to four.
The driver and crewperson shall be positioned adjacent to their respective beach position
marker in readiness for a race start with their toes on or behind the start/finish line. If a lane
coloured vest is supplied, it must be worn by the driver/s as directed by the Referee.
The Starter then gives the “Set” signal (usually by whistle). Crews may claim bonus time up to
and including at the whistle for the set signal. Should IRB equipment be damaged by waves
while in the set position and before the start the Referee may, at their discretion, allow for theequipment to be replaced or quickly repaired before proceeding with the start without the lossof bonus time.

The start
A.

B.
C.

D.
E.
F.

On the starter’s “Go” signal (usually by starting gun or horn) the driver and crewperson shallcross the start/finish line and proceed to the IRB. A break shall be adjudicated as detailed in
Section 4 (Ocean Events) of this Rule Book.
Note 1: Whilst every endeavour should be made by the Starter to affect a fair and even startthe decision to “Go” on the start signal rests with the competitor or team. If there is no recall by
the Starter or the Check Starter(s) or the Referee, no protest shall be allowed on the start.
Any handlers used are to be on either side of the IRB and must hold or control the IRB with atleast one hand. Handlers must not be in contact with any part of the motor and/or fuel cell, fuelline assembly, and/or safety chain when the starting signal sounds.
Handlers are permitted to move the IRB at any time including after the starting signal to assist
with water depth positioning of the IRB and to maintain the bow seaward and perpendicular to
the wave line. It is also permitted for the IRB to be placed at an angle to assist the driver and/or
crewperson entry if it is safe to do so. At the time the driver or crewperson first makes visible
contact with the boat, the IRB must be in the “correct starting position” and the handlers shallnot further move the boat.
Handlers at their discretion may continue to maintain contact with the boat after the driver
and/or crew makes contact with the IRB but must release contact and move safely clear prior
to the engine propelling the IRB forward.
The driver and crewperson, at their own discretion, shall board the IRB.
The driver starts the motor only when aboard the IRB. Only the driver may start the motor andthe crewperson must be in contact with the IRB at the time the motor is started. During theInternational Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 7 – Inflatable Rescue Boat Competition

G.

3.4

Page S7-8

course of any IRB race only the driver is permitted to touch any part of the motor once thestarting signal sounds.
The motor may be started either in gear or out of gear. If starting the motor in gear and using
one hand to start, the driver must maintain control of the motor throttle grip with their otherhand. If a two-handed start is used the motor must be in neutral.

Proceed to and from buoys
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.

F.

The decision to proceed to sea is ultimately the responsibility of the driver and crewperson.
After entering the IRB, the driver and crewperson must maintain their ‘normal position’ as
described below. This must be done in a safe manner with three secure points of contact
maintained at all times.
The normal driving position is defined as left or right foot in the foot strap, left hand holding thedriver pontoon handle, right hand holding motor throttle grip, and seated on the pontoon.
The normal crewperson position is defined as left foot in the foot strap (right foot in foot strap is
optional), left hand holding the bow rope or handle, right hand holding the inner pontoon(boarding) handle or lifeline rope, and seated on the pontoon.
The normal patient position is defined as positioned inside the IRB and holding onto the pontoon
lifeline rope with at least one hand.
Note: While not a disqualification point, patients are not encouraged to sit on the floor of the
IRB.
The only exceptions to the normal positions (above) are listed below. Transition from the normal
positions must be made in a safe manner while maintaining three points of contact with the IRB
at all times:•
The driver and/or crewperson may leave their normal position to drag the IRB over a sandbar if the motor is electrically dead, or in the neutral position if left running.
•
The crewperson may rise from the seated position at any time to absorb the impact ofnegotiating a wave or swell.
•
The crewperson may move into the “locked-in” position when heading to sea and whennecessary, including but not limited to, ‘punching’ a wave.
Note: For crew guidance the locked-in position is one that allows the crewperson to
streamline their body position with the craft in order to stay in better contact with the vessel
through maneuverers. This position is regarded as more secure position for crewing andcan be used at any time the crewperson feels it necessary. It is ideally used whennegotiating unbroken waves that are about to drop onto the IRB e.g., punching a wave.
To achieve the locked-in position the crewperson’s left hand grips the bow rope or handle andtensions it tightly behind the hip and slightly downward over their buttocks. The left hand can
grip the right-hand pontoon handle (if possible) or lifeline rope. The most important part of thelocked-in position is to keep the bow rope tensioned (which assists with control). To maintaintension the crewperson should roll their hip towards the transom. To assume the locked inposition:•
The left foot should be in crewperson’s foot strap. The leg should be slightly bent but notlocked straight. When hitting the wave push forward with the left leg.
•
The right knee/leg is placed in a bent position under the spray dodger (if fitted). The rightfoot should be placed flat, pushed on the opposite side of the pontoon above the fuel celland under the spray dodger.
•
The bow rope is held with the right hand grasping one of the four knots approximately
200mm from the bow rope D-Ring.
•
The left hand should hold the bow rope or handle.
•
The head should be in an upright position and facing forwards (not sideways) looking
directly at the oncoming surf. The spine should remain aligned at all times.
•
The right elbow is tucked closely to the chest and the right shoulder can be placed on thespray dodger. It is recommended to avoid leaning on the elbow.
•
If the boat leaves the water surface, maintain the locked in position to minimise impact on
the body.
Note: The intention of this detailed explanation is not to apply specific judging points but toprovide clarity to crews to operate safely as dictated by conditions.
•
The crewperson may move their weight for turning or negotiating shallow water.
•
The crewperson may move their weight and adjust their securing points for buoy turns.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 7 – Inflatable Rescue Boat Competition

Page S7-9•••

The crewperson may leave their normal position for all patient pickups.
The driver may leave their normal position for the rescue tube pick-up.
The crewperson does not necessarily need to be seated in an upright position in the IRB
when grounding or beaching at the finish of a race but must be seated and maintain threepoints of contact.
•
A momentary shift from the respective normal position of the driver, crewperson, or
patient(s) provided that the team member does not otherwise become dislodged from theircorrect position.
G. The driver and crewperson must maintain control of the IRB at all times during the competition
to ensure it moves in a safe and controlled manner. Losing the bow rope is a Safety DQ.
H, The leading IRB, while proceeding to and from the buoys, shall, in the normal course, haveright-of-way and the trailing IRB must take evasive action by turning or giving way to prevent
collision.
Note 1: If at any time the leading IRB’s driver considers that there is a risk of collision with thetrailing IRB, then the leading craft should take all measures necessary to avoid a collision but
in terms of competition adjudication the trailing IRB remains responsible for giving way to theleading craft.
Note 2: The standard avoidance measure, when on a direct collision course, is to steer right andpass safely to the port (left) side.
3.5

The turn and patient pick-up
The turn and patient pick-up process shall be as follows for the rescue, mass rescue and teams
rescue event:
A.
B.

C.
D.

E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
3.6

Crews must not steer a wide course or delay a turn which impedes the progress of anothercrew or forces them from their true course.
All buoys shall be turned anti-clockwise and be maintained on the port (left hand) side of the
IRB throughout turns. The patient pick-up buoy must not be forced under the pontoon during
any part of the turn.
Note: For judging purposes, should any buoy be fully submerged during a turn and/or patient
pick-up and does not pop up on the correct (port) side of the IRB, the crew shall be disqualified.
The IRB shall complete a 360 degree turn around its allocated turning buoy and proceed to theallocated patient pick-up buoy aligning the patient to the port side.
With the exception of the Rescue Tube Race, where the patient pick-up procedure is describedin the rules, the patient will face towards the IRB in preparation for the patient pick-up. The
patient’s hands must be clasped together, or one hand held to the opposite wrist during thepick-up.
The patient pick-up shall commence on the seaward side of the pick-up buoy. The driver andcrewperson may both assist with the patient lift.
Once the patient pick-up has commenced the IRB shall complete the turn, pass back to thebeach side of the patient pick-up buoy, and return to shore keeping their turning buoy on theirleft-hand side. In the mass rescue this procedure is repeated for the second patient pick-up.
The patient must be wholly clear of the water by the time the IRB has passed the crew’s IRB
turning buoy (judged at the trailing edge of the motor) on the return to the beach.
The IRB shall not turn around any buoy other than the allocated turning buoy and the allocatedpatient pick-up buoy.
If an IRB crew misses the patient pick-up, they may continue to their respective turning buoy asecond time, round it and re-attempt the patient pick-up as described above.

The exit and finish
A.
B.

C.

The IRB shall be beached and remain wholly within the allocated lane until the driver has exited
the IRB.
The driver, crewperson or patient must not be dislodged from their normal positions bygrounding the IRB with excessive speed or beaching at an awkward angle. The crewperson
does not necessarily need to be seated in an upright position in the IRB when grounding or
beaching at the finish of a race but must be seated and maintain three points of contact. It is
not permissible to lie on any part of the IRB (refer S7-3.E).
When beaching the IRB, the driver must render the motor electrically dead by activation of
motor kill switch before the driver, crewperson or patient exits the IRB. If the stop switch lanyard
is used it must remain attached to the motor.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 7 – Inflatable Rescue Boat Competition

D.
E.
F.
G.

H.
I.
J.

K.

3.7

The patient must not exit prior to the driver. The crewperson may alight before the driver tosteady the IRB but only after the motor has been made electrically dead. The motor may be leftin gear. The crewperson may use the side lifting handles to exit the IRB.
When exiting the IRB, the driver must keep both feet on the IRB floor until the motor iselectrically dead.
The driver must remain seated until both feet are swung outside the IRB. The definition of‘outside’ is past the centreline of the port side pontoon.
The driver must have completed their exit aft of the IRB front lift handles and must not step off
any part of the IRB or floorboard when exiting.
Note: The driver stumbling or falling over is not a disqualification provided that they cross thestart finish line on their feet.
The crewperson shall remain in control of the IRB while the driver runs to the start/finish line.
The patient may assist the crewperson in the control of the IRB.
The driver must be outside the IRB and on his/her feet when they cross the finish line at theend of an event. The exception to this is if the Referee or his/her delegate has advised that thefinish will be a “water finish” as defined in S7-2.8C.
The finish is judged on the chest of the driver when he or she crosses the start/finish line on
their feet.
Note: IRB teams are requested to stand away from the start/finish line when finished until allteams have completed the course. This will assist with the judging process.
Unless otherwise specified (e.g., a water finish detailed in S7-2.8C, a team shall not drive the
IRB across the finish line to record a finish result. The driver must be on their feet and outside
the IRB when they cross the finish line. Should an IRB cross the finish line, the driver may exit
the boat and pass to the seaward side of the start/finish line and re-cross the line on their feetto record a finish result.

The Changeover (Mass and Teams events only)
A.

B.

4.

Page S7-10

During all changeovers the crewperson must maintain contact with the IRB and control it in asafe manner. In changeovers the crewperson and patients, as detailed under the relative event
descriptions, handle the IRB as detailed in S7-3.3. B, C and D. It is also permitted for the boat
to be placed at an angle to assist driver entry if it is safe to do so.
Note 1: During changeovers, drivers, crewpersons, and patients must follow the exit
procedures detailed in S7- 3.6.
Note 2: The IRB must recommence from a position wholly within the allocated lane but there isno penalty should an IRB move outside the allocated lane when turning the IRB aroundprovided that there is no interference to other teams in the race.
For the changeover in the Teams event, the first and second drivers must visibly tag. To dothis, the first driver proceeds to the start/finish line, rounds their respective beach position
marker (see 7.2.7 c), and visibly touches (tags) with the second driver who is positioned with
their toes on or behind the shoreward side of the changeover line and to the seaward side of
the beach position marker. The outgoing driver is not required to be stationary, but the tag mustoccur within this area which is called the changeover zone.
Note 1: For the IRB Teams Rescue and the IRB Relay events a pole is to be placed directly
behind the beach position marker and is to extend approximately 1.8m out of the sand to assist
with ensuring the correct changeover procedure. Alternatively, 1.8m high beach position
markers may be used for all events.
Note 2: For the purpose of judging the tag must occur when the feet of both the incoming andoutgoing competitors are within the designated changeover zone. It is clarified that the feet do
not need to be grounded within this zone.

IRB RESCUE
A. Each team shall comprise one driver, one crewperson and one patient.
B. The patient is positioned as described in S7-3.1.
C. The start shall be as described in points 3.2 and 3.3.
D. The crew shall proceed out to sea, pick up their patient and then return to shore, as describedin S7-3.4 and D7-3.5.
E. The finish shall be as described in S7-3.6.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 7 – Inflatable Rescue Boat Competition

5.

IRB MASS RESCUE
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.

F.

G.
H.
6.

Page S7-11

Each team shall comprise one driver, one crewperson and two patients.
Both patients are positioned as described in S7-3.1.
The start shall be as described in S7-3.2 and S7-3.3.
The crew shall proceed out to sea, pick up their first patient and then return to shore, as
described in S7-3.4 and S7-3.5.
The driver shall exit as described in S7-3.6. At the shore the crewperson controls the IRB as
described in S7-3.7 and may turn it around. The patient must exit the IRB after the driver exits.
The patient is permitted to assist the crewperson to turn and hold the position of the IRB asdetailed in S7-3.3B, C and D. It is also permitted for the boat to be placed at an angle to assist
driver entry if it is safe to do so.
The driver proceeds to the start/finish line, rounds the allotted beach turning marker and returns
to the IRB. The driver may also assist the crewperson to turn the IRB around. Should the first
patient have assisted the crewperson turning and hold the position of the IRB, the patient may,at their discretion, continue to maintain contact with the IRB after the driver make contact with
the IRB but must release contact and move safely clear prior to the engine propelling the IRB
forward.
Note: Patients must then place themselves in a position where they do not impede the conductof the race or judging of the event.
The IRB shall be relaunched and restarted, and the crew will proceed out to sea to pick up theirsecond patient and then return to shore, as described in S7-3.4 and S7-3.5.
The finish shall be as described in S7-3.6.

IRB TEAMS RESCUE
A.

B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.

H.

I.

J.
K.

Each team shall comprise of two drivers, two crewpersons and two patients.
Note: In National Teams Inflatable Rescue Boat Lifesaving World Championships the IRB
Teams Rescue event is a mixed event. Teams shall consist of one female crew (driver,
crewpersons, and patients) and one male crew (driver, two crewperson and patient) competingin that order.
The patients are positioned as described in S7-3.1.
The start shall be as described in S7-3.2 and S7-3.3.
The second driver and second crewperson shall position themselves at the changeover line.
The crew shall proceed out to sea, pick up their first patient and then return to shore, as
described in S7-3.4 and S7-3.5.
The driver, crewperson and patient shall exit the IRB as described in S7-3.6. The second
crewperson crosses the changeover line and proceeds to the IRB once the driver has left the
IRB.
The first crewperson turns the IRB and must maintain control of it as described in S7-3.7A. The
patient is permitted to assist the crewperson to turn and hold the position of the IRB as detailedin S7-3.3B, C and D. It is also permitted for the boat to be placed at an angle to assist driverentry if it is safe to do so. Unless otherwise permitted by the Chief Referee a maximum of two
team members are permitted to maintain contact (control) with the IRB at any one time.
Note: The first crewperson/first patient must retire and stand clear of the IRB when contact(control) with the IRB is released.
The driver proceeds to the start/finish line, rounds their respective beach position marker, andvisibly tags the second driver who is at the change/over line with their toes on or behind theshoreward side of the start/finish line and to the seaward side of the beach turning marker (i.e.,changeover zone). Outgoing drivers are not required to be stationary, but the tag must occur
within the changeover zone.
After the tag, the second driver proceeds to the water’s edge to relaunch and restart the IRB.
The one remaining first crewperson/patient at their discretion may continue to maintain contact
with the IRB after the second driver and/or second crewperson touches the IRB but must
release contact and move safely clear prior to the engine propelling the IRB forward.
Note: The first crewperson and first patient must place themselves in a position where they do
not impede the conduct of the race or judging of the event.
The second crew will proceed out to sea, pick up their second patient and then return to shore,
as described in S7-3.4 and S7-3.5.
The finish shall be as described in S7-3.6.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 7 – Inflatable Rescue Boat Competition

7.

IRB RESCUE TUBE
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.

H.
I.

J.

K.
L.

M.
N.

O.
P.
8.

Page S7-12

Each team shall comprise one driver, one crewperson and one patient.
The patient is positioned as described in S7-3.1.
For this event only, the rescue tube (excluding the harness/lanyard and rope) is to be stored
under the spray dodger at the start of the event. No adjustments are permitted to be made to
the rescue tube.
The start shall be as described in S7-3.2 and S7-3.3.
Following the start and while maintaining a secure position, the crewperson shall don the rescue
tube harness in a safe manner prior to rounding the buoy.
The IRB shall round the turning buoy anti-clockwise and then must remain wholly, i.e., all partsof the IRB, on the beach side of the turning buoy until the patient pick-up has commenced (seeS7-7K).
After the IRB has rounded the turning buoy, the crewperson shall enter the water from theshoreward side of the buoy. The rescue tube shall be unclipped and held in a secure grip. It
must be ensured that no part of the rescue tube, harness/lanyard o rope snags the IRB or
driver.
Note: There is no requirement for the crewperson to enter the water on or keep the turningbuoy on their left-hand side upon leaving the IRB.
The crewperson shall then swim to the respective patient keeping their patient pick-up andrescue tube patient buoys on their left-hand side.
The rescue tube must then be fastened around the patient and under both arms by the
crewperson and/or patient. The patient may clip themselves into the rescue tube unaided. The
crewperson does not have to break stroke during this process as long as the clip on the rescue
tube is secured to an O-ring prior to the patient crossing to the shoreward side of the rescue
tube patient buoy (judged at the feet of the patient).
The crewperson completes their 180 degrees anti-clockwise turn around the buoy and tows thepatient to the IRB maintaining the patient pick-up buoy and turning buoy on their left-hand side.
The patient is permitted to assist by kicking, and sculling with arms under the surface, but must
not swim with an out-of-water arm recovery. The patient must not be towed on their stomach(abdomen). The use of swim fins, hand fins or other non-approved aids are not permitted.
Once the crewperson or patient has made contact with the IRB, the patient pickup is deemed
to have commenced and the IRB may cross to the seaward side of the turning buoy.
The crewperson and patient shall board the IRB on the port side with or without assistance fromthe driver. The driver may release the motor throttle grip and stand to assist the pick-up
providing the motor is in neutral.
Note: The crewperson is permitted to enter the boat before the patient or vice versa.
The IRB shall continue anti-clockwise around the turning buoy.
The rescue tube shall remain around the patient and the crewperson shall remove the harness
and pass it to the patient. The patient must then keep a secure grip on the lanyard/harness andrope until the patient exits the IRB to ensure that it does not snag anything within the IRB or
extend past the transom or pass through either of the self-bailers.
Note: There is no requirement for the patient to hold up their hand with the lanyard/harness
and rope at the completion of the race for judge notation purposes.
The crew shall return to shore as described in S7-3.5.
The finish shall be as described in S7-3.6.

DISQUALIFICATION
Crews shall be disqualified if found to have failed to comply with any event procedures, descriptions,rules and/or other matters contained in the ILS Competition Rule Book or relevant circulars orbulletins. Safety and technical disqualifications for IRB competition are in the disqualification codesin this section.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 7 – Inflatable Rescue Boat Competition

9.

Page S7-13

DISQUALIFICATION CODES FOR IRB EVENTSA.

General Disqualifications

Code and Disqualification

Events1.

Not competing in accordance with the general rules.

All events2.

A competitor or team may be disqualified if a competitor, team, or handler is All events
deemed to have competed unfairly. Examples of “competing unfairly” include:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

3.
4.

Committing a doping or doping-related infraction.
Impersonating another competitor.
Attempting to defeat the ballot or draw for events or positions.
Competing twice in the same individual event.
Competing twice in the same event in different teams.
Purposely interfering with a course to gain advantage.
Jostling or obstructing another competitor handler so as to impede theirprogress.
•
Receiving physical or material outside assistance (other than verbal orother direction).
•
Participating contrary to the spirit of the competition (as described in thecode of fair play).
Competitors may not be permitted to start in an event if they are late reporting All eventsto the marshalling area. This may be noted as a “did not start” (DNS) or similaron the result sheet.
A competitor or team absent from the start of an event shall be disqualified. All events
This may be noted as a “did not start” (DNS) or similar on the result sheet.

5.

Activities that result in wilful damage to the venue sites, accommodation sites All eventsor the property of others will result in disqualification of the individuals involved
from competition.

6.

Abuse of officials may result in disqualification from the competition.

All events

7.

Failing to comply with the starter’s commands within a reasonable time.

All events8.

A competitor who, after the starter’s first command, disturbing others in the All events
race through sound or otherwise may be disqualified.

B.

Technical and Safety Disqualification Codes

TDQ—Technical Disqualification; SDQ – Safety Disqualification
A. STARTDQ Type
A1 – Driver or crewperson false starts.
TDQ
A2 – IRB not positioned as directed and/or not in front of crews’ finish markers.
TDQ
A3 – Bow of IRB not pointing towards the wave line at start of event.
TDQ
Note: Angling the IRB to assist driver and/or crewman entry is permitted.
A4 – Handler assists crew to launch IRB.
TDQ
A5 – Driver starts motor outside of IRB.
SDQ
A6 – Driver using two-handed start and motor not in neutral.
TDQ
A7 – Driver starts motor when crewperson not in contact with IRB.
TDQ
A8 – During or immediately after the start, the IRB moving in an uncontrolled or unsafe
SDQfashion.
A9 – Driver pushes or pulls the IRB while motor is in gear and motor running.
SDQInternational Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 7 – Inflatable Rescue Boat Competition

Page S7-14

B. PROCEEDING TO AND FROM BUOYS
DQ Type
B1 – General driving and/or crewing techniques that lead to a crew person (and/or
SDQ
patient) being dislodged from their normal position within the IRB.
B2 – Punching a wave in a dangerous manner or causing the driver or crewperson to be
SDQdislodged.
B3 – IRB turning around “incorrect buoy or buoys”.
TDQ
B4 – The turning buoy becoming submerged during a turn and does not pop up on the
TDQ
correct (port) side of the IRB
B5 – Leading IRB has right of way; trailing IRB(s) did not take evasive action.
SDQ
B6 – Crew steering a wide course or IRB delaying a turn so as to impede or force another
TDQ
IRB out of its true course.
B7 – IRB returning to shore not keeping IRB turning buoy to the left-hand side of the IRB.
TDQ
B8 – Crewperson or patient losing contact with the IRB during the course of an event.
SDQ
B9 – Loss of control by the driver and/or crewperson even if still in contact with the IRB.
SDQ
B10 – IRB not completing the course as defined for that event.
TDQ
B11 – IRB not completing a 360º turn around the allocated IRB turning buoy.
TDQ
B12 – Returning to shore, coming down a wave in a dangerous manner and/or causing
SDQ
the driver and/or crewperson and/or patient to be dislodged.
C. PATIENT PICK-UP
DQ Type
C1 – Patient pick-up not commenced on seaward side of patient buoy.
TDQ
C2 – Patient not picked up on the port side of the IRB.
TDQ
C3 – Driver, crewperson or patient losing contact with IRB.
SDQ
C4 – Patient not picked up in a safe manner (i.e., patient pick-up not completed as
SDQprescribed in the rules).
C5 – IRB passes around incorrect turning or patient pick-up buoy.
TDQ
C6 – IRB is driven such that the buoy is forced under the pontoon and does not pop up
TDQ
on the correct (port side) during any part of the patient pick-up turn.
C7 – IRB passes around turning or patient pick-up buoy in a clockwise (right hand in)
TDQ
direction.
C8 – After missing patient pick-up, IRB did not complete a 180º turn around IRB turning
TDQ
buoy before reattempting patient pick-up at patient buoy.
C9 – Driver and/or crewperson failing to assist with the patient lift into the IRB.
TDQ
D. IRB RESCUE TUBE EVENT
DQ Type
D1 – IRB not rounding its turning buoy before crewperson entered water.
TDQ
D2 – Crewperson not leaving the IRB in the correct manner.
TDQ
D3 – Crewperson has rescue tube clipped up before reaching patient.
TDQ
D4 – Crewperson/patient not swimming anti-clockwise around their respective buoy.
TDQ
D5 – Patient not clipped into ‘O’ rings on rescue tube.
TDQ
D6 – Patient floating on stomach or using arm action above the water
TDQ
while being towed.
D7 – IRB not remaining on beach side of the turning buoys until patient or crewperson
TDQ
has made contact with the IRB.
D8 – Crewperson/patient not boarding IRB on the port side.
TDQ
D9 – IRB not completing an anti-clockwise turn around the turning buoy after pick-up.
TDQ
D10 – Patient not having the rescue tube clipped around waist and/or having theTDQlanyard/harness and rope secured at the finish of the rescue tube event.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 7 – Inflatable Rescue Boat Competition

Page S7-15

E. CHANGEOVER – IRB MASS/TEAMS
E1 – Driver leaving IRB with motor running (i.e., does not activate engine kill switch).
E2 – Driver leaves IRB, then crewperson or patient resets kill switch.

DQ Type
TDQ
TDQ

E3 – Driver(s) and/or crewperson and/or patient not completing the changeover as
defined for the event required as patient assisting turn the IRB is now permitted.
E4 – Patient leaves IRB before the IRB motor is stopped.

TDQ

E5 – Driver(s) and/or crewperson or patient not completing changeover as defined forthe event.

TDQ

TDQ

F. FINISH
DQ TypeF1– Driver leaves IRB with motor running (i.e., does not activate engine kill switch) or
TDQ
removes kill switch lanyard from the IRB if that is the stopping mechanism.
F2 – Driver exits IRB incorrectly.
TDQ
F3 – Driver beaches IRB out of their respective lane as defined.
TDQ
F4 – Patient(s) leaves IRB before the IRB motor is stopped.
TDQ
F5 – Driver fails to cross the finish line on their feet.
TDQ
G. GENERAL
G1 – Driver acting in an unsafe manner.
G2 – Crewperson acting in an unsafe manner.
G3 – Patient acting in an unsafe manner.
G4 – Crewperson losing the bow rope.

DQ Type
SDQ
SDQ
SDQ
SDQ

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 8 – Facility & Equipment Standards & Scrutineering ProceduresWorld Water Safety

INTERNATIONAL LIFE SAVING FEDERATIONILS COMPETITION RULE BOOKSECTION 8
FACILITY AND EQUIPMENT STANDARDS AND
SCRUTINEERING PROCEDURES

2023 Edition(Effective 1 June 2023)

Page S8-1

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 8 – Facility & Equipment Standards & Scrutineering Procedures

Page S8-2

SECTION 8
FACILITY AND EQUIPMENT STANDARDSAND SCRUTINEERING PROCEDURES
1.

POOL FACILITY STANDARDS

Lifesaving World Championships shall be conducted in an eight-lane (minimum) 50m swimming pool which
complies with ILS standards. Facility measurements must be certified by a person appointed or approved by
the ILS Management Committee.
1.1

Scrutineering procedure
A.

B.

C.
D.
1.2

For ILS-managed events (e.g., Lifesaving World Championships, World Games), a person
appointed by the organising committee shall review a pool survey certificate (or similar) thatspecifies pool length, width, depths, lane widths and ropes, starting platforms, electronic timing
equipment, etc.
In the absence of such a certificate, the person appointed by the ILS Management Committee
shall check that the pool facility meets ILS facility standards. In addition, the following
equipment shall be checked:•
Obstacles, rescue tubes, throw lines, manikins.
•
Manikin platforms (including a depth check to ensure the platform is not too shallow).
Minimum measuring equipment required: tape measure (minimum 50m with 1mm increments;
depth rod or pole).
For ILS-sanctioned events, the sanction application requires a declaration from the competition
organisers that the pool and all equipment to be used in the competition meets ILS standards.

LengthThe pool shall be 50m between the automatic officiating equipment touch panels at the starting end
and the wall or touch panels at the turning end. A tolerance of plus 30mm and minus 0.00mm in eachlane is allowed.

1.3

Lanes
There shall be a minimum of eight lanes that shall be at least 2.5m wide, with two spaces of at least
200mm outside the first and last lanes. There shall be lane ropes on both sides of each lane that
extend the full length of the course. Each lane rope will consist of floats placed end-to-end having aminimum diameter of 50mm to a maximum of 150mm. The lane ropes shall be firmly stretched.

1.4

Starting platform
The height of the platform above the water surface shall be from 500mm to 750mm. The surface
area shall be at least 500mm x 500mm and covered with non-slip material. The maximum slope shallnot be more than 10 degrees. The starting platform may have an adjustable setting back plate andstarting grips for both platform and in-water starts. If necessary, any exposed ends on starting grips,
etc. should be covered.

1.5

Automatic officiating equipment
The pool shall be equipped with automatic officiating equipment to record the time of each competitor
and to determine the place of each competitor in race events.

1.6

Water
The pool water shall meet the clarity standards and the bacteriological and chemical standards ofthe applicable local health regulations in the host nation. The water temperature shall be 25 to 28
degrees Celsius.

1.7

Depth
For each event conducted, the pool shall comply with ILS event-specific depth standards. Except as
specified in event-specific standards, a minimum depth of 1.0m is required.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 8 – Facility & Equipment Standards & Scrutineering Procedures

1.8

Page S8-3

Dive start
Minimum depth of 1.35m extending from 1.0m to at least 6.0m from the starting end wall.
WATER SURFACE

START
WALL

5m

1m

1.9

Obstacle Swim, Obstacle Relay
Minimum depth of 1.8 m extending from 2.0m on both sides of any obstacle.
WATER SURFACEOBSTACLE

MINIMUM DEPTH 1.8m

2m

1.10

2m

Manikin Carry (50m), Super Lifesaver (200m)
A.
B.

Minimum depth of 1.8 m extending at least 2.0m beyond the 24 m mark from the wall.
Manikins are placed on the pool bottom to a maximum depth of 3.0m. In pools deeper than
3.0m, “platforms” may be used to hold manikins at the 3.0m depth.
WATER SURFACEMINIMUM DEPTH 1.8m

24m TO WALL

2m

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 8 – Facility & Equipment Standards & Scrutineering Procedures

1.11

Manikin Carry with Fins (100m), Manikin Tow with Fins (100m), Super Lifesaver (200m), Pool
Lifesaver Relay (4 x 50m)
A.
B.
C.
D.

Minimum depth of 1.8 m extending at least 2.0m from the turn wall.
Manikins are placed on the pool bottom to a maximum depth of 3.0m. In pools deeper than
3.0m, “platforms” may be used to hold manikins at the 3.0m depth.
In the Manikin Carry with Fins event, the manikin shall be positioned on its back in contact withthe pool bottom and its base touching the pool wall, with its head in the direction of the finish.
Where the facility design does not provide a vertical wall that joins the bottom at 90 degrees,
the manikin must be positioned as close as possible to the wall, but no further than 300mm
from the wall as measured at the water surface.
WATER SURFACEMANIKINMINIMUM
DEPTH 1.8m

WATER SURFACE

TURN
WALL

TURN
WALL

MINIMUM
DEPTH 1.8m

POOL BOTTOMMANIKIN

POOL BOTTOM

2m

1.12

Page S8-4

2mRescue Medley (100m)
A.
B.

Minimum depth of 1.8 m extending at least 2.0m beyond the 16.5m mark from the turn wall.
Manikins are placed on the pool bottom to a maximum depth of 3.0m. In pools deeper than
3.0m, “platforms” may be used to hold manikins at the 3.0m depth.
WATER SURFACE

TURN
WALL

MINIMUM
DEPTH 1.8m
MANIKIN
POOL BOTTOM

2m

1.13

16.5m

Manikin Relay (4 x 25m)
A.
B.
C.

Minimum depth of 1.8 m extending at least 2.0m on both sides of the 25m exchange mark at
centre pool.
Minimum depth of 1.0m at the starting end wall.
Minimum depth of 1.8 m extending at least 2.0m from the turn wall.
START
WALL

TURN
WALL

MINIMUM
DEPTH 1.0m

MINIMUM
DEPTH 1.8m

1m
2m
50m

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 8 – Facility & Equipment Standards & Scrutineering Procedures

1.14

Page S8-5

Medley Relay (4 x 50m)
A.
B.

Minimum depth of 1.35m, extending from 1.0m to at least 6.0m from the starting end wall.
Minimum depth of 1.8 m, extending at least 2.0m from the turn wall.
WATER SURFACE

START
WALL

TURN
WALL

MINIMUM DEPTH 1.35m
POOL BOTTOM

1m

MINIMUM
DEPTH 1.8m

5m
2m

1.15

Line Throw
A.
B.

1.16

Minimum depth of 1.8 m extending at least 2.0m from the rigid crossbar.
The rigid crossbar is positioned on the surface across each lane 12.5m from the starting end of
the pool. A tolerance of plus 100mm and minus 0.00mm in each lane is allowed.

Simulated Emergency Response Competition (SERC)
SERC may be conducted in the eight-lane 50m pool or in a facility of another design, as approvedby the organising committee for a competition.

2.

GENERAL ILS EQUIPMENT STANDARDSThe ILS has adopted the following equipment specifications. Where appropriate, allowable tolerances arerecorded – for example “(± 200mm)” meaning a tolerance of plus 200mm and minus 200mm is allowed.
Where appropriate, dimensions and weights are recorded as “minimum” or “maximum” allowed.
In addition, all equipment used in Lifesaving World Championships must comply with the criteria outlined in
the commercial identification policy in the championships handbook.
Scrutineering of equipment
Competition bulletins/circulars/handbooks shall detail the procedures for checking equipment. The organisingcommittee reserves the right to re-inspect competition equipment at any time during the championships.
Equipment found to contravene ILS specifications shall be subject to disqualification, which may result in thedisqualification of the competitor using the equipment and the possible disqualification of the full team.
Protests and appeals against rulings of personal equipment ineligibility are permitted.
Some equipment may require detailed specification and testing in advance of the competition due to design
features and the nature of the measurement equipment required. Surf skis, boards, IRBs, surf boats andmanikins have additional specifications that can be referenced through the ILS at www.ilsf.org.
3.

POOL EQUIPMENT STANDARDS

3.1

Rescue Manikins
GeneralThe first Manikins were constructed by the founder of FIS, Mr Raymond Pitet.
For Lifesaving World championships, Regional Championships, World Games, and ILS managed or
sanctioned events the only manikins that shall be used are those assessed and approved by the ILS.
The ILS maintains a list of approved competition manikins. The ILS approved competition manikins
are:
•
•
•

The German (DLRG) Manikin.
The Canadian (LSC) Manikin.
The Australian (SLSA) Manikin.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 8 – Facility & Equipment Standards & Scrutineering Procedures

Page S8-6

•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Manikins are constructed from polyethylene and once
moulded, are characterised by a high level of stiffness to stayin shape for competition.
Manikins must be hermetic (i.e., capable of being filled withwater and sealed for competition).
Material – Polyethylene.
Colour – Orange.
Transverse line – needs to be of contrasting colour with therest of the manikin and water.
Thickness – 944 kg/m2.
Fluidity Index – 3.0 dg/min.

1m

Construction and composition

Mechanical properties of materials
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Coefficient of Elasticity: 1000 N/mm2.
Shock resistance lzod at +23 degrees Celsius: 19 Kj/m2.
Shock resistance lzod at -20 degrees Celsius: 6 Kj/m2.
Breaking resistance (ESCR) at 60àC and 2N/mm2: 40h.
Traction resistance at 50mm/min: 31 N/mm2.
Break point in lengthening at 50mm/min: >500%.
Hardness Shore D: 57.
Vicat point of softening: 121° C.
Fusion temperature: 128° C.

Technical measurement and weight specification (refer 8.2 for scrutineering detail)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Total height: 1000mm (variance: 980-1000mm, 2% variance).
Height under armpit: 595mm (permitted variance: 1.7% or 585-595mm).
Height transition line: 550mm (permitted variance: 1.9% or 540-550mm).
Width at base: 260mm (permitted variance: 4% or 250-260mm).
Depth at base: 200mm (permitted variance: 5.3% or 190-200mm).
Circumference of head at eyes: 590mm (permitted variance: 3.5% or 570-590mm).
Circumference of breast under arms: 800mm (permitted variance: 2.6% or 780-800mm).
Circumference of base 1 cm from bottom: 840mm (permitted variance: 2.4% or 820-840mm).
Weight in water completely submerged: 1500 g (1450-1500 g, 3.4% variance).

Physical features•••

The manikin must resemble a human and possess anthropological features that are required for
rescue and resuscitation. The head requires the following features: eyes, nose, mouth, chin, jaw,
and throat. The body requires a chest, torso arm buds, abdomen, and pelvis.
For events in which the manikin is recovered from the bottom, the manikin needs to rest on its
back at 2.0m depth without moving. The manikin needs to be able to rest in this position for aperiod of 4 hours without leaking water or air. If the manikin has filling holes and plugs, theseshould be located for ease of filling and emptying and be water and airtight. The manikin weightshould be located such that it keeps the manikin positioned on its back.
The manikin needs to be able to float at the transition line for use in manikin towing events.

Scrutineering procedure••
3.2

A person appointed by the organising committee shall check the approved manikin. Minimum
measuring equipment required: tape measure (minimum 10m with 1mm increments); weighscale (minimum 50 kg capacity with 0.01kg increments).
For ILS LWC or sanctioned events, a declaration from the competition organisers is required thatall pooled rescue manikins to be used in the competition will meet ILS standards.

Obstacles•

Dimensions: Obstacles used in pool events shall be 700mm (± 10mm) high and 2.4 m (± 30mm)
wide with no dangerous parts.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 8 – Facility & Equipment Standards & Scrutineering Procedures••

Page S8-7

Inner frame: The inner frame shall consist of a net or other element which does not permit
passage by a swimmer, and which is of a bright colour that contrasts with the water and is clearlyvisible.
Upper line: The upper line of the obstacle is placed on the water level and shall be clearly visible.
Use of an additional floating line across the upper line of the obstacles is recommended.

Scrutineering procedure
•
•

3.3

A person appointed by the organising committee shall check the obstacles. Minimum measuring
equipment required: tape measure (minimum 10m with 1mm increments).
For ILS-sanctioned events, the sanction application requires a declaration from the competition
organisers that all obstacles to be used in the competition will meet ILS standards.

Rescue Tubes
Construction and composition
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Source of buoyancy: Material to be as specified in Australian Standard AS2259 or equivalent.
The material shall be closed cell plastic foam, and durable and flexible.
Buoyancy: The rescue tube shall have a minimum buoyancy factor of 100 newtons in fresh water.
Flexibility: The body of the rescue tube shall be of such a nature as to be able to roll within itself
with a force of 5-6 kg.
Strength: Webbing, leash, and fittings shall be able to withstand a minimum of 454.55 kg (1000lb.) stress in a longitudinal direction without damage.
Weight: Total weight of the tube should be between 600-750 g.
Colour: The body of the rescue tube shall be a colour-fast red, yellow, or orange (impregnated,painted, or covered) as per Australian Standard AS1318.
Stitching/thread: Stitching shall be a locked stitched type 301 of British Standard BS 3870 as
illustrated in Australian Standard AS2259. The thread is to have similar properties to thematerials being sewn.

Technical measurements specification
A.

B.
C.
D.
E.

Rescue Tube Dimensions: The body of the tube (flotation component):•
Length: Minimum length 875mm; maximum length 1000mm.
•
Breadth: Maximum breadth 150mm.
•
Thickness: Maximum thickness 100mm.
•
The distance from the extremity of the clip to the extremity of the second O-ring shall bea minimum of 1.30m to a maximum of 1.65m.
Leash/line: The length of the leash from the first O-ring to the lanyard webbing shall be aminimum of 1.90m to a maximum of 2.10m and must include a minimum of 2 O-rings. The leash
shall be a synthetic type of rope which is UV treated.
Webbing connections: Webbing used for the connection of O-rings/clips to the body of the tube
shall be 25mm (± 2.5mm) wide woven nylon.
Lanyard/harness: Webbing for the lanyard shall be 50mm (± 5.0mm) wide woven nylon with aminimum length of 1.30m to a maximum of 1.60m. The circumference of the lanyard loop shallbe a minimum of 1.20m.
O-rings: O-rings shall be brass, stainless steel (welded) or nylon. If nylon, the rings shall be UVtreated. O-rings shall be 37.5mm (± 10.0mm) internal diameter, having no sharp edges or
protrusions that may cut or injure the rescuer or victim.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 8 – Facility & Equipment Standards & Scrutineering Procedures

F.
G.

Page S8-8

Clips: The clip shall be a brass or stainless steel snap hook KS2470-70 with an overall lengthof 70mm (± 7.0mm). It shall have no sharp edges or protrusions that may cut or injure therescuer or victim.
Overall length: The distance from the clip to the end of the lanyard/harness shall be a minimumof 3.65m to a maximum of 4.30m.
CLIP

1st O-RING

2nd O-RING

1100-1400mm
1300-1650mm

Total Length: Clip to End of Lanyard/Harness: 3.65m - 4.30m.
Scrutineering procedure••
3.4

A person appointed by the organising committee shall check the rescue tubes. Minimum
measuring equipment required: tape measure (minimum 10m with 1mm increments).
For ILS LWC or sanctioned events, a declaration from the competition organisers is required thatall pooled rescue tubes to be used in the competition will meet ILS standards.

Swim Fins
Fins are measured while not worn. Swim fins used in competitions shall comply with the following
specifications:••

Length: maximum overall length 650mm, including ‘shoe’ or ankle strap (ankle strap extended).
Width: 300mm maximum at the widest point of the blade
SWIM FINS
Shoe/ankle strap
30cm

65cm

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 8 – Facility & Equipment Standards & Scrutineering Procedures

Page S8-9

Scrutineering procedure
•

•
•
3.5

A person appointed by the organising committee shall check the fins at the pool and/or beach.
Minimum measuring equipment required: tape measure (minimum 10m with 1mm increments),
or; a fin box in which the fins are fully inserted, or; another measurement tool for quick andefficient measurement.
The organising committee shall provide a stamp or sticker to be affixed to the fins as proof of thescrutineering check.
A similar process shall be undertaken for ILS LWC and sanctioned events.

Throw Lines
For the Line Throw event, throw lines shall be plaited, buoyant polypropylene with non-memory
characteristics:••

Diameter: 8mm (± 1mm).
Length: minimum 16.5m; maximum 17.5m.

Scrutineering procedure
F.
G.

A person appointed by the organising committee shall check the throw lines. Minimum
measuring equipment required: tape measure (minimum 20m with 1mm increments).
For ILS LWC or sanctioned events, a declaration from the competition organisers is requiredthat all pooled throw lines to be used in the competition will meet ILS standards.

4.

BEACH/OCEAN EQUIPMENT STANDARDS

4.1

Rescue Tubes
See S8-3.3.

4.2

Swim Fins
See S8-3.4.

4.3

Batons (Beach Flags and Beach Relay)
Beach flag batons and beach relay batons shall be made of flexible material (e.g., flexible hose) a
maximum of 300mm and a minimum of 250mm long with an external diameter of approximately
25mm (± 1mm). Batons should be coloured so as to be easily visible.
Scrutineering procedure
•
•

4.4

A person appointed by the organising committee shall check the batons. Minimum measuring
equipment required: tape measure (minimum 1 m with 1mm increments).
For ILS LWC or sanctioned events, a declaration from the competition organisers is required thatall beach flag batons to be used in the competition will meet ILS standards.

Surf Boards
Surf boards must conform to ILS specifications including the following:••

Weight: minimum 7.6 kg*
Length: maximum 3.2 m

Video camera: If a camera is mounted on the board, it must be installed on a mounting device andtoggle strap supplied or recommended by the manufacturer of the device. The camera shall bemounted anywhere from the hand grips closest to the nose to the nose of the craft.
* The weight of any plugs permanently installed into the craft to attach the camera is included in theoverall weight of the craft. The weight of other, non-permanently installed mount and camera are notincluded in the overall weight.
Detailed specifications for surf boards are described in a separate document located athttps://www.ilsf.org/lifesaving-sport/rules/irb-specification/.
Scrutineering procedure•

When Boards are scrutineered craft shall be checked for maximum length, minimum weight, andsafety (e.g., state of repair). Minimum measuring equipment required: tape measure, minimum

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 8 – Facility & Equipment Standards & Scrutineering Procedures

•
•
•
4.5

Page S8-10

10m with 1mm increments; weigh scale with minimum 10 kg capacity with 0.01 kg increments.
Also recommended is a measuring “jig” to measure length and testing gauges to measure nose
diameters and minimum fin width and thickness.
The host organising committee shall provide a stamp or sticker to be affixed to each craft as
proof of the scrutineering check.
For ILS LWC or sanctioned events, a declaration from the competition organisers is required thatall pooled boards to be used in the competition will meet ILS standards.
Any other scrutineering determined by the competition organisers.

Inflatable Rescue Boats (IRB)
Inflatable rescue boats and motors shall meet the specifications of the ILS and the host country, andbe supplied by the host organising committee. The organising committee shall make IRB boat andmotor specifications available to teams well in advance of the competition.
Video camera: If a camera is mounted on the IRB, it must be installed on a mounting device andtoggle strap supplied or recommended by the manufacturer of the device. The camera may only be
mounted on the transom or on the cowling of the motor.
Detailed specifications for IRBs are described in
https://www.ilsf.org/lifesaving-sport/rules/irb-specification/.

4.6

aseparate

document

locatedat

Personal Flotation Devices (PFDs)
IRB event competitors (drivers, crewpersons, and patients) must wear solid PFDs (lifejackets) thatcomply with the international standard – ISO12402-5 Level 50 or equivalent. Inflatable PFDs
(lifejackets) cannot be worn in lieu of a solid PFD (lifejacket).
The wearing of PFDs is optional in other craft events. It is highly recommended that the PFDs wornby competitors comply with an international standard or equivalent. (e.g., AS4758 L25 flotation)
In cases where the device does not meet the standard, the wearer is encouraged to complete a risk
assessment and read all relevant safety and operational instructions on the product. Not all PFDs
meet standards and thus their effectiveness in preventing drowning is unproven. Non-compliancewith the International Standard may mean that these devices present other potential risks (e.g., poor
fit, easily dislodged in surf conditions and restricted movement and breathing).
Scrutineering procedure
•
•

4.7

A person appointed by the organising committee shall check that pooled PFDs meet ILS
specifications. A person appointed by organising committee shall check the competitor provided
PFDs.
For ILS LWC or sanctioned events, a declaration from the competition organisers is required thatall pooled PFDs to be used in the competition will meet ILS standards.

Helmets
Approved aquatic helmets are EN 1385 certified (or equivalent). Helmets may be in the
manufacturer’s original colour, or preferably, painted (provided that the helmets performance is notcompromised) or covered in material in accordance with competitors’ team/competition caps.
Scrutineering procedure
•
•

4.8

A person appointed by the organising committee shall check that pooled helmets meet ILS
specifications. A person appointed by the organising committee shall check the competitor
provided helmets.
For ILS LWC or sanctioned events, a declaration from the competition organisers is required thatall pooled helmets to be used in the competition will meet ILS standards.

Wetsuits
Wetsuits may be either full and extend from the neck to the wrists and ankles or can be briefer. With
the exception of IRB events, wetsuits worn in swimming events or swimming legs of events shallhave a maximum thickness of 5mm at any location on the wetsuit with a tolerance of ± 0.5mm. Thereis no maximum thickness for wetsuits worn in IRB events or non-swimming events.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 8 – Facility & Equipment Standards & Scrutineering Procedures

Page S8-11

Scrutineering procedure
•
•
•
4.9

A person appointed by the organising committee shall check the water temperature and wetsuits.
All wetsuits are subject to random scrutineering. Minimum measuring equipment required:thermometer (minimum 10 degrees Celsius with 0.5 degree increments); micrometre.
A similar process shall be undertaken for ILS-sanctioned event.

Surf Boats
Surf boats must conform to ILS specifications including the following:•••

Weight: minimum 180 kg (excluding oars, oarlocks, rescue tube and all optional equipment)
Length: minimum 6.86 m; maximum 7.925m (excluding outrigger)
Beam: minimum 1.62 m (measured in the midship section)

Video camera: If a camera is mounted on the surf boat it must be installed on a mounting device
and toggle strap supplied or recommended by the manufacturer of the device.
The camera may be mounted on the splash board (front deck), or on the tanks opposite the rowers’
seat, and on the rear deck.
* The weight of any plugs permanently installed into the boat to attach the camera is included in theoverall weight of the craft. The weight of other, non-permanently installed mount and camera are notincluded in the overall weight.
Detailed specifications for surf boats are described in a separate document located athttps://www.ilsf.org/lifesaving-sport/rules/irb-specification/.
Scrutineering procedure
•

•
•
•
4.10

When scrutineered boats shall at a minimum, be checked for weight and safety (e.g., state of
repair). Oars shall also be checked for competitor safety. Minimum measuring equipment
required: tape measure, minimum 10m with 1mm increments; weigh scale with minimum 200 kg
capacity with 0.1 kg increments.
The host organising committee shall provide a stamp or sticker to be affixed to each boat as
proof of the scrutineering check.
For ILS LWC or sanctioned events, a declaration from the competition organisers is required thatall pooled boats to be used in the competition will meet ILS standards.
Any other scrutineering determined by the competition organisers.

Buoys and Flags
Ocean event Buoys: The buoys used in ocean events shall be of distinctive colours, and, with thefirst buoy being number one (looking from the left, facing the water). The buoys and colours aredescribed in the rules for the various ocean events in this Rule Book. For the straight line of buoys
used in particular events the colours are:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Buoy 1:
Buoy 2:
Buoy 3:
Buoy 4:
Buoy 5:
Buoy 6:
Buoy 7:
Buoy 8:
Buoy 9:Red and Yellow halves
Black
Green with a White stripe.
Red.
Blue with a White stripe.
Yellow.
White with a Black stripe.
Orange.
Green and Yellow Halves.

When these buoys are used for the Surf Race, Surf Teams Race, Rescue Tube Rescue, Rescue
Tube Race, Board Rescue, Oceanman/Oceanwoman, Oceanman/Oceanwoman Relay races theymust be affixed to the buoy line on both ends of the buoy so that they float horizontally in the waterand are of equal distance from the beach.
When the buoys are used for the Surf Boat and IRB events, they must be affixed by one end to anindividual buoy line so that they float vertically and are of equal distance from the beach.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 8 – Facility & Equipment Standards & Scrutineering Procedures

Page S8-12

Where there is more than one area being used it is appropriate to use different coloured turning
buoys in each area for board, ski and Oceanman/Oceanwoman craft legs as appropriate (and withmatching finish flags) to assist all involved in competition identify and participate in that area.
Ocean events Flags: The flags used in ocean events shall be of distinctive colours as described in
the rules for the various ocean events in this Rule Book. Where there is more than one arena being
used, it is appropriate to use different coloured finish flags for each area with these flags
corresponding to the colour of the turning buoys used in each area (see above)
Note: When more than one ocean area is used each area may be described by the colour of theturning buoys and flags e.g., pink area, blue area, white area, etc.
Scrutineering procedure
•
•
4.11

For ILS-managed events, a person appointed by the organising committee shall check the buoys,
flags, poles, beach markers, starting lines etc.
For ILS LWC or sanctioned events, a declaration from the competition organisers is required that
all equipment to be used in the competition will meet ILS standards.

Surf Skis
Surf skis must conform to ILS specifications including the following:•••

Weight: minimum 18kg *.
Length: maximum 5.80m.
Width: minimum width at widest point of hull is 480mm and shall not include any rubbing strips,
moulding or additional protective mouldings.

Video camera: If a camera is mounted on the surf ski it must be installed on a mounting device andtoggle strap supplied or recommended by the manufacturer of the device. The camera shall bemounted in front of the foot well.
* The weight of any plugs permanently installed into the craft to attach the camera is included in theoverall weight of the craft. The weight of other, non-permanently installed mount and camera are notincluded in the overall weight.
Detailed specifications for surf skis are described in a separate document located athttps://www.ilsf.org/lifesaving-sport/rules/irb-specification/.
Scrutineering procedure
•

•
•
4.12

When Surf Skis are scrutineered, they shall be checked for maximum length, minimum weight,
minimum widths, minimum rocker, and safety (e.g., state of repair). Paddles shall also bechecked for competitor safety. Minimum measuring equipment required: tape measure(minimum 10m with 1mm increments); weigh scale (minimum 20 kg capacity with 0.01 kg
increments). Also recommended is a measuring “jig” to check rocker and length, and testinggauges to measure minimum rudder and nose diameters, rudder thickness, hull curves andminimum ski width, etc.
The host organising committee shall provide a stamp or sticker to be affixed to each surf ski as
proof of the check.
For ILS LWC or sanctioned events, a declaration from the competition organisers is required thatall pooled skis to be used in the competition will meet ILS standards.

SwimwearA.

Swimwear for both ILS pool and ocean swim events and swim leg of events must comply withthe following standards:• Swimwear worn by men shall not extend above the navel or below the knee.
• Swimwear worn by women shall not cover the neck, shoulders or arms nor extend below
the knees. Two-piece swimsuits that conform to this standard may also be worn.

International Life Saving Federation
Competition Rule Book - 2023 Edition – Section 8 – Facility & Equipment Standards & Scrutineering Procedures

Man Swimsuits
Full Length
Not AllowedLong
Not Allowed

Woman Swimsuits
Full Length
ZipperedBack
Not Allowed
Not Allowed

B.

Long Legs
Not Allowed

Knee length
Allowed

Knee
Length,Open Back
AllowedSquare Leg
AllowedShort,
Open Back
AllowedPage S8-13

Short
AllowedTwo Piece
AllowedThe material and construction used in swimwear to be worn in all ILS pool and ocean events
shall be:•Only textile woven fabric(s) shall be permitted.
•
Non-woven and/or non-permeable (e.g., wetsuit type) materials shall not be permitted.
•
The material used shall have a maximum thickness of 0.8mm.
•
Other than string ties for the tops of man swimwear, the bottom and/or top of woman twopiece swimwear, and the back of woman one piece open back swimsuits, no zippers orother fastening systems shall be permitted.
•
The swimsuit worn by competitors shall not aid in their buoyancy.
•
Swimwear that provides flotation, pain reduction, chemical/medical stimulation or otherexternal stimulation or influence of any type shall be prohibited.
•
No outside application on the material shall be permitted. (Note: manufacturer brandings,
club names or similar are permitted).
Note 1: All swimwear stamped as being World Aquatics (FINA) compliant for Stillwater
swimming shall be acceptable for use in ILS competition.
Note 2: Except for swimmers in pool and ocean events, other protective clothing (e.g., shorts,
vests, t-shirts, etc.) may be worn by competitors in both individual and team events unlessotherwise prescribed by these rules or the event organising authority. Vests, t-shirts and shorts,
long leg tights, leg stockings and/or compression garments are only permitted to be worn in thepool line throw event and in non-swimming ocean/beach individual events or non-swimming
legs of ocean/beach team events.
Note 3: Board Paddlers may also wear protective clothing except that sleeves are not permitted
on the arms of competitors unless climatic conditions dictate and are approved by the Chief
Referee or their delegate.

Scrutineering procedure
When scrutineered a person appointed by the organising committee shall check the competitor
provided swimwear.